第五品:小双品显示巴利原文
5. Cūḷayamakavaggo
一、《沙喇婆罗门经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Sāleyyakasuttavaṇṇanā
439 “如是我闻”等句,即《萨雷亚卡经》。在这里,“于拘萨罗人中”(kosalesu):名为“拘萨罗”的,本是当地的王子们。他们所居住的那片区域,也依据惯用语而被称为“拘萨罗”,意即在拘萨罗国中。不过,古代的老师们曾这样讲述:从前,国王见到王子摩诃波那陀观看各种戏剧时,连一丝笑容都没有,便宣布:“谁能让我的儿子发笑,我就用一切庄严具来装扮他。”那时,人们连犁都丢下不管,大群民众聚集起来,用了七年多的时间表演种种娱乐,还是没能让他发笑。接着,帝释天派来了一位天界的舞者,那位舞者表演了天界的戏剧,才让他笑了起来。于是,人们便各自返回住处,在途中遇见朋友、同伴等,相互问候说:“喂,您安康吧?喂,您安康吧?”以此因缘,便依据这“安康,安康”(kusalaṃ kusalaṃ)的问候语,将那一片区域称为“拘萨罗”。显示巴利原文
439.Evaṃme sutanti sāleyyakasuttaṃ. Tattha kosalesūti kosalā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā. Tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena kosalāti vuccati, tasmiṃ kosalesu janapade. Porāṇā panāhu – yasmā pubbe mahāpanādaṃ rājakumāraṃ nānānāṭakāni disvā sitamattampi akarontaṃ sutvā rājā āha – ‘‘yo mama puttaṃ hasāpeti, sabbālaṅkārena naṃ alaṅkaromī’’ti. Tato naṅgalānipi chaḍḍetvā mahājanakāye sannipatite manussā sātirekāni sattavassāni nānākīḷikāyo dassetvā naṃ hasāpetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Tato sakko devanaṭaṃ pesesi. So dibbanāṭakaṃ dassetvā hasāpesi. Atha te manussā attano attano vasanokāsābhimukhā pakkamiṃsu. Te paṭipathe mittasuhajjādayo disvā paṭisanthāraṃ karontā, ‘‘kacci, bho, kusalaṃ, kacci, bho, kusala’’nti āhaṃsu. Tasmā taṃ ‘‘kusalaṃ kusala’’nti vacanaṃ upādāya so padeso kosalāti vuccatīti.
“游行”指从容地游历。“与大比丘僧团一起”指与人数不定的——或一百、或一千、或十万——大比丘僧团同行。“婆罗门村”:婆罗门们集会的村落可称婆罗门村,他们受用的村落亦可称婆罗门村;此处指集会村落。“他到达那里”即他进入那里,意思是“抵达”。然而,此处并未指定哪一座精舍;因此应知,在那村落附近有一处适合佛陀们停留的丛林,大师进入了那片丛林。“他们听闻了”指他们听到了,即顺着传入耳门的话语声而得知。“确实”是表决定的小品词,或仅用于补足语句。若表决定,应如此理解其义:“他们确确实实听到了,对他们中任何一人而言,听闻都无障碍。”若仅为补足语句,则只表示……显示巴利原文
Cārikaṃ caramānoti aturitacārikaṃ caramāno. Mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā satasahassaṃ vāti evaṃ aparicchinnena mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ. Brāhmaṇagāmoti brāhmaṇānaṃ samosaraṇagāmopi brāhmaṇagāmoti vuccati brāhmaṇānaṃ bhogagāmopi. Idha samosaraṇagāmo adhippeto. Tadavasarīti taṃ avasari, sampattoti attho. Vihāro panettha aniyāmito; tasmā tassa avidūre buddhānaṃ anucchaviko eko vanasaṇḍo bhavissati, satthā taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ gatoti veditabbo. Assosunti suṇiṃsu upalabhiṃsu. Sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena jāniṃsu. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe padapūraṇamatte vā nipāto. Tattha avadhāraṇatthena assosuṃyeva , na nesaṃ koci savanantarāyo ahosīti ayamattho veditabbo. Padapūraṇena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva.
现在,为了说明他们所听闻的内容,经文说道:“朋友们,确实有一位沙门,是乔达摩种姓的……”等。在这里,应知因已止息一切恶,故称“沙门”。“确实”是表传闻的小品词。“朋友”只是他们彼此招呼的称呼。“乔达摩”是从世尊的种姓来指称。所以,“朋友们,确实有一位沙门,是乔达摩种姓的”这句,应理解为:“朋友们,听说有一位沙门,属乔达摩种姓。”而“释迦子”一句,是表明世尊出身于高贵的族姓。“从释迦族出家”一句,是表明他依信心而出家。这就是说:他并未被任何衰败所征服,在那个家族尚未衰微之时,便凭信心舍弃了家族而出家。后面的语句,含义也相同。“而那位”是指代如此这般情形的对格表达,意为“对于那位乔达摩尊者”。“善”的意思是具足善好功德,即“最胜”之意。“称誉之声”即称誉本身,或者……显示巴利原文
Idāni yamatthaṃ assosuṃ, taṃ pakāsetuṃ samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha samitapāpattā samaṇoti veditabbo. Khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto. Bhoti tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ ālapanamattaṃ. Gotamoti bhagavato gottavasena paridīpanaṃ. Tasmā samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamoti ettha samaṇo kira, bho, gotamagottoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sakyaputtoti idaṃ pana bhagavato uccākulaparidīpanaṃ. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti saddhāpabbajitabhāvadīpanaṃ. Kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūto aparikkhīṇaṃyeva taṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāpabbajitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato paraṃ vuttatthameva. Taṃ kho panāti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato, seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kittiyeva, thutighoso vā. Abbhuggatoti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato. Kinti? ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā…pe… buddho bhagavā’’ti.
这里的句式关联如下:“彼世尊,由这些理由而为阿拉汉,由这些理由而为正自觉者……(中略)……由这些理由而为世尊。”这意思是说:“以这些原因,也以那些原因。”在这些原因当中,先以“已远离故、已摧破烦恼敌及轮回辐故、堪受资具等供养故、于行恶无隐秘故”等理由,建立了这样的纲要:“应知彼世尊即依这些理趣而称为阿拉汉。”所有这些词句,在《清净道论》的“佛随念”释文中都已详细解明,故其抉择应依彼处所说之理趣而了知。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ padasambandho – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti. Iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbotiādinā nayena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā sabbāneva etāni padāni visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritānīti tato tesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
“这确实是很好的”(Sādhu kho pana),意思是:这的确是美好的、善妙的,也就是能够带来利益、带来安乐。“那样的阿拉汉们”(Tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ)是指:就像那位乔达摩尊者一样,即使经历了无量百千俱胝劫,也难以值遇;他们身周环绕着一寻的光辉,以八十种随形好作庄严,以三十二种殊胜的大人相遍布全身,令瞻仰者身心愉悦,百看不厌,其说法之音极为甘美。因为他们如实证得了功德,所以在世间赢得了“阿拉汉”的尊称。“得见”(Dassanaṃ hoti)是说,哪怕只是以净信、柔和的眼睛瞻仰一番,这本身已经很好;但如果还能听到以八支具足的梵音在说法的世尊哪怕一个字,那就更好了——他们正怀着如此殷切的期盼。显示巴利原文
Sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho pana; atthāvahaṃ sukhāvahanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathārūpānaṃ arahatanti yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo, evarūpānaṃ anekehipi kappakoṭisatasahassehi dullabhadassanānaṃ byāmappabhāparikkhittehi asītianubyañjanaratanapaṭimaṇḍitehi dvattiṃsmahāpurisalakkhaṇavarehi samākiṇṇamanoramasarīrānaṃ atappakadassanānaṃ atimadhuradhammanigghosānaṃ, yathābhūtaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddānaṃ arahataṃ. Dassanaṃ hotīti pasādasommāni akkhīni ummīletvā dassanamattampi sādhu hoti. Sace pana aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena brahmassarena dhammaṃ desentassa ekaṃ padampi sotuṃ labhissāma, sādhutaraṃyeva bhavissatīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā.
“他们便前往世尊那里”(Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsū)的意思是:他们放下一切事务,满心欢喜地来了。“他们说了这番话”(Etadavocunti):问有两种——在家人的问法和出家人的问法。其中,以“尊者,什么是善,什么是不善?”这个方式发问,是在家人的问法;以“尊者,这些便是五取蕴”这个方式发问,是出家人的问法。而这些人在提出适合他们身份的在家人问题时,说出了这样的话:“乔达摩尊者,究竟是什么原因,什么缘……”等等。世尊为了使他们一时无法明白,便先以简略的方式来解答,开口说道:“各位居士,正是因为非法行、不正行……”等等。那么,世尊为何要用这种让他们一时不能明白的方式来解答呢?因为这些人自认聪明;假如世尊一开始就列出总纲让他们明白,然后再详细展开义理,他们就会觉得这法教浅白易懂,从而心生轻视,甚至会说:“要是我们来讲,也一样能这样讲。”因此,世尊为了不让他们立刻明白,便先以简略的方式回答。等他们由于无法明白而请求详细解说时,世尊为了进一步展开法义,便接着说:“居士们……”显示巴利原文
Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti sabbakiccāni pahāya tuṭṭhamānasā āgamaṃsu. Etadavocunti duvidhā hi pucchā agārikapucchā anagārikapucchā ca. Tattha ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusala’’nti iminā nayena agārikapucchā āgatā. ‘‘Ime kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā’’ti iminā nayena anagārikapucchā. Ime pana attano anurūpaṃ agārikapucchaṃ pucchantā etaṃ, ‘‘ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo’’tiādivacanaṃ avocuṃ. Tesaṃ bhagavā yathā na sakkonti sallakkhetuṃ, evaṃ saṃkhitteneva tāva pañhaṃ vissajjento, adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetu kho gahapatayotiādimāha. Kasmā pana bhagavā yathā na sallakkhenti, evaṃ vissajjesīti? Paṇḍitamānikā hi te; āditova mātikaṃ aṭṭhapetvā yathā sallakkhenti, evaṃ atthe vitthārite, desanaṃ uttānikāti maññantā avajānanti, mayampi kathentā evameva katheyyāmāti vattāro bhavanti. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā yathā na sakkonti sallakkhetuṃ, evaṃ saṃkhitteneva tāva pañhaṃ vissajjesi. Tato sallakkhetuṃ asakkontehi vitthāradesanaṃ yācito vitthārena desetuṃ, tena hi gahapatayotiādimāha. Tattha tena hīti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Yasmā maṃ tumhe yācatha, tasmāti attho.
440 “三种”(Tividhanti)指以三个部分来划分。“以身”(Kāyena)指通过身门造作。“非法行、非正行”(Adhammacariyāvisamacariyā)意为:名为非法行的非正行。这里具体的词义是:行于非法即是非法行,也就是造作非法的事情;不正当地行,或者说造作不正的业,就叫非正行。因为这种行为既是非法行,同时又是非正行,所以合称为“非法行、非正行”。依此类推,一切黑法(不善)与白法(善)中的相关词义都应如此理解。“残酷的”(Luddoti)指凶暴。“暴虐的”(Dāruṇoti)指行为残忍。“手沾鲜血”(Lohitapāṇī)指那些夺取他人生命的人,其手被鲜血染污。即使实际上并没有沾到血,这样的人依然被称为“手沾鲜血者”。住于杀戮与迫害之中(Hatappahate niviṭṭhoti),指心思沉溺于对他人的杀戮和打击,以及对他人的致命伤害之中。“无怜……”显示巴利原文
440.Tividhanti tīhi koṭṭhāsehi. Kāyenāti kāyadvārena. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāti adhammacariyasaṅkhātā visamacariyā. Ayaṃ panettha padattho, adhammassa cariyā adhammacariyā, adhammakaraṇanti attho. Visamā cariyā, visamassa vā kammassa cariyāti visamacariyā. Adhammacariyā ca sā visamacariyā cāti adhammacariyāvisamacariyā. Etenupāyena sabbesu kaṇhasukkapadesu attho veditabbo. Luddoti kakkhaḷo. Dāruṇoti sāhasiko. Lohitapāṇīti paraṃ jīvitā voropentassa pāṇī lohitena lippanti. Sacepi na lippanti, tathāvidho lohitapāṇītveva vuccati. Hatappahate niviṭṭhoti hate ca parassa pahāradāne , pahate ca paramāraṇe niviṭṭho. Adayāpannoti nikkaruṇataṃ āpanno.
“凡是他人所有的”(Yaṃ taṃ parassāti),指凡是属于他人的东西。“他人财物资具”(Paravittūpakaraṇanti),即属于他人的、能令物主心生喜悦的资生器具。“或在村内的”(Gāmagataṃ vāti),指存放在村庄中的。“或在阿兰若中的”(Araññagataṃ vāti),指存放在旷野树林的树顶、山顶等处的。“未给与的”(Adinnanti),指物主并未经由身或语给与过。所谓“称为偷盗的”(Theyyasaṅkhātanti):此处,“贼”(theno)即指小偷。偷窃的行为状态是“偷盗”(theyyaṃ),这是指怀有夺取之心。“称为”(saṅkhā)与“名为”(saṅkhāta)在意义上相同,都是指一个部分、一种类别,正如在“想为因,确有戏论种类”(saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā)等经文中的用法。它既是偷盗,又是一种被如此称呼的心,因此称为“称为偷盗的”(theyyasaṅkhātaṃ),意思是被称为偷盗之心的。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ taṃ parassāti yaṃ taṃ parassa santakaṃ. Paravittūpakaraṇanti tasseva parassa vittūpakaraṇaṃ tuṭṭhijananaṃ parikkhārabhaṇḍakaṃ. Gāmagataṃ vāti antogāme vā ṭhapitaṃ. Araññagataṃ vāti araññe rukkhaggapabbatamatthakādīsu vā ṭhapitaṃ. Adinnanti tehi parehi kāyena vā vācāya vā adinnaṃ. Theyyasaṅkhātanti ettha thenoti coro. Thenassa bhāvo theyyaṃ, avaharaṇacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekaṃ, koṭṭhāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu viya. Theyyañca taṃ saṅkhātañcāti theyyasaṅkhātaṃ, theyyacittasaṅkhāto eko cittakoṭṭhāsoti attho . Karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, tasmā theyyasaṅkhātenāti atthato daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在“母护”等词中,若女孩的父亲失踪或去世,母亲以提供衣食等方式照料她,心想:“待她成年,我将她嫁入良家。”如此由母亲守护的女孩,即名为“母护”。以此类推,“父护”等也可了解。此外,门当户对的家族之间,有时会在胎儿尚在母腹中时便订立约定:“若我生得儿子,你生得女儿,那此女便不得另嫁他人,须做我家儿子的妻子。”如此,即便尚在母胎中便已被确定了归属的女孩,名为“有夫”。凡是针对某村、某户或某条街道订下罚则,规定:“凡与名为某某的女人交合者,当罚其如此多钱”,如此的女人名为“有罚”。乃至“仅以花环围绕者”:这是说最简便的形式,即某人仅以“此女将成为我的妻子”之心,将花环掷于其身,单凭花环的围绕便确立了关系。若对上述此类女子,依照《正见经》中所说的邪淫特征去侵犯,便构成犯行。显示巴利原文
Māturakkhitātiādīsu yaṃ pitari naṭṭhe vā mate vā ghāsacchādanādīhi paṭijaggamānā, vayapattaṃ kulaghare dassāmīti mātā rakkhati, ayaṃ māturakkhitā nāma. Etenupāyena piturakkhitādayopi veditabbā. Sabhāgakulāni pana kucchigatesupi gabbhesu katikaṃ karonti – ‘‘sace mayhaṃ putto hoti, tuyhaṃ dhītā, aññattha gantuṃ na labhissati, mayhaṃ puttasseva hotū’’ti. Evaṃ gabbhepi pariggahitā sassāmikā nāma. ‘‘Yo itthannāmaṃ itthiṃ gacchati, tassa ettako daṇḍo’’ti evaṃ gāmaṃ vā gehaṃ vā vīthiṃ vā uddissa ṭhapitadaṇḍā, pana saparidaṇḍā nāma. Antamaso mālāguṇaparikkhittāpīti yā sabbantimena paricchedena, ‘‘esā me bhariyā bhavissatī’’ti saññāya tassā upari kenaci mālāguṇaṃ khipantena mālāguṇamattenāpi parikkhittā hoti. Tathārūpāsu cārittaṃ āpajjitā hotīti evarūpāsu itthīsu sammādiṭṭhisutte vuttamicchācāralakkhaṇavasena vītikkamaṃ kattā hoti.
“在会议厅中”(Sabhāgato),指身处会议厅。“在众中”(Parisāgato),指身处大众集会中。“在亲族间”(Ñātimajjhagato),指身处有继承权的亲属当中。“在团体中”(Pūgamajjhagato),指身处各类行会团体中。“在王族中”(Rājakulamajjhagato),指身处王族作出重大判决的场合中。“被引前”(Abhinīto),指被带去讯问。“被作为证人询问”(Sakkhipuṭṭho),指被当作证人来审问。“来,男子!”(Ehambho purisā),这是一句招呼语。“为己或为人”(Attahetu vā parahetu vā),指为了自己或他人,为了手脚等身体上的利益,或是为了财物。“为些许利益或微物”(Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vā),此处,“利益”(āmisa)特指利得、好处。“微物”(kiñcikkha)指任何微小之物,哪怕小到仅如一串鹧鸪肉、一串鹌鹑肉、一小团生酥,乃至一小团鲜奶油等微不足道的贿赂。知而说谎(Sampajānamusāvādo),指经深思熟虑后故意说出的虚诳语。显示巴利原文
Sabhāgatoti sabhāyaṃ ṭhito. Parisāgatoti parisāyaṃ ṭhito. Ñātimajjhagatoti dāyādānaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Pūgamajjhagatoti senīnaṃ majjhe ṭhito. Rājakulamajjhagatoti rājakulassa majjhe mahāvinicchaye ṭhito . Abhinītoti pucchanatthāya nīto. Sakkhipuṭṭhoti sakkhiṃ katvā pucchito. Ehambho purisāti ālapanametaṃ. Attahetu vā parahetu vāti attano vā parassa vā hatthapādādihetu vā dhanahetu vā. Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vāti ettha āmisanti lābho adhippeto. Kiñcikkhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ. Antamaso tittiravaṭṭakasappipiṇḍanavanītapiṇḍādimattakassapi lañjassa hetūti attho. Sampajānamusā bhāsitā hotīti jānantoyeva musāvādaṃ kattā hoti.
「为离间他们」(Imesaṃ bhedāya),指为了离间此处所说的这几个人。「为离间那些」(Amūsaṃ bhedāya),指为了离间彼处所说的那几个人。如是,「或为和合者的离间者」(Iti samaggānaṃ vā bhedako),即这样去离间原本和睦的两个伙伴。「或为已离间者的助成者」(Bhinnānaṃ vā anuppadātā),指对已经分裂的人说:“你做得太好了!你若这样把他抛弃,过不了几天他必定遭殃。”像这样,在他们的不和之中进一步充当鼓动者、支持者、提供理由的人,这就是其意。喜好朋党、乐于朋党、悦于朋党,是他的所好,故称为「好党者」(vaggārāmo)。「好党者」(Vaggarato),即热衷、欢喜于结党的人。「见闻党类而喜悦」(Vagge disvā vā sutvā vā nandatīti vagganandī),指一见到或听到有党派纷争便感到高兴。「说作党语」(Vaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ),指他说出了那种能令本来和睦的众生也分裂成党的言语。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃbhedāyāti yesaṃ itoti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ hoti, tesaṃ bhedāya. Amūsaṃ bhedāyāti yesaṃ amutrāti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ hoti, tesaṃ bhedāya. Iti samaggānaṃ vā bhedakāti evaṃ samaggānaṃ vā dvinnaṃ sahāyakānaṃ bhedaṃ kattā. Bhinnānaṃ vā anuppadātāti suṭṭhu kataṃ tayā, taṃ pajahantena katipāheneva te mahantaṃ anatthaṃ kareyyāti evaṃ bhinnānaṃ puna asaṃsandanāya anuppadātā upatthambhetā kāraṇaṃ dassetāti attho. Vaggo ārāmo abhiratiṭṭhānamassāti vaggārāmo. Vaggaratoti vaggesu rato. Vagge disvā vā sutvā vā nandatīti vagganandī. Vaggakaraṇiṃ vācanti yā vācā samaggepi satte vagge karoti bhindati, taṃ kalahakāraṇaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā hoti.
「生瘤」(Aṇḍakā),如同有病的树木会长出瘤节,由于内心有过失、怀瞋恚,便通过骂詈、轻蔑等言语,说出如同瘤节般粗恶的话。「粗涩」(Kakkasā),意为腐败。正如一棵腐烂的树粗糙不堪,不断掉落碎屑;这种言语也是如此粗涩,入耳时好像在摩擦耳朵一般。因此称为“粗涩”。「恼他」(Parakaṭukā),指令他人生起苦涩不悦,引发过失。「刺他」(Parābhisajjanī),如同弯曲带刺的枝条,刺中要害后便无法甩脱,即使想要挣脱也挣脱不了,被牢牢钩住。这是指使人内心受阻,困陷其中。「近瞋」(Kodhasāmantā),邻近瞋恚。「不趣于定」(Asamādhisaṃvattanikā),指不能导向安止定或近行定。以上这一切,都是有过患之语的同义语。显示巴利原文
Aṇḍakāti yathā sadose rukkhe aṇḍakāni uṭṭhahanti, evaṃ sadosatāya khuṃsanāvambhanādivacanehi aṇḍakā jātā. Kakkasāti pūtikā. Yathā nāma pūtikarukkho kakkaso hoti paggharitacuṇṇo, evaṃ kakkasā hoti, sotaṃ ghaṃsamānā viya pavisati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kakkasā’’ti. Parakaṭukāti paresaṃ kaṭukā amanāpā dosajananī. Parābhisajjanīti kuṭilakaṇṭakasākhā viya mammesu vijjhitvā paresaṃ abhisajjanī gantukāmānampi gantuṃ adatvā lagganakārī. Kodhasāmantāti kodhassa āsannā. Asamādhisaṃvattanikāti appanāsamādhissa vā upacārasamādhissa vā asaṃvattanikā. Iti sabbāneva tāni sadosavācāya vevacanāni.
「非时说者」(Akālavādī),指在非时的时候说话。「非实说者」(Abhūtavādī),指说不真实、不存在的事。「非义说者」(Anatthavādī),指说无道理、无利益的话。「非法说者」(Adhammavādī),指说违于真实法性的话。「非律说者」(Avinayavādī),指说与防护律仪、律藏不相应的话。「无藏之语」(Anidhānavati vācaṃ),指他所说的话语毫无价值,根本不值得收藏在心的宝匣中。「非时」(Akālena),指在应当说话的时机之前或之后,于不恰当的时间开口说话。「无经据」(Anapadesanti),指没有经教的依据。「无边际」(Apariyantavatiṃ),指他的话没有界限、漫无边际,把经文或本生故事搁在一边,也不引用从中所出的譬喻或事由,只讲一些外道的闲杂语。如此一搁,便真的彻底搁置了,令人疑惑:“他到底是在讲经文,还是在讲本生故事?我们完全看不到他说话的尽头和边际。”就好比孟加拉榕的枝条,垂下的气根落到哪里,便在哪里扎根、繁茂。显示巴利原文
Akālavādīti akālena vattā. Abhūtavādīti yaṃ natthi, tassa vattā. Anatthavādīti akāraṇanissitaṃ vattā. Adhammavādīti asabhāvaṃ vattā . Avinayavādīti asaṃvaravinayapaṭisaṃyuttassa vattā. Anidhānavati vācanti hadayamañjūsāyaṃ nidhetuṃ ayuttaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā hoti. Akālenāti vattabbakālassa pubbe vā pacchā vā ayuttakāle vattā hoti. Anapadesanti suttāpadesavirahitaṃ. Apariyantavatinti aparicchedaṃ, suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā tassa upalabbhaṃ vā upamaṃ vā vatthuṃ vā āharitvā bāhirakathaṃyeva katheti. Nikkhittaṃ nikkhittameva hoti. ‘‘Suttaṃ nu kho katheti jātakaṃ nu kho, nassa antaṃ vā koṭiṃ vā passāmā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Yathā vaṭarukkhasākhānaṃ gatagataṭṭhāne pārohā otaranti, otiṇṇotiṇṇaṭṭhāne sampajjitvā puna vaḍḍhantiyeva . Evaṃ aḍḍhayojanampi yojanampi gacchantiyeva, gacchante gacchante pana mūlarukkho vinassati, paveṇijātakāva tiṭṭhanti. Evamayampi nigrodhadhammakathiko nāma hoti; nikkhittaṃ nikkhittamattameva katvā passeneva pariharanto gacchati. Yo pana bahumpi bhaṇanto etadatthamidaṃ vuttanti āharitvā jānāpetuṃ sakkoti, tassa kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Anatthasaṃhitanti na atthanissitaṃ.
「有贪欲者」(Abhijjhātā hotī)是指以贪欲之心去觊觎、注视的人。「啊,但愿」(Aho vatā)是表达内心强烈渴望与希求的感叹词。在这里,仅仅以贪欲的眼光去看,尚不足以构成业道。然而,当有人这样想:“啊,但愿这能成为我的所有,让我能在这里随心所欲地支配它”,从而在心中将其占为己有时,便构成了业道。此处所指的正是这一点。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhātā hotīti abhijjhāya oloketā hoti. Aho vatāti patthanatthe nipāto. Abhijjhāya olokitamattakena cettha kammapathabhedo na hoti. Yadā pana, ‘‘aho vatidaṃ mama santakaṃ assa, ahamettha vasaṃ vatteyya’’nti attano pariṇāmeti, tadā kammapathabhedo hoti, ayamidha adhippeto.
「心败恶」(Byāpannacitto)指心已败坏、腐坏之人。「意恶思」(Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo)指因嗔怒而心怀恶毒意图。所谓「愿他们被杀」(Haññantū),就是希望他们被杀死。「愿他们被戮」(Vajjhantū),就是希望他们遭受杀害。「愿他们不存在」(Mā vā ahesuṃ),就是希望他们彻底消失。在这些情形下,仅仅生气并不违犯业道,唯以“愿被杀”等恶意思惟才会违犯,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Byāpannacittoti vipannacitto pūtibhūtacitto. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappoti dosena duṭṭhacittasaṅkappo. Haññantūti ghātiyantū. Vajjhantūti vadhaṃ pāpuṇantu. Mā vā ahesunti kiñcipi mā ahesuṃ. Idhāpi kopamattakena kammapathabhedo na hoti. Haññantūtiādicintaneneva hoti, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
「邪见者」指持有不善见解的人。「颠倒见者」指持有了颠倒的见解。他说「没有布施」,意思是布施没有果报。「所供」是指大型的祭祀,「所献」是指馈赠的礼敬,对于这两者,他也是通过否认它们的果报而加以否定。所谓「善行与恶行」指的就是善与不善业;他说「果报、异熟」——凡是被称为果或异熟的,都不存在。他说「没有此世」,是指对一个住在他世的人而言,没有此世。他说「没有他世」,是指对一个住在此世的人而言,也没有他世,一切有情就在各自所在之处断灭。他说「没有母亲、没有父亲」,是依据对他们行正行或邪行不会带来果报而说的。他说「没有化生有情」,是指没有死后投生到各处的有情。所谓「那些以神通亲自证知并宣说者」,指的是那些以殊胜的智慧亲自对此世和他世照见如实、并宣说出来的人;他说这些人也不存在,这是在表明一切知佛不存在。至此,便讲述了基于十种事由的邪见。显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhikoti akusaladassano. Viparītadassanoti vipallatthadassano. Natthi dinnanti dinnassa phalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo. Hutanti paheṇakasakkāro adhippeto, tampi ubhayaṃ phalābhāvameva sandhāya paṭikkhipati. Sukatadukkaṭānanti sukatadukkaṭānaṃ, kusalākusalānanti attho. Phalaṃ vipākoti yaṃ phalanti vā vipākoti vā vuccati, taṃ natthīti vadati. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthi. Natthi paro lokoti idha loke ṭhitassapi paraloko natthi, sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantīti dasseti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalābhāvavasena vadati. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavitvā upapajjanakasattā nāma natthīti vadati. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentīti ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya sayaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā pavedenti, te natthīti sabbaññubuddhānaṃ abhāvaṃ dīpeti, ettāvatā dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi kathitā hoti.
441 “离杀生”等七种业道,在《小象迹喻经》中已有详细解说。“无贪欲”等,其义浅显易明。显示巴利原文
441.Pāṇātipātaṃpahāyātiādayo satta kammapathā cūḷahatthipade vitthāritā. Anabhijjhādayo uttānatthāyeva.
442 “得生为同侣”,意思是达到与那些天共处的状态。“梵身天”,即初禅地的诸天。“光音天”并非一个独立的天,而是少光天、无量光天、光音天的总称。至于“少光天”等,则是不把它们总归为一类,而分别加以列举。“少净天”等,道理也是一样。显示巴利原文
442.Sahabyataṃ upapajjeyyanti sahabhāvaṃ upagaccheyyaṃ. Brahmakāyikānaṃ devānanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmidevānaṃ. Ābhānaṃ devānanti ābhā nāma visuṃ natthi, parittābhaappamāṇābhaābhassarānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Parittābhānantiādi pana ekato aggahetvā tesaṃyeva bhedato gahaṇaṃ. Parittasubhānantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti bhagavā āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.
不过,在此处停下之后,应当把天界合在一起计算。先就三禅那地来说,共有九种梵天界;五净居天加上四无色界,共为九种,合这两份便是十八种;加上广果天成十九种;再把无想天计入,一共是二十种梵天界。如此,与六欲界天合计,总共有二十六种天界。对于这一切天界的投生,世尊都是通过十善业道来开示的。显示巴利原文
Idha ṭhatvā pana devalokā samānetabbā. Tissannaṃ tāva jhānabhūmīnaṃ vasena nava brahmalokā, pañca suddhāvāsā catūhi ārūpehi saddhiṃ navāti aṭṭhārasa, vehapphalehi saddhiṃ ekūnavīsati, te asaññaṃ pakkhipitvā vīsati brahmalokā honti, evaṃ chahi kāmāvacarehi saddhiṃ chabbīsati devalokā nāma. Tesaṃ sabbesampi bhagavatā dasakusalakammapathehi nibbatti dassitā.
其中,于六欲界中,唯由三种善行之果报而得生。至于更上诸天,这些业道则是以近依而言说。因为十善业道即是戒,持戒者修习遍作才能成就。依止于戒,修习遍作而证得初禅,则生于初禅地;证得第二禅等,则生于第二禅地等。以色界禅为近依,增长观智,住于不来果后,生于五净居天。以色界禅为近依而证得无色界定,则生于四无色界天。以色界与无色界禅为近依,增长观智,则证得阿拉汉果。至于无想有情天,乃是外道苦行者与游方者之所计执,故此处未予提及。其余各处,文义明显。显示巴利原文
Tattha chasu tāva kāmāvacaresu tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ vipākeneva nibbatti hoti. Uparidevalokānaṃ pana ime kammapathā upanissayavasena kathitā . Dasa kusalakammapathā hi sīlaṃ, sīlavato ca kasiṇaparikammaṃ ijjhatīti. Sīle patiṭṭhāya kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ nibbattati; dutiyādīni bhāvetvā dutiyajjhānabhūmiādīsu nibbattati; rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhito pañcasu suddhāvāsesu nibbattati; rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā arūpāvacarasamāpattiṃ nibbattetvā catūsu arūpesu nibbattati; rūpārūpajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Asaññabhavo pana bāhirakānaṃ tāpasaparibbājakānaṃ āciṇṇoti idha na niddiṭṭho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
2. 毗兰若经注疏显示巴利原文
2. Verañjakasuttavaṇṇanā
444 “如是我闻”等,是《毗兰若经》。其中,“毗兰若众”即毗兰若的居民。“以某件应办事”指某件不确定的事务。其余一切皆应如前经所述之方式了知。唯此处乃依“行非法者、行不平等道者”作补特伽罗施设之开示,前经则作法施设之开示,此为差别。其余相同。显示巴利原文
444.Evaṃme sutanti verañjakasuttaṃ. Tattha verañjakāti verañjavāsino. Kenacideva karaṇīyenāti kenacideva aniyamitakiccena. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ purimasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kevalañhi idha adhammacārī visamacārīti evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā. Purimasutte dhammādhiṭṭhānāti ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.
3. 大吠陀罗经注疏显示巴利原文
3. Mahāvedallasuttavaṇṇanā
449 “如是我闻”等,是《大吠陀罗经》。其中,“具寿”是表恭敬、随喜的称呼。“大拘絺罗”是那位长老的名字。“从独处出定”指从果定出定。“劣慧者、劣慧”:此处并非谓慧有劣恶,而是无慧、缺慧的意思。“依何量而”是问因由之分齐,即依何情形、具足何量而得名。问有五种:未见解明问、已见合致问、断疑问、同意问、欲说问。这些差别如下——显示巴利原文
449.Evaṃme sutanti mahāvedallasuttaṃ. Tattha āyasmāti sagāravasappatissavacanametaṃ. Mahākoṭṭhikoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhito. Duppañño duppaññoti ettha paññāya duṭṭhaṃ nāma natthi, appañño nippaññoti attho. Kittāvatā nu khoti kāraṇaparicchedapucchā, kittakena nu kho evaṃ vuccatīti attho. Pucchā ca nāmesā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā, vimaticchedanāpucchā, anumatipucchā, kathetukamyatāpucchāti pañcavidhā hoti. Tāsamidaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ –
什么是「未见阐明问」?当某一事物的特征本然未知、未见、未衡量、未审决、未明了、未显明时,为了了知、见到、衡量、审决、明了、显明它而提出问题,这便是「未见阐明问」。显示巴利原文
Katamā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā.
什么是「已见合致问」?当某一事物的特征本然已知、已见、已衡量、已审决、已明了、已显明时,为了与其他智者互相印证而提出问题,这便是「已见合致问」。显示巴利原文
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ, aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā.
什么是「断疑问」?有人本性即堕入疑惑、陷入犹豫,心中生起两端:「是这样吗?不是这样吗?到底是什么?究竟如何?」为了断除疑惑而提出问题,这便是「断疑问」。显示巴利原文
Katamā vimaticchedanāpucchā? Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando, dveḷhakajāto, ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, so vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā (mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12).
像这样,世尊说法时,先取得听众的认可再提问,如:‘诸比丘,你们如何思惟?色是常还是无常?’‘无常,尊者。’(《大品》21),这种提问即称为「同意问」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vāti? Aniccaṃ, bhante’’ti (mahāva. 21) evarūpā anumatiṃ gahetvā dhammadesanākāle pucchā anumatipucchā nāma.
像这样,自己向比丘僧团提问,又想自己解答的提问,如:‘诸比丘,有四念处,哪四种呢?’(《相应部》5.390),这种提问称为「欲说问」。在这些提问中,这里所指的正是「已见合致问」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārome , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā, katame cattāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.390) evarūpā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sayameva pucchitvā sayameva vissajjetukāmassa pucchā kathetukamyatāpucchā nāma. Tāsu idha diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā adhippetā.
长老在自己的昼间住处坐下,自己发起问题,自己决断,将这部经从头至尾贯穿到底。实则,有的人只能发起问题而不能决断;有的人能决断却不能发起问题;有的人两者皆不能;有的人两者皆能。于此之中,长老是两者皆能的。何以故?因为他具足「大慧」。正是依于大慧,在此教法中,舍利弗长老、大迦旃延长老、富楼那长老、童子迦叶长老、阿难长老,以及此位尊者等众多长老,才证得了殊胜的地位。因为并非任何仅有微小智慧的比丘,就能抵达声闻波罗蜜智的顶点;然而具足大慧者却能。因此,舍利弗长老正是凭借大慧,才证得那地位。在智慧方面,无有能与长老相提并论者。正因如此,世尊把他安立为第一,说道:‘诸比丘,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,最具大慧者,即是这位舍利弗。’(《增支部》1.189)显示巴利原文
Thero hi attano divāṭṭhāne nisīditvā sayameva pañhaṃ samuṭṭhapetvā sayaṃ vinicchinanto idaṃ suttaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya matthakaṃ pāpesi. Ekacco hi pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetuṃyeva sakkoti na nicchetuṃ; ekacco nicchetuṃ sakkoti na samuṭṭhāpetuṃ; ekacco ubhayampi na sakkoti; ekacco ubhayampi sakkoti. Tesu thero ubhayampi sakkotiyeva. Kasmā? Mahāpaññatāya. Mahāpaññaṃ nissāya hi imasmiṃ sāsane sāriputtatthero, mahākaccānatthero, puṇṇatthero, kumārakassapatthero, ānandatthero, ayameva āyasmāti sambahulā therā visesaṭṭhānaṃ adhigatā. Na hi sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā sāvakapāramīñāṇassa matthakaṃ pāpuṇituṃ, mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya sāriputtatthero taṃ ṭhānaṃ adhigato. Paññāya hi therena sadiso natthi. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ mahāpaññānaṃ yadidaṃ sāriputto’’ti (a. ni. 1.189).
同样地,并非任何一个仅具少许智慧的比丘,就能将世尊简略所说的法,与一切知智对照、会通之后,详细地分别其义理;唯有具大智慧者方能胜任。因此,大迦旃延长老凭其大慧,于此领域成为堪能之人。正是由于这个缘故,世尊将他安立为首位,说:“比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,能将简略所说的义理详细分析的,即是大迦旃延。”显示巴利原文
Tathā na sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā bhagavatā saṃkhittena bhāsitassa sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā samānetvā vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajetuṃ, mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya mahākaccānatthero tattha paṭibalo jāto, teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajantānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākaccāno’’ti (a. ni. 1.197).
同样地,并非任何一个仅具少许智慧的比丘在说法时,便能援引十种论事、分析七种清净而来说法;唯有具大智慧者方能如此。因此,富楼那长老凭其大慧,在四众弟子围绕之中,登上庄严的法座,手持彩扇,如满月般优雅自在地说法。正是由于这个缘故,世尊将他安立为首位,说:“比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,诸说法者之中,满慈子最为第一。”显示巴利原文
Tathā na sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā dhammakathaṃ kathentena dasa kathāvatthūni āharitvā satta visuddhiyo vibhajantena dhammakathaṃ kathetuṃ, mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya puṇṇatthero catuparisamajjhe alaṅkatadhammāsane cittabījaniṃ gahetvā nisinno līḷāyanto puṇṇacando viya dhammaṃ kathesi. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ yadidaṃ puṇṇo mantāṇiputto’’ti (a. ni. 1.196).
同样地,一个仅具少许智慧的比丘在说法时,会这样或那样地摸索着前行,如同盲人拿着探路棍的末端,又如登上单板独木桥一般。然而,具大智慧者则会先抛出一首四句偈颂,接着引出种种譬喻与理由,掌握三藏佛语,上下贯通地来讲说。而童子迦叶长老凭其大慧,抛出一首四句偈颂后,便引出譬喻与理由,再将这些内容融会贯通——犹如使天然湖泊开满五彩花朵,又如于须弥山顶燃起一盏千芯的明灯——将三藏佛语上下贯通地讲说出来。正是由于这个缘故,世尊将他安立为首位,说:“比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,言辞巧妙动听者,童子迦叶最为第一。”显示巴利原文
Tathā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgato bhikkhu dhammaṃ kathento ito vā etto vā anukkamitvā yaṭṭhikoṭiṃ gahetvā andho viya, ekapadikaṃ daṇḍakasetuṃ āruḷho viya ca gacchati. Mahāpañño pana catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ nikkhipitvā upamā ca kāraṇāni ca āharitvā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ gahetvā heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto kathesi. Mahāpaññatāya pana kumārakassapatthero catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ nikkhipitvā upamā ca kāraṇāni ca āharitvā tehi saddhiṃ yojento jātassare pañcavaṇṇāni kusumāni phullāpento viya sinerumatthake vaṭṭisahassaṃ telapadīpaṃ jālento viya tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto kathesi. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cittakathikānaṃ yadidaṃ kumārakassapo’’ti (a. ni. 1.217).
同样的道理,一个仅具些许微劣智慧的比丘,纵使花上四个月,也无法掌握一首四句偈。然而,具大智慧者,仅仅立足于一句,便能掌握上百句乃至上千句。阿难长老则因具足大智慧,仅凭一次忆持,只听一遍而不需再问,便一口气掌握了六万法句、一万五千偈颂,其轻松宛如从藤蔓间抽出花朵。凡他所持者,如同刻在石上的铭文,又如封在金瓶中的狮子油,就以所持的原样安住不动。正因如此,世尊将他置于首位,说:‘诸比丘,于我声闻比丘弟子中,具足正行者,阿难为最上;具足正念者、具足坚忍耐力者、多闻者、侍者,阿难为最上。’显示巴利原文
Tathā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgato bhikkhu catūhi māsehi catuppadikampi gāthaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti. Mahāpañño pana ekapade ṭhatvā padasatampi padasahassampi gaṇhāti. Ānandatthero pana mahāpaññatāya ekapaduddhāre ṭhatvā sakiṃyeva sutvā puna apucchanto saṭṭhi padasahassāni pannarasa gāthāsahassāni valliyā pupphāni ākaḍḍhitvā gaṇhanto viya ekappahāreneva gaṇhāti. Gahitagahitaṃ pāsāṇe khatalekhā viya, suvaṇṇaghaṭe pakkhittasīhavasā viya ca gahitākāreneva tiṭṭhati. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ gatimantānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando , satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, bahussutānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223).
确实,并非任何仅有些许智慧的比丘,都能到达四无碍解分别的顶峰。唯有具大智慧者方能。摩诃俱絺罗长老正是以其大智慧,凭借证悟、遍问、听闻与宿世串习之力,证得了内涵无量理趣且殊胜卓绝的无碍解分别。以此之故,世尊将他置于首位,如是说:‘诸比丘,于我声闻比丘弟子中,证得无碍解者,摩诃俱絺罗为最上。’显示巴利原文
Na hi sakkā yāya vā tāya vā appamattikāya paññāya samannāgatena bhikkhunā catupaṭisambhidāpabhedassa matthakaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Mahāpaññena pana sakkāti mahāpaññatāya mahākoṭṭhitatthero adhigamaparipucchāsavanapubbayogānaṃ vasena anantanayussadaṃ paṭisambhidāpabhedaṃ patto. Teneva naṃ bhagavā etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisambhidāpattānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākoṭṭhito’’ti (a. ni. 1.218).
如此,长老因具大智慧,既能提出问题,又能决断问题,二者皆能成办。他于白日的坐处坐下,自行提出一切问题并自行决断,将这部经自始至终通达究竟后,心想:‘善哉!这真是庄严的法义开示。我应与我的长兄——法将舍利弗——共同审校。如是,这部经由我们二人同心确立后,将变得极其坚固,犹如石伞;对欲渡四瀑流者,它有如渡口备下的舟船;对欲行道者,它有如套上千匹良骏的宝车,能带来广大利益。’于是,为了与对方审校见解,他提出了问题。因此才说:‘此处是指为了审校见解而提问。’显示巴利原文
Iti thero mahāpaññatāya pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetumpi nicchetumpīti ubhayampi sakkoti. So divāṭṭhāne nisīditvā sayameva sabbapañhe samuṭṭhapetvā sayaṃ vinicchinanto idaṃ suttaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya matthakaṃ pāpetvā, ‘‘sobhanā vata ayaṃ dhammadesanā, jeṭṭhabhātikena naṃ dhammasenāpatinā saddhiṃ saṃsandissāmi, tato ayaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ ekamatiyā ekajjhāsayena ca ṭhapitā atigarukā bhavissati pāsāṇacchattasadisā, caturoghanittharaṇatthikānaṃ titthe ṭhapitanāvā viya, maggagamanatthikānaṃ sahassayuttaājaññaratho viya bahupakārā bhavissatī’’ti diṭṭhasaṃsandanatthaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tāsu idha diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā adhippetā’’ti.
“不了知”一词,意指因不了知故被称为“劣慧者”。此即其义,此理则适用于一切处。“于‘此是苦’不了知”,即不能依真实自相了知苦圣谛——“这是苦,苦唯此量,更无过此”。“于‘此是苦之集’不了知”,即不能依真实自相了知“苦从此集起”——那令流转之苦生起的渴爱即是集圣谛。“于‘此是苦之灭’不了知”,即不能依真实自相了知“此苦与此苦之集,在到达某种境地后便灭尽”——二者不再生起的涅槃即是灭圣谛。“于‘此是导向苦灭之道’不了知”,即不能依真实自相了知“此道通向苦之灭尽”——那道即是道圣谛。其后段落亦应依同一理趣了知其义。简言之,应知此处所说者,乃一位以四圣谛为业处之人。显示巴利原文
Nappajānātīti ettha yasmā nappajānāti, tasmā duppaññoti vuccatīti ayamattho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Idaṃ dukkhanti nappajānātīti idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, ito uddhaṃ natthīti dukkhasaccaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānāti. Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti ito dukkhaṃ samudetīti pavattidukkhapabhāvikā taṇhā samudayasaccanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānāti. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti idaṃ dukkhaṃ ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo ca idaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhatīti ubhinnaṃ appavatti nibbānaṃ nirodhasaccanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānāti. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti ayaṃ paṭipadā dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchatīti maggasaccaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato na pajānātīti. Anantaravārepi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Saṅkhepato panettha catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko puggalo kathitoti veditabbo.
此人于老师跟前,由听闻而学习四圣谛。他确认:除渴爱外,三界一切法为苦圣谛;渴爱为集圣谛;二者不再生起的涅槃为灭圣谛;遍知苦圣谛、断除集圣谛、证达灭谛之道为道圣谛。如是学后,便生执取。其中,前二谛属流转,后二谛属还灭。众生对流转生起执取,而非对还灭,故当他执取时,即执取于苦圣谛。显示巴利原文
Ayañhi ācariyasantike cattāri saccāni savanato uggaṇhāti. Ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ tebhūmakā dhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nibbānaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, dukkhasaccaṃ parijānanto samudayasaccaṃ pajahanto nirodhapāpano maggo maggasaccanti evaṃ uggahetvā abhinivisati. Tattha purimāni dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, pacchimāni vivaṭṭaṃ, vaṭṭe abhiniveso hoti, no vivaṭṭe, tasmā ayaṃ abhinivisamāno dukkhasacce abhinivisati.
他先确定苦圣谛即是色等五蕴,随后依界业处修习,并确定:“四大种与四大种所造色,即是色。”以彼色为所缘的受、想、行、识,即是名。如是,犹如劈开一对多罗树干,他确定:“唯有此二法,所谓名色。”然而,此名色并非无因,而是有因、有缘。他审察:“其缘为何?”如是确定无明等缘法与缘所生法之后,他将“诸法生起后归于灭尽故无常”的无常相,加于其上;复以生灭逼恼之行相为苦,以不得自在之行相为无我。如是以此三相遍观,依观次第修习,证得出世间道。显示巴利原文
Dukkhasaccaṃ nāma rūpādayo pañcakkhandhāti vavatthapetvā dhātukammaṭṭhānavasena otaritvā, ‘‘cattāri mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpaṃ rūpa’’nti vavatthapeti. Tadārammaṇā vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ nāmanti evaṃ yamakatālakkhandhaṃ bhindanto viya ‘‘dveva ime dhammā nāmarūpa’’nti vavatthapeti. Taṃ panetaṃ na ahetukaṃ sahetukaṃ sappaccayaṃ, ko cassa paccayo avijjādayo dhammāti evaṃ paccaye ceva paccayuppannadhamme ca vavatthapetvā ‘‘sabbepi dhammā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā’’ti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropeti, tato udayavayappaṭipīḷanākārena dukkhā, avasavattanākārena anattāti tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā sammasanto lokuttaramaggaṃ pāpuṇāti.
在道刹那,他以一种通达而通达四圣谛,以一种现观而现观四圣谛。他以遍知通达而通达苦,以断除通达而通达集,以作证通达而通达灭,以修习通达而通达道。他以遍知现观而现观苦,以断除现观而现观集,以作证现观而现观灭,以修习现观而现观道。他于作用上通达前三谛,于所缘上通达灭谛。而在此刻,他并没有‘我遍知苦,我断除集,我作证灭,我修习道’这样的转向、投入、作意与省察。然而,就在他如此通达之时,道在完成对前三谛的遍知等作用的同时,以灭为所缘而通达。显示巴利原文
Maggakkhaṇe cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena abhisameti, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena, maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti. So tīṇi saccāni kiccato paṭivijjhati, nirodhaṃ ārammaṇato. Tasmiñcassa khaṇe ahaṃ dukkhaṃ parijānāmi, samudayaṃ pajahāmi, nirodhaṃ sacchikaromi, maggaṃ bhāvemīti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi. Etassa pana pariggaṇhantasseva maggo tīsu saccesu pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentova nirodhaṃ ārammaṇato paṭivijjhatīti.
因此,在‘故被称为有慧者’一句中,从最低限度而言,入流者被称为有慧者;从最高限度而言,漏尽者被称为有慧者。然而,若有人将三藏佛语从字句、义理、脉络、前后次第上学习掌握之后,虽能上下贯通运用,却连以无常、苦、无我而作观照的功夫都没有,此人应称为有慧者,还是劣慧者?此人实为识行之人,不可称为有慧者。再者,若有人运用三相之后,依观之次第遍观,精进修行,心想‘就在今日,今日即证,当证阿罗汉果’,此人应称为有慧者,还是劣慧者?若应亲近,他属于有慧者这一边。然而,在经中,所说的乃是证悟。显示巴利原文
Tasmā paññavāti vuccatīti ettha heṭṭhimakoṭiyā sotāpanno, uparimakoṭiyā khīṇāsavo paññavāti niddiṭṭho. Yo pana tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ pāḷito ca atthato ca anusandhito ca pubbāparato ca uggahetvā heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto vicarati, aniccadukkhānattavasena pariggahamattampi natthi, ayaṃ paññavā nāma, duppañño nāmāti? Viññāṇacarito nāmesa, paññavāti na vattabbo. Atha yo tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā sammasanto ajja ajjeva arahattanti carati, ayaṃ paññavā nāma, duppañño nāmāti? Bhajāpiyamāno paññavāpakkhaṃ bhajati. Sutte pana paṭivedhova kathito.
当被问及‘识,识’时,他是在问什么呢?他是在问:‘借着某种识审察了诸行之后,这个人才被称为有慧者;我现在所问的,正是那个作为他前导与观照的识,也就是造业的心。’他也了知‘乐’,即也了知乐受。其余两句,同理可知。依此,长老依循‘当感受乐受时,他遍知“我在感受乐受”’等(《中部》1.113;《长部》2.380)所说的方式,以受为门径,开示了无色业处。其含义应如《念处》中所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇaṃ viññāṇanti idha kiṃ pucchati? Yena viññāṇena saṅkhāre sammasitvā esa paññavā nāma jāto, tassa āgamanavipassanā viññāṇaṃ kammakārakacittaṃ pucchāmīti pucchati. Sukhantipi vijānātīti sukhavedanampi vijānāti. Uparipadadvayepi eseva nayo. Iminā thero ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.113; dī. ni. 2.380) nayena āgatavedanāvasena arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi. Tassattho satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
他问:“这些法是相杂,还是不相杂?”这里的“相杂”是指以同一生起等特征,取和合之义。不应认为长老是把道慧与观识——这两个世间与出世间法——混为一谈,仿佛不知领域差别、不知时机那样提问。应当理解为:他是在问道慧与道识之间,以及观慧与观识之间,各自是否相杂。长老为他解答此义,说:“这些法相杂……”等等。其中,“不可能将这些法”的意思是:无论是在世间道刹那,还是出世间道刹那,对于这两个同时生起的法,“一一剥离……一一剥离”——即分别开来、拆解开来,无论从所缘、依处、生起还是灭去,都无法显示出它们的差别。然而,这些法各有各的作用范围:对于世间法,心是主导、是前导;对于出世间法,慧是主导。显示巴利原文
Saṃsaṭṭhāti ekuppādādilakkhaṇena saṃyogaṭṭhena saṃsaṭṭhā, udāhu visaṃsaṭṭhāti pucchati. Ettha ca thero maggapaññañca vipassanāviññāṇañcāti ime dve lokiyalokuttaradhamme missetvā bhūmantaraṃ bhinditvā samayaṃ ajānanto viya pucchatīti na veditabbo. Maggapaññāya pana maggaviññāṇena, vipassanāpaññāya ca vipassanāviññāṇeneva saddhiṃ saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ pucchatīti veditabbo. Theropissa tamevatthaṃ vissajjento ime dhammā saṃsaṭṭhātiādimāha. Tattha na ca labbhā imesaṃ dhammānanti imesaṃ lokiyamaggakkhaṇepi lokuttaramaggakkhaṇepi ekato uppannānaṃ dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ. Vinibbhujitvā vinibbhujitvāti visuṃ visuṃ katvā vinivaṭṭetvā, ārammaṇato vā vatthuto vā uppādato vā nirodhato vā nānākaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ na sakkāti attho. Tesaṃ tesaṃ pana dhammānaṃ visayo nāma atthi. Lokiyadhammaṃ patvā hi cittaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, lokuttaraṃ patvā paññā.
正自觉者问世间法时,也不会这样问:“比丘,你证得了哪种慧?是初道慧,还是第二、第三、第四道慧?”他不会问:“比丘,你是什么触?你是什么受?你是什么想?你是什么思?”而是依于心而问:“比丘,你是何等心?”说明善与不善时,也依于心来说明,如说:“诸法以意为前导,以意为最胜,由意所成。”(《法句》1,2)又说:“哪些法是善?当欲界善心生起之时。”(《法集》1)然而,问及出世间法时,他不会问:“比丘,你是什么触?你是什么受?你是什么想?你是什么思?”而是依于慧而问:“比丘,你证得了哪种慧?是初道慧,还是第二、第三、第四道慧?”显示巴利原文
Sammāsambuddhopi hi lokiyadhammaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘bhikkhu, tvaṃ katamaṃ paññaṃ adhigato, kiṃ paṭhamamaggapaññaṃ, udāhu dutiya tatiya catuttha maggapañña’’nti na evaṃ pucchati. Kiṃ phasso tvaṃ, bhikkhu, kiṃ vedano, kiṃ sañño, kiṃ cetanoti na ca pucchati, cittavasena pana, ‘‘kiñcitto tvaṃ, bhikkhū’’ti (pārā. 135) pucchati. Kusalākusalaṃ paññapentopi ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manoseṭṭhā manomayā’’ti (dha. pa. 1, 2) ca, ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1) ca evaṃ cittavaseneva paññāpeti. Lokuttaraṃ pucchanto pana kiṃ phasso tvaṃ bhikkhu, kiṃ vedano, kiṃ sañño, kiṃ cetanoti na pucchati. Katamā te, bhikkhu, paññā adhigatā, kiṃ paṭhamamaggapaññā, udāhu dutiyatatiyacatutthamaggapaññāti evaṃ paññāvaseneva pucchati.
在《根相应》中也同样:“比丘们,有此五根。何等为五?信根、精进根、念根、定根、慧根。比丘们,信根应于何处见?应于四入流支中见信根。比丘们,精进根应于何处见?应于四正勤中见精进根。比丘们,念根应于何处见?应于四念处中见念根。比丘们,定根应于何处见?应于四禅中见定根。比丘们,慧根应于何处见?应于四圣谛中见慧根。”(《相应部》5.478)如是,世间法与出世间法便在各自的领域中得到了说明。显示巴利原文
Indriyasaṃyuttepi ‘‘pañcimāni, bhikkhave, indriyāni. Katamāni pañca? Saddhindriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ satindriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, saddhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu sotāpattiyaṅgesu ettha saddhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, vīriyindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu sammappadhānesu ettha vīriyindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, satindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu ettha satindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, samādhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu jhānesu ettha samādhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kattha ca, bhikkhave, paññindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ? Catūsu ariyasaccesu ettha paññindriyaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.478). Evaṃ savisayasmiṃyeva lokiyalokuttarā dhammā kathitā.
犹如四位富商之子,加上国王共为五位朋友,他们相约“我们去游玩星宿节吧”,便一起走上大街。当他们走进第一位富商之子家时,其余四人默然坐着,只有那家的主人吩咐:“给这些人准备嚼食和啖食,奉上香、花鬘与庄严饰品等。”走进第二位、第三位、第四位家时也是如此,其余四人默然坐着,各自只有该家主人出来吩咐:“给这些人准备嚼食和啖食,奉上香、花鬘与庄严饰品等。”最后走进国王家时,国王虽在一切处都是主宰者,此刻也只是在自己家中吩咐:“给这些人准备嚼食和啖食,奉上香、花鬘与庄严饰品等。”
同样地,以信为第五的五根,当它们如同这五位朋友一同走上大街那样,在同一所缘上生起时:正如进入第一家时,其余四人默然坐着,只有主人吩咐那样——在到达入流支时,具有胜解特相的信根便成为首要、成为先行,其余诸根随之而行。正如进入第二家时,其余四人默然坐着,只有主人吩咐那样——在到达正勤时,具有策励特相的精进根便成为首要、成为先行,其余诸根随之而行。正如进入第三家时,其余四人默然坐着,只有主人吩咐那样——在到达念处时,具有现起特相的念根便成为首要、成为先行,其余诸根随之而行。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi cattāro seṭṭhiputtā rājāti rājapañcamesu sahāyesu nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmāti vīthiṃ otiṇṇesu ekassa seṭṭhiputtassa gehaṃ gatakāle itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova, ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti gehe vicāreti. Dutiyassa tatiyassa catutthassa gehaṃ gatakāle itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova, ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti gehe vicāreti. Atha sabbapacchā rañño gehaṃ gatakāle kiñcāpi rājā sabbattha issarova, imasmiṃ pana kāle attano geheyeva, ‘‘imesaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ detha, gandhamālālaṅkārādīni dethā’’ti vicāreti. Evamevaṃ kho saddhāpañcamakesu indriyesu tesu sahāyesu ekato vīthiṃ otarantesu viya ekārammaṇe uppajjamānesupi yathā paṭhamassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ sotāpattiyaṅgāni patvā adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ saddhindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā dutiyassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ sammappadhānāni patvā paggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ vīriyindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā tatiyassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ satipaṭṭhānāni patvā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ satindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Yathā catutthassa gehe itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, gehasāmikova vicāreti, evaṃ jhānavimokkhe patvā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ samādhindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti. Sabbapacchā rañño gehaṃ gatakāle pana yathā itare cattāro tuṇhī nisīdanti, rājāva gehe vicāreti, evameva ariyasaccāni patvā pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ paññindriyameva jeṭṭhakaṃ hoti pubbaṅgamaṃ, sesāni tadanvayāni honti.
如此,已证无碍解、被尊为最上的摩诃拘絺罗长老,询世间法时,是以心为首要、以心为先导而发问;问出世间法时,则是以慧为首要、以慧为先导而发问。法将舍利弗长老也是以同样的方式作回答的。显示巴利原文
Iti paṭisambhidāpattānaṃ agge ṭhapito mahākoṭṭhitatthero lokiyadhammaṃ pucchanto cittaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ cittaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā pucchi; lokuttaradhammaṃ pucchanto paññaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ paññaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā pucchi. Dhammasenāpatisāriputtattheropi tatheva vissajjesīti.
所谓‘了知’,是指道慧以‘这是苦’等方式了知四圣谛法。‘它识知’,是指道识也如此识知它。所谓‘识知’,是指观识以‘无常’等方式识知诸行。‘它了知’,是指观慧也如此了知它。因此,这些法即是‘结合的’,因为它们同生、同灭、同依处、同所缘,故为结合。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ hāvuso, pajānātīti yaṃ catusaccadhammamidaṃ dukkhantiādinā nayena maggapaññā pajānāti. Taṃ vijānātīti maggaviññāṇampi tatheva taṃ vijānāti. Yaṃ vijānātīti yaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ aniccantiādinā nayena vipassanāviññāṇaṃ vijānāti. Taṃ pajānātīti vipassanāpaññāpi tatheva taṃ pajānāti. Tasmā ime dhammāti tena kāraṇena ime dhammā. Saṃsaṭṭhāti ekuppādaekanirodhaekavatthukaekārammaṇatāya saṃsaṭṭhā.
“慧应修习”一语是针对道慧而说,而与它相应的识也应一同修习。“识应遍知”一语是针对观识而说,而与它相应的慧也应一同遍知。显示巴利原文
Paññā bhāvetabbāti idaṃ maggapaññaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṃsampayuttaṃ pana viññāṇaṃ tāya saddhiṃ bhāvetabbameva hoti. Viññāṇaṃ pariññeyyanti idaṃ vipassanāviññāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Taṃsampayuttā pana paññā tena saddhiṃ parijānitabbāva hoti.
450 问“受、受”,是为了探问受的特相。即便如此,应当注意这里指的是三地遍观行的受。“感受乐”,即感受、体验乐的所缘。其余二句的道理亦同。如《摩诃梨经》所说:“摩诃梨,若此色一向是苦,随苦而行,浸入于苦,不浸入于乐,则众生不会对色生起贪染。摩诃梨,正因为色是乐,随乐而行,浸入于乐,不浸入于苦,所以众生才会对色生起贪染;由贪染而有结缚,由结缚而有杂染。摩诃梨,受……想……行……摩诃梨,若此识一向是苦……乃至……杂染。”(《相应部》3.70)依此经的说明,此处将所缘说为乐、苦、不苦不乐。再者,应这样理解其义:以前面的乐受为所缘,后面的乐受才去感受;以前面的苦受为所缘,后面的苦受才去感受;以前面的不苦不乐受为所缘,后面的不苦不乐受才去感受。确实只有受本身在感受,并没有其他任何被称为感受者的东西存在。这就是所说的意思。显示巴利原文
450.Vedanā vedanāti idaṃ kasmā pucchati? Vedanālakkhaṇaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Evaṃ santepi tebhūmikasammasanacāravedanāva adhippetāti sallakkhetabbā. Sukhampi vedetīti sukhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedeti anubhavati. Parato padadvayepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Rūpañca hidaṃ, mahāli, ekantadukkhaṃ abhavissa, dukkhānupatitaṃ dukkhāvakkantaṃ anavakkantaṃ sukhena, nayidaṃ sattā rūpasmiṃ sārajjeyyuṃ. Yasmā ca kho, mahāli, rūpaṃ sukhaṃ sukhānupatitaṃ sukhāvakkantaṃ anavakkantaṃ dukkhena, tasmā sattā rūpasmiṃ sārajjanti, sārāgā saṃyujjanti, saṃyogā saṃkilissanti. Vedanā ca hidaṃ… saññā… saṅkhārā… viññāṇañca hidaṃ, mahāli, ekantadukkhaṃ abhavissa…pe… saṃkilissantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.70) iminā hi mahālisuttapariyāyena idha ārammaṇaṃ sukhaṃ dukkhaṃ adukkhamasukhanti kathitaṃ. Apica purimaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aparā sukhā vedanā vedeti; purimaṃ dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aparā dukkhā vedanā vedeti; purimaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aparā adukkhamasukhā vedanā vedetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Vedanāyeva hi vedeti, na añño koci veditā nāma atthīti vuttametaṃ.
这里问“想、想”,是问一切想的特相。什么是“一切处想”的特相呢?一切想的特相与一切处想的特相其实是同一回事。即便如此,应知这里指的仍是三地遍观行的想。“认知青”,即取青色花或青色布作遍作后,引发近行定或安止定而加以认知。在此意义上,无论是遍作想、近行想还是安止想,都适用于此。于青色上生起“青色”之想,也同样适用。对黄等其余颜色的说法,其理亦同。显示巴利原文
Saññāsaññāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Sabbasaññāya lakkhaṇaṃ. Kiṃ sabbatthakasaññāyāti? Sabbasaññāya lakkhaṇantipi sabbatthakasaññāya lakkhaṇantipi ekamevetaṃ, evaṃ santepi tebhūmikasammasanacārasaññāva adhippetāti sallakkhetabbā. Nīlakampi sañjānātīti nīlapupphe vā vatthe vā parikammaṃ katvā upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā pāpento sañjānāti. Imasmiñhi atthe parikammasaññāpi upacārasaññāpi appanāsaññāpi vaṭṭati. Nīle nīlanti uppajjanakasaññāpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Pītakādīsupi eseva nayo.
在“友,受……”这一段中,举出了受、想、识这三项,为何不举出慧呢?因为慧不能摄一切。若取了慧,便只能得到与慧相应的受等,无法得到与慧不相应的那些。如今不取慧而唯取此三项,则无论是与慧相应的、不相应的,乃至最末的两种五识法皆可得到。正如三人说“线、线”,第四人说“穿宝珠的线”:前三人能得到许多线——棉线、捻线,乃至蛛丝亦算作线;而那位找穿珠之线的人,所得的线却极少。应知此喻正合此义。亦有言:“因慧在前已与识相应,此处则放开,故不再取。” “友,彼感受”者,谓受感受何所缘,想亦认知彼同一所缘。“彼认知”者,谓想认知何所缘,识亦识知彼同一所缘。此即其义。显示巴利原文
Yā cāvuso, vedanāti ettha vedanā, saññā, viññāṇanti imāni tīṇi gahetvā paññā kasmā na gahitāti? Asabbasaṅgāhikattā. Paññāya hi gahitāya paññāya sampayuttāva vedanādayo labbhanti, no vippayuttā. Taṃ pana aggahetvā imesu gahitesu paññāya sampayuttā ca vippayuttā ca antamaso dve pañcaviññāṇadhammāpi labbhanti. Yathā hi tayo purisā suttaṃ suttanti vadeyyuṃ, catuttho ratanāvutasuttanti. Tesu purimā tayo takkagatampi paṭṭivaṭṭakādigatampi yaṃkiñci bahuṃ suttaṃ labhanti antamaso makkaṭakasuttampi. Ratanāvutasuttaṃ pariyesanto mandaṃ labhati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Heṭṭhato vā paññā viññāṇena saddhiṃ sampayogaṃ labhāpitā vissaṭṭhattāva idha na gahitāti vadanti. Yaṃ hāvuso, vedetīti yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vedanā vedeti, saññāpi tadeva sañjānāti. Yaṃ sañjānātīti yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ saññā sañjānāti, viññāṇampi tadeva vijānātīti attho.
现在,应当了解“认知(sañjānāti)”、“识知(vijānāti)”、“了知(pajānāti)”这几个词之间的差别。其实,它们的差别只在于前缀不同,“知(jānāti)”这个词根本身并无差别。然而,虽同属“知”的意义,亦应知其作用各别:想只是以青等颜色来认知所缘,无法通达无常、苦、无我的特相。识既能以颜色等方式认知所缘,也能通达无常等相,但纵使努力,亦不能令圣道生起。慧则既能以颜色等方式认知所缘,也能通达无常等相,而且通过努力能令圣道生起。显示巴利原文
Idāni sañjānāti vijānāti pajānātīti ettha viseso veditabbo. Tattha upasaggamattameva viseso. Jānātīti padaṃ pana aviseso. Tassāpi jānanatthe viseso veditabbo. Saññā hi nīlādivasena ārammaṇaṃ sañjānanamattameva, aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Viññāṇaṃ nīlādivasena ārammaṇañceva sañjānāti, aniccādilakkhaṇapaṭivedhañca pāpeti, ussakkitvā pana maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Paññā nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi sañjānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetumpi sakkoti.
譬如,在金匠的工作台上放着一堆咖哈巴那。有三人立于一旁观看:一无智的童子,一村民,一大金匠。那无智的童子只知这些咖哈巴那的颜色与方圆等形状,却不知这是人们受用、维生的财物以及被珍视为宝物的东西。村民既知颜色等外貌,也知这是人们受用、维生的财物与宝物,却分辨不出“这枚是伪造的,这枚是纯的,这枚是半真半假的,这枚是打磨过的”。大金匠不仅了知颜色等外貌,了知这是受用物、宝物,更能辨别伪造等种种差别。而且,他在辨识时,看其外观便知,听其敲击声便知,嗅其气味便知,尝其味道便知,以手掂其轻重便知;甚至还能知道这枚咖哈巴那是在哪个村庄、哪个城镇、哪座城市,在哪座山的荫影下、哪条河的岸边所造,也知出自哪位金匠之手。同样地,想如同那无知的童子观视咖哈巴那,仅以青等颜色认知所缘。识如同那村民,既以颜色认知所缘,也能通达无常等相。慧则如大金匠,既以颜色认知所缘,也能通达无常等相,更能通过努力令道生起。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi heraññikaphalake kahāpaṇarāsimhi kate ajātabuddhi dārako gāmikapuriso mahāheraññikoti tīsu janesu oloketvā ṭhitesu ajātabuddhi dārako kahāpaṇānaṃ cittavicittacaturassamaṇḍalabhāvameva jānāti, idaṃ manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ ratanasammatanti na jānāti. Gāmikapuriso cittādibhāvañceva jānāti, manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaratanasammatabhāvañca. ‘‘Ayaṃ kūṭo ayaṃ cheko ayaṃ karato ayaṃ saṇho’’ti pana na jānāti. Mahāheraññiko cittādibhāvampi ratanasammatabhāvampi kūṭādibhāvampi jānāti, jānanto ca pana naṃ rūpaṃ disvāpi jānāti, ākoṭitassa saddaṃ sutvāpi, gandhaṃ ghāyitvāpi, rasaṃ sāyitvāpi, hatthena garukalahukabhāvaṃ upadhāretvāpi asukagāme katotipi jānāti, asukanigame asukanagare asukapabbatacchāyāya asukanadītīre katotipi, asukācariyena katotipi jānāti. Evamevaṃ saññā ajātabuddhidārakassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇamattameva sañjānāti. Viññāṇaṃ gāmikapurisassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi sañjānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti. Paññā mahāheraññikassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya nīlādivasena ārammaṇampi sañjānāti, aniccādivasena lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvampi pāpeti. So pana nesaṃ viseso duppaṭivijjho.
因此,那先尊者说:“大王,世尊所作是极难的事。”“尊者那先,世尊做了什么是极难的事呢?”“大王,世尊所作的极难之事,即是对在同一所缘上生起的无色心与心所诸法,加以分别说明:‘这是触,这是受,这是想,这是思,这是心。’好比将芝麻油、芥子油、甘草油、蓖麻油、兽脂油这五种油倒进同一个罐中,每日用两根杵搅拌,而后要从中逐一分辨取出:‘这是芝麻油,这是芥子油’,如此一一分别取出,极为困难,而世尊所行比这更难。然而,世尊具足一切知智,是法主、法王,故能对在同一所缘上所生的无色诸法作如此分别。这一义理,也可借另一譬喻来了知:正如五大河之水汇入大海后,仍能从中分别取出‘这是恒河之水,这是耶牟那河之水’一般。”显示巴利原文
Tenāha āyasmā nāgaseno – ‘‘dukkaraṃ, mahārāja, bhagavatā katanti. Kiṃ, bhante, nāgasena bhagavatā dukkaraṃ katanti? Dukkaraṃ, mahārāja, bhagavatā kataṃ, imesaṃ arūpīnaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekārammaṇe pavattamānānaṃ vavatthānaṃ akkhātaṃ, ayaṃ phasso, ayaṃ vedanā, ayaṃ saññā, ayaṃ cetanā, idaṃ citta’’nti (mi. pa. 2.7.16). Yathā hi tilatelaṃ, sāsapatelaṃ, madhukatelaṃ, eraṇḍakatelaṃ, vasātelanti imāni pañca telāni ekacāṭiyaṃ pakkhipitvā divasaṃ yamakamanthehi manthetvā tato idaṃ tilatelaṃ, idaṃ sāsapatelanti ekekassa pāṭiyekkaṃ uddharaṇaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ, idaṃ tato dukkarataraṃ. Bhagavā pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa suppaṭividdhattā dhammissaro dhammarājā imesaṃ arūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ ekārammaṇe pavattamānānaṃ vavatthānaṃ akkhāsi. Pañcannaṃ mahānadīnaṃ samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhāne, ‘‘idaṃ gaṅgāya udakaṃ, idaṃ yamunāyā’’ti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ udakauddharaṇenāpi ayamattho veditabbo.
451 “已出离的”:即已出离、已舍弃的。此处,若取“已出离”义,“由五根”为处格;若取“已舍弃”义,应知为具格。这是说:由五根出离后,在意门中生起的;或因五根不成为它的依处而被舍弃的。“清净的”:即无随烦恼的。“以意识”:即以色界第四禅的心。“应知什么”:即应当了知什么。因为在《大义释》等中,“应知”即指应当被了知的法。“空无边处应知”:为什么以色界第四禅的心能了知无色界的等至呢?因为安住于色界第四禅的人能够生起无色界的等至,于此禅中安住便能成就,因此说“空无边处应知”等。那么,为何不提及“非想非非想处”呢?因为没有各别的偏向。在此处,只能以总聚、以理法进行观照。即使是如法将那样的比丘,也不会生起各别的偏向,因此,舍利弗长老也只是以总聚、以理法观照后,解释说:“诸法确实是先前没有而后生起,生起后又灭去。”然而,世尊拥有一切知智在手,即使对非想非非想处等至,也能将超过五十种法各各一一举出,并说:“凡有想的等至,其范围即与证得更高的智相等。”显示巴利原文
451.Nissaṭṭhenāti nissaṭena pariccattena vā. Tattha nissaṭenāti atthe sati pañcahi indriyehīti nissakkavacanaṃ. Pariccattenāti atthe sati karaṇavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – pañcahi indriyehi nissaritvā manodvāre pavattena pañcahi vā indriyehi tassa vatthubhāvaṃ anupagamanatāya pariccattenāti. Parisuddhenāti nirupakkilesena. Manoviññāṇenāti rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānacittena. Kiṃ neyyanti kiṃ jānitabbaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃkiñci neyyaṃ nāma atthi dhamma’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 69) hi jānitabbaṃ neyyanti vuttaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ neyyanti kathaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānacittena arūpāvacarasamāpatti neyyāti? Rūpāvacaracatutthajjhāne ṭhitena arūpāvacarasamāpattiṃ nibbattetuṃ sakkā hoti. Ettha ṭhitassa hi sā ijjhati. Tasmā ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ neyya’’ntiādimāha. Atha nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ kasmā na vuttanti? Pāṭiyekkaṃ abhinivesābhāvato. Tattha hi kalāpato nayato sammasanaṃ labbhati, dhammasenāpatisadisassāpi hi bhikkhuno pāṭiyekkaṃ abhiniveso na jāyati. Tasmā theropi, ‘‘evaṃ kirame dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.94) kalāpato nayato sammasitvā vissajjesīti. Bhagavā pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa hatthagatattā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyampi paropaññāsa dhamme pāṭiyekkaṃ aṃguddhāreneva uddharitvā, ‘‘yāvatā saññāsamāpattiyo, tāvatā aññāpaṭivedho’’ti āha.
“以慧眼遍知”:即通过那作为眼、能作引导的慧而遍知。这里有两种慧:定慧与观慧。以定慧,通过完成其作用及如实不迷而遍知;以观慧,则通过通达诸法的相,从所缘上了知,这称为“知”。“为何目的”:即它的作用是什么。“为证智目的”等:对于应当证知的法,能证知,故称“证智目的”;对于应当遍知的法,能遍知,故称“遍知目的”;对于应当断除的法,能断除,故称“断除目的”。而这种慧,若是世间慧,则依镇伏的方式而有证智目的、遍知目的和断除目的;若是出世间慧,则依正断的方式而有证智目的、遍知目的和断除目的。其中,世间慧从作用与不迷惑而遍知,出世间慧则从不迷惑而遍知。显示巴利原文
Paññācakkhunā pajānātīti dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūtāya paññāya pajānāti. Tattha dve paññā samādhipaññā vipassanāpaññā ca. Samādhipaññāya kiccato asammohato ca pajānāti. Vipassanāpaññāya lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena ārammaṇato jānanaṃ kathitaṃ. Kimatthiyāti ko etissā attho. Abhiññatthātiādīsu abhiññeyye dhamme abhijānātīti abhiññatthā. Pariññeyye dhamme parijānātīti pariññatthā. Pahātabbe dhamme pajahatīti pahānatthā. Sā panesā lokiyāpi abhiññatthā ca pariññatthā ca vikkhambhanato pahānatthā. Lokuttarāpi abhiññatthā ca pariññatthā ca samucchedato pahānatthā. Tattha lokiyā kiccato asammohato ca pajānāti, lokuttarā asammohato.
452 “为了正见的生起”:即为了观正见与道正见的生起。“及从他人善语”:即听闻适宜的法。“及如理作意”:即自己恰当的作意。在此,即使是在声闻弟子中,像法将那样的人物,也必须具备这两种缘。因为舍利弗长老纵然圆满了一千二百五十万劫又一个阿僧祇劫的波罗蜜,仅凭自身的法性,连微尘许的烦恼也无法断除。直到听闻了阿说示长老所说的“诸法从因生”这一偈,他才得以通达。然而,对于独觉佛与一切知佛而言,并没有“从他人善语”这一因素,他们唯独依于“如理作意”,便生起了辟支菩提与一切知智。显示巴利原文
452.Sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāyāti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā ca maggasammādiṭṭhiyā ca. Parato ca ghosoti sappāyadhammassavanaṃ. Yoniso ca manasikāroti attano upāyamanasikāro. Tattha sāvakesu api dhammasenāpatino dve paccayā laddhuṃ vaṭṭantiyeva. Thero hi kappasatasahassādhikaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pāramiyo pūretvāpi attano dhammatāya aṇumattampi kilesaṃ pajahituṃ nāsakkhi. ‘‘Ye dhammā hetuppabhavā’’ti (mahāva. 60) assajittherato imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvāvassa paṭivedho jāto. Paccekabuddhānaṃ pana sabbaññubuddhānañca paratoghosakammaṃ natthi, yonisomanasikārasmiṃyeva ṭhatvā paccekabodhiñca sabbaññutaññāṇañca nibbattenti.
“被资助”:指获得了帮助。“正见”:指阿拉汉道正见。“心解脱果”:在果位刹那生起的心解脱是它的果,故名心解脱果。而那个称为心解脱的果即是它的利益,因此称为心解脱果福利。第二句的解释方式也是如此。这里,“慧解脱”应知:第四果的慧名为慧解脱,其余的法名为心解脱。在“被戒资助”等当中,“戒”指四遍清净戒。“听闻”指听闻适宜的法。“讨论”指断除业处修行中障碍的谈话。“止”指导向观的八等至。“观”指七种随观。因为,当一个人圆满四遍清净戒、听闻适宜之法、断除业处障碍、在导向观的八等至上用功、修习七种随观时,阿拉汉道便生起并给予果。显示巴利原文
Anuggahitāti laddhūpakārā. Sammādiṭṭhīti arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi. Phalakkhaṇe nibbattā cetovimutti phalaṃ assāti cetovimuttiphalā. Tadeva cetovimuttisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ ānisaṃso assāti cetovimuttiphalānisaṃsā. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca catutthaphalapaññā paññāvimutti nāma, avasesā dhammā cetovimuttīti veditabbā. Sīlānuggahitātiādīsu sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Sutanti sappāyadhammassavanaṃ. Sākacchāti kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanacchedanakathā. Samathoti vipassanāpādikā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Vipassanāti sattavidhā anupassanā. Catupārisuddhisīlañhi pūrentassa, sappāyadhammassavanaṃ suṇantassa, kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanaṃ chindantassa, vipassanāpādikāsu aṭṭhasamāpattīsu kammaṃ karontassa, sattavidhaṃ anupassanaṃ bhāventassa arahattamaggo uppajjitvā phalaṃ deti.
譬如有人想要享用甘甜的熟芒果,便在芒果树苗周围筑起坚固的水池,时常取水罐浇水;为防水流失而加固边界;清除旁边的藤蔓、枯枝、蚁窝、蜘蛛网;又时常拿锄头挖掘根部。对于这般精勤地实行这五种事的人,那棵芒果树便会生长、结果。应知此譬喻亦如是:围绕树木筑起的水池,应视为戒;时常浇水,应视为听闻正法;加固边界,应视为止;清除旁边的藤蔓等,应视为断除业处的障碍;时常拿锄头挖根,应视为修习七种随观。正如那棵得到这五种因资助的芒果树,到了时节便结出甘甜的果实;应知,这位比丘被这五种法资助的正见,亦会给予阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi madhuraṃ ambapakkaṃ paribhuñjitukāmo ambapotakassa samantā udakakoṭṭhakaṃ thiraṃ katvā bandhati. Ghaṭaṃ gahetvā kālena kālaṃ udakaṃ āsiñcati. Udakassa anikkhamanatthaṃ mariyādaṃ thiraṃ karoti. Yā hoti samīpe valli vā sukkhadaṇḍako vā kipillikapuṭo vā makkaṭakajālaṃ vā, taṃ apaneti. Khaṇittiṃ gahetvā kālena kālaṃ mūlāni parikhaṇati. Evamassa appamattassa imāni pañca kāraṇāni karoto so ambo vaḍḍhitvā phalaṃ deti. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Rukkhassa samantato koṭṭhakabandhanaṃ viya hi sīlaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, kālena kālaṃ udakasiñcanaṃ viya dhammassavanaṃ, mariyādāya thirabhāvakaraṇaṃ viya samatho, samīpe valliādīnaṃ haraṇaṃ viya kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanacchedanaṃ, kālena kālaṃ khaṇittiṃ gahetvā mūlakhaṇanaṃ viya sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ bhāvanā. Tehi pañcahi kāraṇehi anuggahitassa ambarukkhassa madhuraphaladānakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno imehi pañcahi dhammehi anuggahitāya sammādiṭṭhiyā arahattaphaladānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
453 “贤友,有多少‘有’呢?”——他在这里问什么?他直指根本的义理脉络,想问:“那些劣慧者无法从中出离的‘有’,我将问清楚是哪些。”其中,「欲有」:是指趋向欲有的业,以及由业引生的已执取的诸蕴,将这两者合起来,称为欲有。色有与无色有也是同样道理。「在未来」:指于未来。「后有的再生」:指后有的再次产生。在此,他想问的是流转。「于彼彼处欢喜」:即于色欢喜、于声欢喜等,如此于各处的欢喜,此处是以具格形式作主格来使用。意思是:正是由于在那些处所各各欢喜,才有了后有的再生。至此,他展示了去、来、去来,辗转流转,将流转阐述到了极致。现在,他为了问还灭而说道:“贤友,那么,怎样才不会有后有的再生呢?”在回答之中,「无明离欲」:指因无明的灭尽、息灭。「明生起」:指因阿拉汉道之明的生起。难道是无明先灭了,明再生起吗?这两者都不能这样说。如同灯点亮时,黑暗便告消失,由于明的生起,无明也就灭了。「渴爱灭」:指因渴爱的灭尽、息灭。「后有的再生便不会发生」:如是,未来后有的再生便不会发生,去、来、去来都被切断,流转不再运转。显示巴利原文
453.Katipanāvuso, bhavāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Mūlameva gato anusandhi, duppañño yehi bhavehi na uṭṭhāti, te pucchissāmīti pucchati. Tattha kāmabhavoti kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ kammābhinibbattā upādinnakkhandhāpīti ubhayamekato katvā kāmabhavoti āha. Rūpārūpabhavesupi eseva nayo. Āyatinti anāgate. Punabbhavassa abhinibbattīti punabbhavābhinibbatti. Idha vaṭṭaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Tatrātatrābhinandanāti rūpābhinandanā saddābhinandanāti evaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ abhinandanā, karaṇavacane cetaṃ paccattaṃ. Tatratatrābhinandanāya punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti attho. Ettāvatā hi gamanaṃ hoti, āgamanaṃ hoti, gamanāgamanaṃ hoti, vaṭṭaṃ vattatīti vaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassesi. Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ pucchanto ‘‘kathaṃ panāvuso’’tiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane avijjāvirāgāti avijjāya khayanirodhena. Vijjuppādāti arahattamaggavijjāya uppādena. Kiṃ avijjā pubbe niruddhā, atha vijjā pubbe uppannāti? Ubhayametaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Padīpujjalanena andhakāravigamo viya vijjuppādena avijjā niruddhāva hoti. Taṇhānirodhāti taṇhāya khayanirodhena. Punabbhavābhinibbatti na hotīti evaṃ āyatiṃ punabbhavassa abhinibbatti na hoti, gamanaṃ āgamanaṃ gamanāgamanaṃ upacchijjati, vaṭṭaṃ na vattatīti vivaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassesi.
454 “贤友,那么如何呢?”——他在这里问什么?俱分解脱的比丘会时时入灭尽定。他想问:“我要问作为他灭尽定基础的初禅。”“初禅”:他在这里问什么?入灭尽定的比丘,必须了知禅支的确定与部分的划分,这禅那有五支、四支、三支、二支的区别。他想问:“我要问禅支的确定与部分的划分。”在「寻」等之中,「寻」:以安置为相的是寻;「伺」:以审察为相的是伺;「喜」:以遍满为相的是喜;「乐」:以乐味为相的是乐;「心一境性」:以不散乱为相的是心一境性,这五种法在此处生起。「已离多少支」:他在这里问什么?入灭尽定的比丘必须知道哪些支是有利益的,哪些支是无利益的,他想问那些。在这里,回答是显而易见的。如此,前面已经拿取了作为灭尽定基础的初禅,接着他要问它的无间缘,也就是非想非非想处等至。中间的六种等至,应当知道是因其理趣已明而被省略,或已被放下不提。显示巴利原文
454.Katamaṃ panāvusoti idha kiṃ pucchati? Ubhatobhāgavimutto bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjati. Tassa nirodhapādakaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Paṭhamaṃ jhānanti idha kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhaṃ samāpajjanakena bhikkhunā aṅgavavatthānaṃ koṭṭhāsaparicchedo nāma jānitabbo, idaṃ jhānaṃ pañcaṅgikaṃ caturaṅgikaṃ tivaṅgikaṃ duvaṅgikanti aṅgavavatthānaṃ koṭṭhāsaparicchedaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Vitakkotiādīsu pana abhiniropanalakkhaṇo vitakko, anumajjanalakkhaṇo vicāro, pharaṇalakkhaṇā pīti, sātalakkhaṇaṃ sukhaṃ, avikkhepalakkhaṇā cittekaggatāti ime pañca dhammā vattanti. Kataṅgavippahīnanti idha pana kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhaṃ samāpajjanakena bhikkhunā upakārānupakārāni aṅgāni jānitabbāni, tāni pucchissāmīti pucchati, vissajjanaṃ panettha pākaṭameva. Iti heṭṭhā nirodhapādakaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ gahitaṃ, upari tassa anantarapaccayaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ pucchissati. Antarā pana cha samāpattiyo saṃkhittā, nayaṃ vā dassetvā vissaṭṭhāti veditabbā.
455 现在,为了询问依止于识的五种净色,他说:“贤友,这五种根……”。“其中,「行境界」:是指作为行处对象。「彼此的」:即眼根不能经验耳根的境界,耳根也不能经验眼根的境界,这样,诸根各自的行处与对象,彼此不能互相经验。假如将青黄等种种色所缘汇集起来,放到耳根那里,对它说:‘喂,你来分辨一下这个所缘,说明它是什么所缘。’即使不用口说,眼识也会依照自己的本性如此开口:‘喂,你这愚痴的盲者!哪怕你奔走百年千年,离开了我,还能在哪里找到能辨识这个所缘的东西?把它拿到我眼净色这里来,我自然会知道这个所缘是青是黄。因为这根本不是其他根的领域,只是我的领域。’其他感官门也是如此道理。它们因此被称为不彼此经验彼此的行处与对象。「以何为皈依」:它们以什么为皈依?它们依止什么?他这样问。「意为皈依」:速行意是它们的皈依。「而且意经验它们的行处与对象」:意门速行心或五门速行心,通过染着等方式经验它们的行处与对象。因为,眼识只是纯粹地看色,它本身并没有染着、厌恶或迷惑。然而,在这扇门中,速行心会染着、厌恶显示巴利原文
455. Idāni viññāṇanissaye pañca pasāde pucchanto pañcimāni, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha gocaravisayanti gocarabhūtaṃ visayaṃ. Aññamaññassāti cakkhu sotassa sotaṃ vā cakkhussāti evaṃ ekekassa gocaravisayaṃ na paccanubhoti. Sace hi nīlādibhedaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ samodhānetvā sotindriyassa upaneyya, ‘‘iṅgha tāva naṃ vavatthapehi vibhāvehi, kiṃ nāmetaṃ ārammaṇa’’nti. Cakkhuviññāṇañhi vināpi mukhena attano dhammatāya evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘are andhabāla , vassasatampi vassasahassampi paridhāvamāno aññatra mayā kuhiṃ etassa jānanakaṃ labhissasi, āhara naṃ cakkhupasāde upanehi, ahametaṃ ārammaṇaṃ jānissāmi, yadi vā nīlaṃ yadi vā pītakaṃ, na hi eso aññassa visayo, mayheveso visayo’’ti. Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo. Evametāni aññamaññassa gocaraṃ visayaṃ na paccanubhonti nāma. Kiṃ paṭisaraṇanti etesaṃ kiṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ, kiṃ etāni paṭisarantīti pucchati. Mano paṭisaraṇanti javanamano paṭisaraṇaṃ. Mano ca nesanti manodvārikajavanamano vā pañcadvārikajavanamano vā etesaṃ gocaravisayaṃ rajjanādivasena anubhoti. Cakkhuviññāṇañhi rūpadassanamattameva, ettha rajjanaṃ vā dussanaṃ vā muyhanaṃ vā natthi. Etasmiṃ pana dvāre javanaṃ rajjati vā dussati vā muyhati vā. Sotaviññāṇādīsupi eseva nayo.
此处有一譬喻:据说,有五个软弱无力的臣仆侍奉国王,费尽辛苦,才在一个五族村落里得到些许收入。他们在那里所得的,不过是鱼的份额、肉的份额,或者一个铜钱、半个铜钱、四分之一铜钱、八个铜钱、十六个铜钱、三十二个铜钱、六十四个铜钱,以及罚款等微末之物。然而,拥有百处田产、五百处田产、千处田产的丰厚税收,唯国王能得。在这一譬喻中,那个五族村落应视为五种净色;那五个软弱无力的臣仆应视为五种识;国王应视为速行心。臣仆只得到一点收入,正如眼识等只能单纯地看色等,其中并无染着、厌恶、迷惑。如同国王获取丰厚税收一般,在这些门中生起的速行心所引生的染着等,亦应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – pañca kira dubbalabhojakā rājānaṃ sevitvā kicchena kasirena ekasmiṃ pañcakulike gāme parittakaṃ āyaṃ labhiṃsu. Tesaṃ tattha macchabhāgo maṃsabhāgo yuttikahāpaṇo vā, bandhakahāpaṇo vā, māpahārakahāpaṇo vā, aṭṭhakahāpaṇo vā, soḷasakahāpaṇo vā, bāttiṃsakahāpaṇo vā, catusaṭṭhikahāpaṇo vā, daṇḍoti ettakamattameva pāpuṇāti. Satavatthukaṃ pañcasatavatthukaṃ sahassavatthukaṃ mahābaliṃ rājāva gaṇhāti. Tattha pañcakulikagāmo viya pañca pasādā daṭṭhabbā; pañca dubbalabhojakā viya pañca viññāṇāni; rājā viya javanaṃ; dubbalabhojakānaṃ parittakaṃ āyapāpuṇanaṃ viya cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ rūpadassanādimattaṃ. Rajjanādīni pana etesu natthi. Rañño mahābaliggahaṇaṃ viya tesu dvāresu javanassa rajjanādīni veditabbāni.
456 “贤友,这些五者”——他在这里问什么?他是在问入灭尽定时内在的五种净色。因为在唯作心的运作尚存时,无色法对净色是强有力的缘。然而,对于已灭除那种运作而入灭尽定者,他想问的是:处于灭尽定中,这五种净色是依什么而安住呢?显示巴利原文
456.Pañcimāni, āvusoti idha kiṃ pucchati? Antonirodhasmiṃ pañca pasāde. Kiriyamayapavattasmiñhi vattamāne arūpadhammā pasādānaṃ balavapaccayā honti. Yo pana taṃ pavattaṃ nirodhetvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpanno, tassa antonirodhe pañca pasādā kiṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhantīti idaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Āyuṃ paṭiccāti jīvitindriyaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhanti . Usmaṃ paṭiccāti jīvitindriyaṃ kammajatejaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati. Yasmā pana kammajatejopi jīvitindriyena vinā na tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘usmā āyuṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’’ti āha. Jhāyatoti jalato. Acciṃ paṭiccāti jālasikhaṃ paṭicca. Ābhā paññāyatīti āloko nāma paññāyati. Ābhaṃ paṭicca accīti taṃ ālokaṃ paṭicca jālasikhā paññāyati.
“依寿而住”:即依命根而安住。“依暖而住”:即依命根及业生火界而安住。但因业生火离了命根也不能存在,故他又说“暖依寿而住”。“正在燃烧”:即正在燃烧。“依焰而住”:即依火焰而安住。“光亮显现”:即得见光明。“依光明而住,焰”:依靠那光明,火焰方得显现。显示巴利原文
Evameva kho, āvuso, āyu usmaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatīti ettha jālasikhā viya kammajatejo. Āloko viya jīvitindriyaṃ. Jālasikhā hi uppajjamānā ālokaṃ gahetvāva uppajjati. Sā tena attanā janitaālokeneva sayampi aṇu thūlā dīghā rassāti pākaṭā hoti. Tattha jālapavattiyā janitaālokena tassāyeva jālapavattiyā pākaṭabhāvo viya usmaṃ paṭicca nibbattena kammajamahābhūtasambhavena jīvitindriyena usmāya anupālanaṃ. Jīvitindriyañhi dasapi vassāni…pe… vassasatampi kammajatejapavattaṃ pāleti. Iti mahābhūtāni upādārūpānaṃ nissayapaccayādivasena paccayāni hontīti āyu usmaṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati. Jīvitindriyaṃ mahābhūtāni pāletīti usmā āyuṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatīti veditabbā.
457 「寿行」即指寿命本身。「所感受的法」即指受法本身。「出起显现」指从等至中出起而显现。若比丘厌离无色界流转,止息想与受而入灭尽定,依其所预设之时,以色命根为缘,无色法便得生起。藉此,色与无色的流转即续续运作。譬如:有男子厌患火焰燃烧,以水泼浇令火停息,又以灰覆盖炭火,尔后默然坐下。后时需火,便拨开灰烬,翻动炭火,添加燃料,以口吹风或以扇扇风,火焰燃烧遂复续起。于此,火焰燃烧即如无色法;男子厌患火燃,浇水息火、覆灰默坐,即如比丘厌离无色流转,止息想与受而入灭尽定;为灰所覆之炭火,即如色命根;男子后时需火而拨灰等行,即如比丘度过预设时限;火堆复燃,即如无色法再生时,色与无色的流转随之续起。当如是解了。显示巴利原文
457.Āyusaṅkhārāti āyumeva. Vedaniyā dhammāti vedanā dhammāva. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyatīti samāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati. Yo hi bhikkhu arūpapavatte ukkaṇṭhitvā saññañca vedanañca nirodhetvā nirodhaṃ samāpanno, tassa yathāparicchinnakālavasena rūpajīvitindriyapaccayā arūpadhammā uppajjanti. Evaṃ pana rūpārūpapavattaṃ pavattati. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā eko puriso jālāpavatte ukkhaṇṭhito udakena paharitvā jālaṃ appavattaṃ katvā chārikāya aṅgāre pidhāya tuṇhī nisīdati. Yadā panassa puna jālāya attho hoti, chārikaṃ apanetvā aṅgāre parivattetvā upādānaṃ datvā mukhavātaṃ vā tālavaṇṭavātaṃ vā dadāti. Atha jālāpavattaṃ puna pavattati. Evameva jālāpavattaṃ viya arūpadhammā. Purisassa jālāpavatte ukkaṇṭhitvā udakappahārena jālaṃ appavattaṃ katvā chārikāya aṅgāre pidhāya tuṇhībhūtassa nisajjā viya bhikkhuno arūpapavatte ukkaṇṭhitvā saññañca vedanañca nirodhetvā nirodhasamāpajjanaṃ. Chārikāya pihitaaṅgārā viya rūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Purisassa puna jālāya atthe sati chārikāpanayanādīni viya bhikkhuno yathāparicchinnakālāpagamanaṃ. Aggijālāya pavatti viya puna arūpadhammesu uppannesu rūpārūpapavatti veditabbā.
「寿、暖与识」,即指色命根、业所生火界及心。当此三法舍离此色身时,此身便如无心之木,被弃置于地,躺卧于彼——即是此义。又曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Āyu usmā ca viññāṇanti rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, kammajatejodhātu, cittanti ime tayo dhammā yadā imaṃ rūpakāyaṃ jahanti, athāyaṃ acetanaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ viya pathaviyaṃ chaḍḍito setīti attho. Vuttañcetaṃ –
“寿、暖与识,当他们舍离此身时;
那时,这被弃的身体便横卧在地,成为他人之食,已了无心识。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṃ, yadā kāyaṃ jahantimaṃ; Apaviddho tadā seti, parabhattaṃ acetana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 3.95);
“身行”指出入息。“语行”指寻与伺。“心行”指想与受。“寿”指色命根。“破坏”指被损害、毁坏。关于此,有者因“入灭尽定者唯诸心行已灭”之语,执心实未灭,而谓这些至为有心。对此应反问:若依“彼之语行已灭”之语而推论语实未灭,则入灭尽定者亦应能说法、诵经。又若依“彼死者、命终者,心行已灭”之语而推论其心未灭,则火化已故父母或阿拉汉者,岂不造下无间业?是故不应执著文句之表,当依诸导师之教说而通达其义。义为所依,非为言辞。显示巴利原文
Kāyasaṅkhārāti assāsapassāsā. Vacīsaṅkhārāti vitakkavicārā. Cittasaṅkhārāti saññāvedanā. Āyūti rūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Paribhinnānīti upahatāni, vinaṭṭhānīti attho. Tattha keci ‘‘nirodhasamāpannassa cittasaṅkhārāva niruddhā’’ti vacanato cittaṃ aniruddhaṃ hoti, tasmā sacittakā ayaṃ samāpattīti vadanti. Te vattabbā – ‘‘vacīsaṅkhārāpissa niruddhā’’ti vacanato vācā aniruddhā hoti, tasmā nirodhaṃ samāpannena dhammampi kathentena sajjhāyampi karontena nisīditabbaṃ siyā. ‘‘Yo cāyaṃ mato kālaṅkato, tassāpi cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā’’ti vacanato cittaṃ aniruddhaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā kālaṅkate mātāpitaro vā arahante vā jhāpayantena anantariyakammaṃ kataṃ bhaveyya. Iti byañjane abhinivesaṃ akatvā ācariyānaṃ naye ṭhatvā attho upaparikkhitabbo. Attho hi paṭisaraṇaṃ, na byañjanaṃ.
“诸根清净”者:当唯作心之运作现前时,若有外所缘触击诸根之净色,诸根即感疲惫、受损,如为垢染,犹如置于四衢街口的明镜,为风等扬尘所污。然若将镜纳于袋中,置入箱等物内,其内尚极光耀;如是,入灭尽定的比丘入于灭尽定时,其五种净色转为极其明洁。故说“诸根清净”。显示巴利原文
Indriyāni vippasannānīti kiriyamayapavattasmiñhi vattamāne bahiddhā ārammaṇesu pasāde ghaṭṭentesu indriyāni kilamantāni upahatāni makkhitāni viya honti, vātādīhi uṭṭhitena rajena catumahāpathe ṭhapitaādāso viya. Yathā pana thavikāyaṃ pakkhipitvā mañjūsādīsu ṭhapito ādāso antoyeva virocati, evaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpannassa bhikkhuno antonirodhe pañca pasādā ativirocanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘indriyāni vippasannānī’’ti.
458 “贤友,‘有多少缘?’这是问什么?这是在问灭尽定的无间缘,即非想非非想处。于解答中,则依‘乐之舍离’等,解说了四种舍离的缘。‘无相’是问什么?这是在问从灭尽定出起的果等至。因为从其余等至出起,乃由有分心转起;而从灭尽定出起,则是经观之流而入的果等至,所以他只问此。‘一切相’指色等一切所缘。‘对无相界之作意’指对远离一切相的涅槃界之作意——即与果等至俱生之作意。如是,前已说为灭尽定基础之初禅;次说灭尽定之无间缘——非想非非想处;今则说从灭尽定出起之果等至。显示巴利原文
458.Katipanāvuso, paccayāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhassa anantarapaccayaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Vissajjane panassa sukhassa ca pahānāti cattāro apagamanapaccayā kathitā. Animittāyāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Nirodhato vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattiṃ pucchissāmīti pucchati. Avasesasamāpattivuṭṭhānañhi bhavaṅgena hoti, nirodhā vuṭṭhānaṃ pana vipassanānissandāya phalasamāpattiyāti tameva pucchati. Sabbanimittānanti rūpādīnaṃ sabbārammaṇānaṃ. Animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāroti sabbanimittāpagatāya nibbānadhātuyā manasikāro. Phalasamāpattisahajātaṃ manasikāraṃ sandhāyāha. Iti heṭṭhā nirodhapādakaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ gahitaṃ, nirodhassa anantarapaccayaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ gahitaṃ, idha nirodhato vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpatti gahitāti.
此处当述灭尽定之论。该论在《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.83)中如是说:“由具足二力、三种行之止息、十六种智行、九种定行及自在通达之慧,而有灭尽定之智。”而于《清净道论》中,已对它作了方方面面之抉择。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ ṭhāne nirodhakathā kathetabbā hoti. Sā, ‘‘dvīhi balehi samannāgatattā tayo ca saṅkhārānaṃ paṭippassaddhiyā soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi navahi samādhicariyāhi vasībhāvatāpaññā nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇa’’nti evaṃ paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.83) āgatā. Visuddhimagge panassā sabbākārena vinicchayakathā kathitā.
今为问作用等至,故说“贤友,有多少缘……”等。从灭尽定出起的果等至确实无有住立,唯转起一、二心刹那便沉入有分。因此比丘七日安坐,止息无色之流转后,于灭尽定出起之果等至中不能久住。然而,于作用等至中,时间期限方为量度,故彼乃名为住立。因此他说:“无相心解脱之住立……”,意即:为令其久住,有多少缘?于答中则说“先前之行”,即指时间期限。关于“出起”,此处问的是有分出起。于答中则说“对一切相之作意”,即基于色等相而生起、与有分俱生之作意。显示巴利原文
Idāni valañjanasamāpattiṃ pucchanto kati panāvuso, paccayātiādimāha. Nirodhato hi vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattiyā ṭhiti nāma na hoti, ekaṃ dve cittavārameva pavattitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Ayañhi bhikkhu satta divase arūpapavattaṃ nirodhetvā nisinno nirodhavuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattiyaṃ na ciraṃ tiṭṭhati. Valañjanasamāpattiyaṃ pana addhānaparicchedova pamāṇaṃ. Tasmā sā ṭhiti nāma hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā’’ti. Tassā ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ kati paccayāti attho. Vissajjane panassā pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāroti addhānaparicchedo vutto. Vuṭṭhānāyāti idha bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati. Vissajjanepissā sabbanimittānañcamanasikāroti rūpādinimittavasena bhavaṅgasahajātamanasikāro vutto.
459 “朋友,那……”——此处是问什么呢?并没有提出什么新的内容,他只是把先前已说过的法汇集起来提问。那么,那些法是在何处说过的呢?在“他认知青色的,也认知黄色的、红色的、白色的”(《中部》1.450)这一处,说的是无量心解脱;在“无所有处,应如此理解:‘没有任何事物’”(《中部》1.451)这一处,说的是无所有;在“他以慧眼彻见”(《中部》1.451)这一处,说的是空;而在“朋友,有多少缘成就无相心解脱的住立与出起?”这一处,说的则是无相。就像这样,他在这里把前面说过的法汇合起来提问。然而,依据注书的判定,他正是为了破斥那些见解,指出“这些法在各自的处所已经解说过”,进而表明“另有四个同名的法”以及“有一个法拥有四个名称”这一事实,才在此处发问,好让人把它讲清楚。在回答中:“朋友,这被称为无量心解脱”——由于遍满而无有限量,故称无量。因为这种心解脱,要么遍满于无量的有情,要么对哪怕一个有情也毫无遗漏地遍满之。显示巴利原文
459.Yā cāyaṃ, āvusoti idha kiṃ pucchati? Idha aññaṃ abhinavaṃ nāma natthi. Heṭṭhā kathitadhammeyeva ekato samodhānetvā pucchāmīti pucchati. Kattha pana te kathitā? ‘‘Nīlampi sañjānāti pītakampi, lohitakampi, odātakampi sañjānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.450) etasmiñhi ṭhāne appamāṇā cetovimutti kathitā. ‘‘Natthi kiñcīti ākiñcaññāyatananti neyya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.451) ettha ākiñcaññaṃ. ‘‘Paññācakkhunā pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.451) ettha suññatā. ‘‘Kati panāvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā vuṭṭhānāyā’’ti ettha animittā. Evaṃ heṭṭhā kathitāva imasmiṃ ṭhāne ekato samodhānetvā pucchati. Taṃ pana paṭikkhipitvā etā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne niddiṭṭhāvāti vatvā aññe cattāro dhammā ekanāmakā atthi. Eko dhammo catunāmako atthi, etaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā kathāpetuṃ idha pucchatīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ. Tassā vissajjane ayaṃ vuccatāvuso, appamāṇā cetovimuttīti ayaṃ pharaṇaappamāṇatāya appamāṇā nāma. Ayañhi appamāṇe vā satte pharati, ekasmimpi vā satte asesetvā pharati.
“朋友,这被称为无所有”——因为没有所缘的累赘,所以称无所有。“以我而空”,是指它空于由我体、养育等所施设的“我”。“以我所而空”,是指它空于由衣等资具所施设的“我所”。“无相”——由于贪等相状完全不存在,故称无相,这是针对阿拉汉果等至而说的。它们“意义不同,言辞也有别”,是说这些法言辞不同,意义也不同。其中,言辞上的不同显而易见。而意义上的差别则是:无量心解脱在界地方面属于广大,是色界的;在所缘方面,它以有情的施设为所缘。无所有心解脱在界地方面属于广大,是无色界的;在所缘方面,则不可言说。空心解脱在界地方面属于欲界;在所缘方面,它以行为所缘,因为这里的空,正是观。无相心解脱在界地方面是出世间的;在所缘方面,它以涅槃为所缘。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ vuccatāvuso, ākiñcaññāti ārammaṇakiñcanassa abhāvato ākiñcaññā. Attena vāti atta bhāvaposapuggalādisaṅkhātena attena suññaṃ. Attaniyena vāti cīvarādiparikkhārasaṅkhātena attaniyena suññaṃ. Animittāti rāganimittādīnaṃ abhāveneva animittā, arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ sandhāyāha. Nānatthā ceva nānābyañjanā cāti byañjanampi nesaṃ nānā atthopi. Tattha byañjanassa nānatā pākaṭāva. Attho pana, appamāṇā cetovimutti bhūmantarato mahaggatā eva hoti rūpāvacarā; ārammaṇato satta paññattiārammaṇā. Ākiñcaññā bhummantarato mahaggatā arūpāvacarā; ārammaṇato na vattabbārammaṇā. Suññatā bhummantarato kāmāvacarā; ārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇā. Vipassanā hi ettha suññatāti adhippetā. Animittā bhummantarato lokuttarā; ārammaṇato nibbanārammaṇā.
“朋友,贪是量的制造者”等:就像山脚下有一种腐叶积水,颜色黝黑。望去时,人会感觉它好像有百寻之深;但若拿竹竿或绳子去测量,却连脚背的深度都不到。同样地,只要贪等烦恼还未生起,就无法确切认清一个人,他看起来就像一位入流者、一来者、不来者。然而,一旦他内心的贪等生起,那时便会知道:“这个人为贪所染污、为嗔所恼怒、为痴所蒙蔽。”于是,这些烦恼生起来,就如同在显示“这个人有如此这般分量”的一把尺子似的,所以称为“量的制造者”。“朋友,有多少无量心解脱?”——这是在问:有多少种无量心解脱。那么究竟有多少种呢?四梵住、四道、四果,共十二种。其中,梵住因遍满的无限性而称为无量;其余的道果则因断除了那些作为量之制造者的烦恼,故称无量。涅槃也是无量的,但它不属于心解脱,所以此处没有把它算进去。“不动摇的”:这指的是阿拉汉果的心解脱。因为在所有心解脱中,它最上、最高,故称“不动摇的”。“朋友,贪是累赘”:贪生起后,会压迫、碾磨、束缚这个有情,所以称为“累赘”。据说,就像人们用牛碾平打谷场时那样。显示巴利原文
Rāgokho, āvuso, pamāṇakaraṇotiādīsu yathā pabbatapāde pūtipaṇṇarasaudakaṃ nāma hoti kāḷavaṇṇaṃ; olokentānaṃ byāmasatagambhīraṃ viya khāyati. Yaṭṭhiṃ vā rajjuṃ vā gahetvā minantassa piṭṭhipādottharaṇamattampi na hoti. Evamevaṃ yāva rāgādayo nuppajjanti, tāva puggalaṃ sañjānituṃ na sakkā honti, sotāpanno viya, sakadāgāmī viya, anāgāmī viya ca khāyati. Yadā panassa rāgādayo uppajjanti, tadā ratto duṭṭho mūḷhoti paññāyati. Iti ete ‘‘ettako aya’’nti puggalassa pamāṇaṃ dassento viya uppajjantīti pamāṇakaraṇā nāma vuttā. Yāvatā kho, āvuso, appamāṇā cetovimuttiyoti yattakā appamāṇā cetovimuttiyo. Kittakā pana tā? Cattāro brahmavihārā, cattāro maggā, cattāri ca phalānīti dvādasa. Tattha brahmavihārā pharaṇaappamāṇatāya appamāṇā. Sesā pamāṇakaraṇānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena appamāṇā. Nibbānampi appamāṇameva, cetovimutti pana na hoti, tasmā na gahitaṃ. Akuppāti arahattaphalacetovimutti; sā hi tāsaṃ sabbajeṭṭhikā, tasmā aggamakkhāyatīti vuttā. Rāgo kho, āvuso, kiñcanoti rāgo uppajjitvā puggalaṃ kiñcati maddati palibundhati. Tasmā kiñcanoti vutto. Manussā kira goṇehi khalaṃ maddāpento kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakāti vadanti. Evaṃ maddanattho kiñcanatthoti veditabbo. Dosamohesupi eseva nayo. Ākiñcaññā cetovimuttiyo nāma nava dhammā ākiñcaññāyatanañca maggaphalāni ca. Tattha ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ kiñcanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ assa natthīti ākiñcaññaṃ. Maggaphalāni kiñcanānaṃ maddanānaṃ palibundhanakilesānaṃ natthitāya ākiñcaññāni. Nibbānampi ākiñcaññaṃ, cetovimutti pana na hoti, tasmā na gahitaṃ.
贤友,贪是‘相的制造者’等:譬如两家各有一头相似的小牛。只要尚未给它们作标记,便无法辨别‘这头是某家的小牛,那头是另一家的’。但若用矛等给它们作了标记,那时便能辨认了。同样地,只要某个有情的贪尚未生起,便无法知晓他是圣者还是凡夫;然而,一旦贪在他心中生起,就如同制造了一种可供辨识的标记——‘此人是具贪者’,因此称为‘相的制造者’。嗔与痴的道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
Rāgo kho, āvuso, nimittakaraṇotiādīsu yathā nāma dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ sadisā dve vacchakā honti. Yāva tesaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ na kataṃ hoti, tāva ‘‘ayaṃ asukakulassa vacchako, ayaṃ asukakulassā’’ti na sakkā honti jānituṃ. Yadā pana tesaṃ sattisūlādīsu aññataraṃ lakkhaṇaṃ kataṃ hoti, tadā sakkā honti jānituṃ. Evameva yāva puggalassa rāgo nuppajjati, tāva na sakkā hoti jānituṃ ariyo vā puthujjano vāti. Rāgo panassa uppajjamānova sarāgo nāma ayaṃ puggaloti sañjānananimittaṃ karonto viya uppajjati, tasmā ‘‘nimittakaraṇo’’ti vutto. Dosamohesupi eseva nayo.
名为‘无相心解脱’的法共有十三种:观、四无色定、四道和四果。其中,观去除了常相、乐相、我相,故称无相;四无色定因无有色相,故称无相;道与果则因无有那些制造相的烦恼,故为无相。涅槃亦是无相,但非心解脱,故未计入。那么,为何‘空心解脱’未被单独列出?因其据‘于贪而空……’等说,已遍入一切处,故不别立。‘同一意义’:这是依所缘而言,它们是同一意义。因为无量、无所有、空、无相,这一切皆是涅槃的名称。依此角度,它们是同义的。而在其他情况中,有些称为无量,有些称为无所有,有些称为空,有些称为无相——依此角度,便是‘言辞有别’。长老即如此随顺论法之脉络,结束了说法。显示巴利原文
Animittā cetovimutti nāma terasa dhammā – vipassanā, cattāro āruppā, cattāro maggā, cattāri ca phalānīti. Tattha vipassanā niccanimittaṃ sukhanimittaṃ attanimittaṃ ugghāṭetīti animittā nāma. Cattāro āruppā rūpanimittassa abhāvena animittā nāma. Maggaphalāni nimittakaraṇānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena animittāni. Nibbānampi animittameva, taṃ pana cetovimutti na hoti, tasmā na gahitaṃ. Atha kasmā suññatā cetovimutti na gahitāti? Sā, ‘‘suññā rāgenā’’tiādivacanato sabbattha anupaviṭṭhāva, tasmā visuṃ na gahitā . Ekatthāti ārammaṇavasena ekatthā. Appamāṇaṃ ākiñcaññaṃ suññataṃ animittanti hi sabbānetāni nibbānasseva nāmāni. Iti iminā pariyāyena ekatthā. Aññasmiṃ pana ṭhāne appamāṇā honti, aññasmiṃ ākiñcaññā aññasmiṃ suññatā aññasmiṃ animittāti iminā pariyāyena nānābyañjanā. Iti thero yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
第四、《小vedalla经》的注释。显示巴利原文
4. Cūḷavedallasuttavaṇṇanā
460 ‘如是我闻’等,此即《小有明经》。其中,‘Visākho upāsako’指一位名为毗舍佉的优婆塞。‘Yena dhammadinnā’意为‘至法乐’,即往诣名为法乐的比丘尼之处。那么,这位毗舍佉是谁?法乐是谁?他为何去见法乐?毗舍佉是法乐在俗家时的丈夫。那时,世尊已证正觉,转殊胜法轮,调伏了耶舍等善男子后,前往优楼频螺,度化了一千位结发苦行者。随后,世尊与这些原为苦行者的漏尽比丘们一同前往王舍城。频婆娑罗王为见世尊,携十二万眷属前来。世尊为他宣说正法。当时,随同国王前来的十二万人中,有一万人证得优婆塞位,其余十一万人连同频婆娑罗王,安立于入流果。这位毗舍佉优婆塞即是其中之一,他于初谒佛陀时便同样安立于入流果。后来一日再次闻法,证得一来果;又一日闻法,安立不来果。当他证得不来果后回到家中,不再如往日般东张西望、面挂笑容,而是诸根宁静、内心安详地归来。显示巴利原文
460.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷavedallasuttaṃ. Tattha visākho upāsakoti visākhoti evaṃnāmako upāsako. Yena dhammadinnāti yena dhammadinnā nāma bhikkhunī tenupasaṅkami. Ko panāyaṃ visākho? Kā dhammadinnā? Kasmā upasaṅkamīti? Visākho nāma dhammadinnāya gihikāle gharasāmiko. So yadā bhagavā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā pavattavaradhammacakko yasādayo kulaputte vinetvā uruvelaṃ patvā tattha jaṭilasahassaṃ vinetvā purāṇajaṭilehi khīṇāsavabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ rājagahaṃ gantvā buddhadassanatthaṃ dvādasanahutāya parisāya saddhiṃ āgatassa bimbisāramahārājassa dhammaṃ desesi. Tadā raññā saddhiṃ āgatesu dvādasanahutesu ekaṃ nahutaṃ upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesi, ekādasa nahutāni sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu saddhiṃ raññā bimbisārena. Ayaṃ upāsako tesaṃ aññataro, tehi saddhiṃ paṭhamadassaneva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya, puna ekadivasaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ patvā, tato aparabhāgepi ekadivasaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhito. So anāgāmī hutvā gehaṃ āgacchanto yathā aññesu divasesu ito cito ca olokento sitaṃ kurumāno āgacchati, evaṃ anāgantvā santindriyo santamānaso hutvā agamāsi.
法乐推开狮子窗向外望去,看见他回来的模样,心想:“这是怎么回事?”于是迎出门去,站在阶梯顶端伸手想去扶他。居士却缩回了自己的手。法乐心想:“等到早餐的时候,就会知道了。”以前居士总是和她一同用斋,但那天他并未招呼她,只像一位精进修行的比丘那样独自进食。她又想:“等到傍晚的时候,就会知道了。”那天居士没有走进华丽的寝室,而是让人收拾了另一间房,铺好如法的床榻躺下。法乐心想:“难道他在外面有了别的心愿?还是被什么人离间了?又或者是我自己做错了什么?”她心中十分忧伤,转念又想:“再住上一两天,就会明白了。”于是她前去随侍,顶礼之后站到一旁。显示巴利原文
Dhammadinnā sīhapañjaraṃ ugghāṭetvā vīthiṃ olokayamānā tassa āgamanākāraṃ disvā, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti cintetvā tassa paccuggamanaṃ kurumānā sopānasīse ṭhatvā olambanatthaṃ hatthaṃ pasāresi. Upāsako attano hatthaṃ samiñjesi. Sā ‘‘pātarāsabhojanakāle jānissāmī’’ti cintesi. Upāsako pubbe tāya saddhiṃ ekato bhuñjati. Taṃ divasaṃ pana taṃ anapaloketvā yogāvacarabhikkhu viya ekakova bhuñji. Sā, ‘‘sāyanhakāle jānissāmī’’ti cintesi. Upāsako taṃdivasaṃ sirigabbhaṃ na pāvisi, aññaṃ gabbhaṃ paṭijaggāpetvā kappiyamañcakaṃ paññapāpetvā nipajji. Upāsikā, ‘‘kiṃ nu khvassa bahiddhā patthanā atthi, udāhu kenacideva paribhedakena bhinno, udāhu mayheva koci doso atthī’’ti balavadomanassā hutvā, ‘‘ekaṃ dve divase vasitakāle sakkā ñātu’’nti tassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi.
居士问道:“法乐,你怎么在这样不合时辰的时候来了?”她回答:“是的,夫君,我来了。你已不像从前那样了。你在外面有了别的心愿吗?”居士说:“法乐,没有。”“是有别的人在离间吗?”答:“也没有。”“既然这样,那一定是我自己做错了什么。”居士说:“你也没有过错。”“那你为何与往常不同,连一句问候交谈都没有呢?”他心中思忖:“这出世间法甚为深重,不可轻率宣说。但我若不讲,她必定会心碎而死。”出于慈悯,他便说道:“法乐,我听闻了世尊的说法,证得了名为出世间法的法。证得此法之人,已不宜再操持那些世间的俗务了。你若愿意,你有四亿财产,我也有四亿,合起来共八亿财富。你可自行作主,将我视如母亲或姐妹一般而安住。我将依靠你所供养的一点食物生活。你若不这样做,就带着这些财物回娘家去。又或者你在外并无别的心愿,那我就把你当作姐妹或女儿来抚养。”显示巴利原文
Upāsako, ‘‘kiṃ dhammadinne akāle āgatāsī’’ti pucchi. Āma ayyaputta, āgatāmhi, na tvaṃ yathā purāṇo, kiṃ nu te bahiddhā patthanā atthīti? Natthi dhammadinneti. Añño koci paribhedako atthīti? Ayampi natthīti. Evaṃ sante mayheva koci doso bhavissatīti. Tuyhampi doso natthīti. Atha kasmā mayā saddhiṃ yathā pakatiyā ālāpasallāpamattampi na karothāti? So cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ lokuttaradhammo nāma garu bhāriyo na pakāsetatabbo, sace kho panāhaṃ na kathessāmi, ayaṃ hadayaṃ phāletvā ettheva kālaṃ kareyyā’’ti tassānuggahatthāya kathesi – ‘‘dhammadinne ahaṃ satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā lokuttaradhammaṃ nāma adhigato, taṃ adhigatassa evarūpā lokiyakiriyā na vaṭṭati. Yadi tvaṃ icchasi, tava cattālīsa koṭiyo mama cattālīsa koṭiyoti asītikoṭidhanaṃ atthi, ettha issarā hutvā mama mātiṭṭhāne vā bhaginiṭṭhāne vā ṭhatvā vasa. Tayā dinnena bhattapiṇḍamattakena ahaṃ yāpessāmi. Athevaṃ na karosi, ime bhoge gahetvā kulagehaṃ gaccha, athāpi te bahiddhā patthanā natthi, ahaṃ taṃ bhaginiṭṭhāne vā dhituṭṭhāne vā ṭhapetvā posessāmī’’ti.
她心想:“一个寻常男子决不会说出这样的话。毫无疑问,他已通达了最殊胜的出世间法。可是,这法只能由男子证悟,还是女人也能够通达呢?”于是她对毗舍佉说:“这法只有男子才能证得吗?女人也能证得吗?”毗舍佉说:“法乐,你说的是什么话?凡是走上了修行之道的人,都是这法的继承者。只要具备相应的亲依止缘,都能证得这法。”“既然如此,请你允我出家吧。”居士说:“很好,贤妻,我本就有意引导你也走上这条道路,只因不知你的心意,才没有告诉你。”说罢,他立刻前往频婆娑罗王处,顶礼后站在一旁。显示巴利原文
Sā cintesi – ‘‘pakatipuriso evaṃ vattā nāma natthi. Addhā etena lokuttaravaradhammo paṭividdho. So pana dhammo kiṃ puriseheva paṭibujjhitabbo, udāhu mātugāmopi paṭivijjhituṃ sakkotī’’ti visākhaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eso dhammo puriseheva labhitabbo, mātugāmenapi sakkā laddhu’’nti? Kiṃ vadesi dhammadinne, ye paṭipannakā, te etassa dāyādā, yassa yassa upanissayo atthi, so so etaṃ paṭilabhatīti. Evaṃ sante mayhaṃ pabbajjaṃ anujānāthāti. Sādhu bhadde, ahampi taṃ etasmiṃyeva magge yojetukāmo, manaṃ pana te ajānamāno na kathemīti tāvadeva bimbisārassa rañño santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi.
国王问:“居士,你为何在非时前来?”他答道:“大王,法乐要出家。”“她需要带走什么吗?”“别的什么都不要,大王,只需一辆金轿,并请让人将城市装饰起来。”国王便赐下金轿,并命人装饰城市。毗舍佉请法乐用香水沐浴,佩戴所有饰物,乘上金轿,由亲友们簇拥着,以香花等作供养,犹如举办城市庆典一般,来到比丘尼寺,说道:“大姊们,请度法乐出家吧。”比丘尼们说:“居士,她能忍受一两个过失吗?”他答:“大姊们,她没有任何过失,纯粹是凭信心出家的。”于是,一位聪慧的长老尼为她开示了皮肤、血肉等五法业处,剃除头发,度她出家。毗舍佉说:“圣尼,愿您安住,这法是善说的。”顶礼后便离去了。显示巴利原文
Rājā , ‘‘kiṃ, gahapati, akāle āgatosī’’ti pucchi. Dhammadinnā, ‘‘mahārāja, pabbajissāmī’’ti vadatīti. Kiṃ panassa laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti? Aññaṃ kiñci natthi, sovaṇṇasivikaṃ deva, laddhuṃ vaṭṭati nagarañca paṭijaggāpetunti. Rājā sovaṇṇasivikaṃ datvā nagaraṃ paṭijaggāpesi. Visākho dhammadinnaṃ gandhodakena nahāpetvā sabbālaṅkārehi alaṅkārāpetvā sovaṇṇasivikāya nisīdāpetvā ñātigaṇena parivārāpetvā gandhapupphādīhi pūjayamāno nagaravāsanaṃ karonto viya bhikkhuniupassayaṃ gantvā, ‘‘dhammadinnaṃ pabbājethāyye’’ti āha. Bhikkhuniyo ‘‘ekaṃ vā dve vā dose sahituṃ vaṭṭati gahapatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Natthayye koci doso, saddhāya pabbajatīti. Athekā byattā therī tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitvā kese ohāretvā pabbājesi. Visākho, ‘‘abhiramayye, svākkhāto dhammo’’ti vanditvā pakkāmi.
从她出家那天起,利养与恭敬便随之而来。她正是被这些所障,难以找到修习沙门法的机会。于是她带着亲教师与教授师两位长老尼前往外地,请她们在三十八所缘中开示一个她内心喜爱的业处,然后开始修习沙门法。由于她宿世所发胜愿的成就,并未辛苦太久。显示巴利原文
Tassā pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya lābhasakkāro uppajji. Teneva palibuddhā samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ okāsaṃ na labhati. Athācariya-upajjhāyatheriyo gahetvā janapadaṃ gantvā aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittarucitaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ āraddhā, abhinīhārasampannattā pana nāticiraṃ kilamittha.
从此之后,于十万劫前,世间出现了一位名为莲华上佛的导师。那时,她生于某户人家为婢女,卖掉自己的头发,供养给那位导师的上首弟子——善生长老,并发了誓愿。由于那誓愿与胜愿的成就,她并未辛苦太久,仅数日便证得阿罗汉果。她心想:“我于教法中出家所欲成就之事,今已达成。住在乡间还有何用?我的亲属们亦能修积福德,比丘尼僧团也不会缺乏资具。我应前往王舍城。”于是她带领比丘尼僧团,径直往王舍城而去。毗舍佉听说“法乐回来了”,便想:“她出家不久便去了外地,如今很快又回来了,究竟是怎么回事?我且前去看看。”于是第二次来到比丘尼寺。因此经中说:“那时,毗舍佉居士前往法乐比丘尼之处。”显示巴利原文
Ito paṭṭhāya hi satasahassakappamatthake padumuttaro nāma satthā loke udapādi. Tadā esā ekasmiṃ kule dāsī hutvā attano kese vikkiṇitvā sujātattherassa nāma aggasāvakassa dānaṃ datvā patthanamakāsi. Sā tāya patthanābhinīhārasampattiyā nāticiraṃ kilamittha, katipāheneva arahattaṃ patvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ yenatthena sāsane pabbajitā, so matthakaṃ patto, kiṃ me janapadavāsena, mayhaṃ ñātakāpi puññāni karissanti, bhikkhunisaṅghopi paccayehi na kilamissati, rājagahaṃ gacchāmī’’ti bhikkhunisaṅghaṃ gahetvā rājagahameva agamāsi. Visākho, ‘‘dhammadinnā kira āgatā’’ti sutvā, ‘‘pabbajitvā nacirasseva janapadaṃ gatā, gantvāpi nacirasseva paccāgatā, kiṃ nu kho bhavissati, gantvā jānissāmī’’ti dutiyagamanena bhikkhuniupassayaṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho visākho upāsako yena dhammadinnā bhikkhunī tenupasaṅkamī’’ti.
“如此说”是指他说了“此有身”等这番话。他为何这样说呢?据说他心里这样想:“直接问‘尊姐,您欢喜还是不欢喜?’,这不像是智者所为。我应以五取蕴为切入点来提问,通过她的回答,便能知道她是欢喜还是不欢喜。”因此他这样说了。法乐一听,并没有说“贤友毗舍佉,我刚出家不久,哪里知道自身或他身?”也没有说“你去问别的长老尼吧”,而是像接住抛来的物品、解开单边绳结、在密林中辨出象道、以剑锋开启宝匣一般,站在无碍解的境界中回答问题,开始说:“贤友毗舍佉,有这五取蕴……”等等。其中,“五”是数量的限定。“取蕴”指作为取之缘的蕴,应依这些方法详释取蕴的含义。但此内容在《清净道论》中已有详细解说,故可按彼处详释的方法来理解。至于有身之集等应说的内容,在前面各处也已说过了。显示巴利原文
Etadavocāti etaṃ sakkāyotiādivacanaṃ avoca. Kasmā avocāti? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘abhiramasi nābhiramasi, ayye’’ti evaṃ pucchanaṃ nāma na paṇḍitakiccaṃ, pañcupādānakkhandhe upanetvā pañhaṃ pucchissāmi, pañhabyākaraṇena tassā abhiratiṃ vā anabhiratiṃ vā jānissāmīti, tasmā avoca. Taṃ sutvāva dhammadinnā ahaṃ, āvuso visākha, acirapabbajitā sakāyaṃ vā parakāyaṃ vā kuto jānissāmīti vā, aññattheriyo upasaṅkamitvā pucchāti vā avatvā upanikkhittaṃ sampaṭicchamānā viya, ekapāsakagaṇṭhiṃ mocentī viya gahanaṭṭhāne hatthimaggaṃ nīharamānā viya khaggamukhena samuggaṃ vivaramānā viya ca paṭisambhidāvisaye ṭhatvā pañhaṃ vissajjamānā, pañca kho ime, āvuso visākha, upādānakkhandhātiādimāha. Tattha pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānānaṃ paccayabhūtā khandhāti evamādinā nayenettha upādānakkhandhakathā vitthāretvā kathetabbā. Sā panesā visuddhimagge vitthāritā evāti tattha vittāritanayeneva veditabbā. Sakkāyasamudayādīsupi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā tattha tattha vuttameva.
毗舍佉听了四谛的解答,便知道长老尼是安住于法的欢喜者。因为,如果一个人在佛陀教法中感到厌烦、不欢喜,那么对于这样被反复追问的问题,他是无法解答的,就像用镊子一根根拔除白发,又像从须弥山脚下挖出沙子一样困难。而这四谛在世间犹如日月,在佛法中也明明白白。无论是世尊还是大长老们,在集会中都只开示圣谛。比丘僧团也从善男子出家之日起,就教导他:“四者何?即四圣谛。”这位法乐,安住于方便善巧,具足聪慧明辩,能把握要点,凭其所闻也能说法。因此,毗舍佉心想:“仅凭刚才的问答,还不能确定她是否通达圣谛。只有通过分别圣谛的问答,才能知晓。”于是他搁置之前已问过的两个谛,将它隐藏起来,打算提出一个纽结难题,便问道:“尊姐,正是那个……”等等。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana catusaccabyākaraṇaṃ sutvā visākho theriyā abhiratabhāvaṃ aññāsi. Yo hi buddhasāsane ukkaṇṭhito hoti anabhirato, so evaṃ pucchitapucchitapañhaṃ saṇḍāsena ekekaṃ palitaṃ gaṇhanto viya, sinerupādato vālukaṃ uddharanto viya vissajjetuṃ na sakkoti. Yasmā pana imāni cattāri saccāni loke candimasūriyā viya buddhasāsane pākaṭāni, parisamajjhe gato hi bhagavāpi mahātherāpi saccāneva pakāsenti; bhikkhusaṅghopi pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya kulaputte cattāri nāma kiṃ, cattāri ariyasaccānīti pañhaṃ uggaṇhāpeti. Ayañca dhammadinnā upāyakosalle ṭhitā paṇḍitā byattā nayaṃ gahetvā sutenapi kathetuṃ samatthā, tasmā ‘‘na sakkā etissā ettāvatā saccānaṃ paṭividdhabhāvo ñātuṃ, saccavinibbhogapañhabyākaraṇena sakkā ñātu’’nti cintetvā heṭṭhā kathitāni dve saccāni paṭinivattetvā guḷhaṃ katvā gaṇṭhipañhaṃ pucchissāmīti pucchanto taññeva nu kho, ayyetiādimāha.
她的回答是:“贤友毗舍佉,那个并非就是取。”意思是:取只是行蕴的一部分,因此取并不就是那五取蕴,但取也不能离开五取蕴而单独存在。如果取就是那个,那么色等自身的体性也应该变成取;如果取在别处,那它就会像其他宗派所说的与心不相应的随眠,或者像施设,或者像涅槃那样,成为脱离蕴的存在,乃至需要施设一个第六蕴。所以她才如此回答。毗舍佉听了她的解答,确信“她已证得安立”。因为,若不是漏尽者,不具备那种无滞无碍、犹如点亮千盏灯一般的智慧,绝不可能解答这样隐密深藏、贯穿三相、甚深难解的难题。他确信之后,心想:“这位法乐,在教法中已得安立,证得无碍解,得无所畏,安住于有顶,是大漏尽者。她有能力回答我的问题。现在我要问她一个犹如竹心般的关键问题。”这样想着,他便问道:“那么,尊姐,如何……”等等。显示巴利原文
Tassa vissajjane na kho, āvuso visākha, taññeva upādānanti upādānassa saṅkhārakkhandhekadesabhāvato na taṃyeva upādānaṃ te pañcupādānakkhandhā, nāpi aññatra pañcahi upādānakkhandhehi upādānaṃ. Yadi hi taññeva siyā, rūpādisabhāvampi upādānaṃ siyā. Yadi aññatra siyā, parasamaye cittavippayutto anusayo viya paṇṇatti viya nibbānaṃ viya ca khandhavinimuttaṃ vā siyā, chaṭṭho vā khandho paññapetabbo bhaveyya, tasmā evaṃ byākāsi. Tassā byākaraṇaṃ sutvā ‘‘adhigatapatiṭṭhā aya’’nti visākho niṭṭhamagamāsi. Na hi sakkā akhīṇāsavena asambaddhena avitthāyantena padīpasahassaṃ jālentena viya evarūpo guḷho paṭicchanno tilakkhaṇāhato gambhīro pañho vissajjetuṃ. Niṭṭhaṃ gantvā pana, ‘‘ayaṃ dhammadinnā sāsane laddhapatiṭṭhā adhigatapaṭisambhidā vesārajjappattā bhavamatthake ṭhitā mahākhīṇāsavā, samatthā mayhaṃ pucchitapañhaṃ kathetuṃ, idāni pana naṃ ovattikasāraṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā taṃ pucchanto, kathaṃ panāyyetiādimāha.
461 在回答中,“无闻凡夫”等义,已于《根本法门经》中详细解说。“他观色是我”:指的是有人将色视为我。亦即:“那个色就是我,我就是那个色”,他将色与我视作无二无别。比如,一盏油灯燃烧时,火焰即是光焰,光焰即是火焰,他将火焰与光焰视为不二。同样地,此处有人将色视为我……视作无二无别。(《无碍解道》1.131)他如是依“色是我”的邪见而观照。或者,他先执取一个无色的我,然后如同将树视为有影一般,观想那个我具有色。或者,执取无色之我后,如同花香在花中,观想色在我之中。或者,执取无色之我后,如同宝珠在匣中,观想我在色之中。对于“观受是我”等处,理亦相同。显示巴利原文
461. Tassa vissajjane assutavātiādi mūlapariyāye vitthāritameva. Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti, ‘‘idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati. Yaṃ rūpaṃ so ahaṃ, yo ahaṃ taṃ rūpanti rūpañca attañca advayaṃ samanupassati. Seyyathāpi nāma telappadīpassa jhāyato yā acci so vaṇṇo, yo vaṇṇo sā accīti acciñca vaṇṇañca advayaṃ samanupassati. Evameva idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati…pe… advayaṃ samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.131) evaṃ rūpaṃ attāti diṭṭhipassanāya passati. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānanti arūpaṃ attāti gahetvā chāyāvantaṃ rukkhaṃ viya taṃ attānaṃ rūpavantaṃ samanupassati. Attani vā rūpanti arūpameva attāti gahetvā pupphasmiṃ gandhaṃ viya attani rūpaṃ samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃ vā attānanti arūpameva attāti gahetvā karaṇḍāya maṇiṃ viya attānaṃ rūpasmiṃ samanupassati. Vedanaṃ attatotiādīsupi eseva nayo.
其中,“观色是我”是说纯粹以色为我。而“我有色”“我中有色”“色中有我”,以及对于受、想、行、识,分别说“观受是我”等七处,这些都是在说无色为我。又如“我有受”“我中有受”“受中有我”等,于四蕴中各依三种方式,合为十二处,是说既有色又无色的混合之我。其中,“观色是我”乃至“观识是我”这五处说的是断见,其余各处说的是常见。如此,这里总共有十五种有见、五种无有见。而“不观色是我”,是说他并不将色视为我,而是将色观为无常、苦、无我。同样,“不观我有色”……乃至“不观识中有我”,是说他对五蕴不以任何方式执为我,而是以一切方式观照它们为无常、苦、无我。显示巴利原文
Tattha, rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti suddharūpameva attāti kathitaṃ. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ. Vedanaṃ attato… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatīti imesu sattasu ṭhānesu arūpaṃ attāti kathitaṃ. Vedanāvantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā vedanaṃ, vedanāya vā attānanti evaṃ catūsu khandhesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena dvādasasu ṭhānesu rūpārūpamissako attā kathito. Tattha rūpaṃ attato samanupassati… vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatīti imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu ucchedadiṭṭhi kathitā, avasesesu sassatadiṭṭhīti. Evamettha pannarasa bhavadiṭṭhiyo, pañca vibhavadiṭṭhiyo honti. Na rūpaṃ attatoti ettha rūpaṃ attāti na samanupassati. Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti pana samanupassati. Na rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ…pe… na viññāṇasmiṃ attānanti ime pañcakkhandhe kenaci pariyāyena attato na samanupassati, sabbākārena pana aniccā dukkhā anattāti samanupassati.
至此,长老尼在回答前一个问题“贤友毗舍佉,有身见是这样生起的”时,便以此方式将“转起”推至顶点:有去、有来、有去有来,轮回在转起。而在回答后一个问题“贤友毗舍佉,有身见是这样不生的”时,则以此方式将“无转起”推至顶点:无去、无来、无去无来,轮回不转起。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā theriyā, ‘‘evaṃ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyadiṭṭhi hotī’’ti evaṃ purimapañhaṃ vissajjentiyā ettakena gamanaṃ hoti, āgamanaṃ hoti, gamanāgamanaṃ hoti, vaṭṭaṃ vattatīti vaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassitaṃ. Evaṃ kho, āvuso visākha, sakkāyadiṭṭhi na hotīti pacchimaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjentiyā ettakena gamanaṃ na hoti, āgamanaṃ na hoti, gamanāgamanaṃ na hoti, vaṭṭaṃ nāma na vattatīti vivaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassitaṃ.
462 “然而,圣尼,什么是圣八支道?”对于这个问题,长老尼本可先反问一句再作解答:“近事男,你前面已问过道,为何此处又来问‘道’呢?”但她凭自身的精通与智慧,洞察了他的用意:“此近事男前面是就修行实践而问‘道’,这里则是想就有为、无为、世间、出世间、已包含、未包含等层面来问‘道’。”因此她未予反问,而是直接逐一解答。这里,「有为」是指被思、被计量、被设计、被积集、被造作、被生成者,是当证得者证得时所应证得的。而“圣八支道被三蕴所包含”是这样:道为有分,三蕴为无分,此有分之道犹如国土包含城市一般,被无分的三蕴所含摄。其中,正语等三者其本身就是戒,故依同类被戒蕴所包含。经文中虽以处格说“于戒蕴”,但应依工具格来理解其义。至于正精进等三者,定依其自性,无法仅靠自身便能一心专注于所缘;然而,当精进发挥了策励的作用,念发挥了不忘失的作用时,定即得到资助,便能够专注。显示巴利原文
462.Katamo panāyye, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti ayaṃ pañho theriyā paṭipucchitvā vissajjetabbo bhaveyya – ‘‘upāsaka, tayā heṭṭhā maggo pucchito, idha kasmā maggameva pucchasī’’ti. Sā pana attano byattatāya paṇḍiccena tassa adhippāyaṃ sallakkhesi – ‘‘iminā upāsakena heṭṭhā paṭipattivasena maggo pucchito bhavissati, idha pana taṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatalokiyalokuttarasaṅgahitāsaṅgahitavasena pucchitukāmo bhavissatī’’ti. Tasmā appaṭipucchitvāva yaṃ yaṃ pucchi, taṃ taṃ vissajjesi. Tattha saṅkhatoti cetito kappito pakappito āyūhito kato nibbattito samāpajjantena samāpajjitabbo. Tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahitoti ettha yasmā maggo sappadeso, tayo khandhā nippadesā, tasmā ayaṃ sappadesattā nagaraṃ viya rajjena nippadesehi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahito. Tattha sammāvācādayo tayo sīlameva, tasmā te sajātito sīlakkhandhena saṅgahitāti. Kiñcāpi hi pāḷiyaṃ sīlakkhandheti bhummena viya niddeso kato, attho pana karaṇavasena veditabbo. Sammāvāyāmādīsu pana tīsu samādhi attano dhammatāya ārammaṇe ekaggabhāvena appetuṃ na sakkoti. Vīriye pana paggahakiccaṃ sādhente satiyā ca apilāpanakiccaṃ sādhentiyā laddhūpakāro hutvā sakkoti.
此处有一譬喻:如同三位朋友一同进入花园,说:“我们来庆贺星宿节吧。”其中一人看到盛开的占婆花,举起手却无法摘到。于是第二人弯下腰,以背相承;他站到背上,仍因摇晃而不能摘取。接着第三人又将肩膀凑近,如此,他站于一人之背,倚靠一人之肩,便可随心所欲地摘下花朵,佩戴严身,欢度星宿节。应如此理解这个譬喻:如同那三位一同入园的朋友,正精进等三法亦是同时生起的。那盛开的占婆花,好比如所缘。举手无法摘花的人,犹如定,仅凭其自性无法一心专注于所缘。那位弯腰供背的朋友,犹如精进。那位凑近肩膀的朋友,犹如念。正如那人站在朋友背上、靠着朋友肩膀,便能如愿摘到花朵;同样地,当精进完成策励的作用,念完成不忘失的作用时,定得到资助,便能够一心专注于所缘。因此,定依同类被定蕴所包含,而精进与念则依其作用被包含。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi ‘‘nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmā’’ti uyyānaṃ paviṭṭhesu tīsu sahāyesu eko supupphitaṃ campakarukkhaṃ disvā hatthaṃ ukkhipitvāpi gahetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Athassa dutiyo onamitvā piṭṭhiṃ dadeyya, so tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhatvāpi kampamāno gahetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya . Athassa itaro aṃsakūṭaṃ upanāmeyya, so ekassa piṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhatvā ekassa aṃsakūṭaṃ olubbha yathāruci pupphāni ocinitvā piḷandhitvā nakkhattaṃ kīḷeyya. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekato uyyānaṃ paviṭṭhā tayo sahāyakā viya hi ekato jātā sammāvāyāmādayo tayo dhammā. Supupphitacampako viya ārammaṇaṃ. Hatthaṃ ukkhipitvāpi gahetuṃ asakkonto viya attano dhammatāya ārammaṇe ekaggabhāvena appetuṃ asakkonto samādhi. Piṭṭhiṃ datvā onatasahāyo viya vāyāmo. Aṃsakūṭaṃ datvā ṭhitasahāyo viya sati. Yathā tesu ekassa piṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhatvā ekassa aṃsakūṭaṃ olubbha itaro yathāruci pupphaṃ gahetuṃ sakkoti, evamevaṃ vīriye paggahakiccaṃ sādhente, satiyā ca apilāpanakiccaṃ sādhentiyā laddhupakāro samādhi sakkoti ārammaṇe ekaggabhāvena appetuṃ. Tasmā samādhiyevettha sajātito samādhikkhandhena saṅgahito. Vāyāmasatiyo pana kiriyato saṅgahitā honti.
在正见与正思惟当中,慧就其自性,并不能将所缘判定为“无常、苦、无我”;然而,当寻如敲击、翻转般将所缘递过来时,慧便能予以判定。这是什么缘故呢?犹如一位金匠将金币放在手中,虽然想全面察看金币的每一个细节,却无法单凭眼睛将其翻转,于是他借助手指节的拨动,将金币翻来覆去,由此便能把每个角度都看得清清楚楚。同样,慧依其自性,不能直接以无常等角度去决断所缘,但依仗具有“推向所缘”之特相、“反复敲击”之作用的寻——如同用手敲击、翻转金币一般——将所缘取来递交于慧,慧才得以决断。因此在这里,正见依其类属被归入慧蕴,正思惟则依其作用被归入。如此,圣八支道便被这三蕴所包含。是故经中说:“贤友毗舍佉,圣八支道是由三蕴所包含的。”显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhisammāsaṅkappesupi paññā attano dhammatāya aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ na sakkoti, vitakke pana ākoṭetvā ākoṭetvā dente sakkoti. Kathaṃ? Yathā hi heraññiko kahāpaṇaṃ hatthe ṭhapetvā sabbabhāgesu oloketukāmo samānopi na cakkhudaleneva parivattetuṃ sakkoti, aṅgulipabbehi pana parivattetvā ito cito ca oloketuṃ sakkoti. Evameva na paññā attano dhammatāya aniccādivasena ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ sakkoti, abhiniropanalakkhaṇena pana āhananapariyāhananarasena vitakkena ākoṭentena viya parivattentena viya ca ādāyā dinnameva vinicchetuṃ sakkoti. Tasmā idhāpi sammādiṭṭhiyeva sajātito paññākkhandhena saṅgahitā. Sammāsaṅkappo pana kiriyato saṅgahito hoti. Iti imehi tīhi khandhehi maggo saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito’’ti.
今为问及具相与资具、唯一心刹那的道定,而说:“然而,圣尼,什么是……”等。于回答中:四念处——在道刹那中,为完成四种功能而生起的念——因为是定的缘,故为相;四正勤——同样在道刹那中,为完成四种功能而生起的精进——因为是定的伴随,故为资具。“即对那些诸法”指对与道相应的那些法。而“习行”等中所说的习行、修习、多修习,亦皆唯是一心刹那的。显示巴利原文
Idāni ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ maggasamādhiṃ sanimittaṃ saparikkhāraṃ pucchanto, katamo panāyyetiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane cattāro satipaṭṭhānā maggakkhaṇe catukiccasādhanavasena uppannā sati, sā samādhissa paccayatthena nimittaṃ. Cattāro sammappadhānā catukiccasādhanavaseneva uppannaṃ vīriyaṃ, taṃ parivāraṭṭhena parikkhāro hoti. Tesaṃyeva dhammānanti tesaṃ maggasampayuttadhammānaṃ. Āsevanātiādīsu ekacittakkhaṇikāyeva āsevanādayo vuttāti.
然而,诡辩家却说:“所谓唯一心刹那的道并不存在,因为经中说‘应这样修习七年’,可见道的修习可以长达七年;而烦恼在迅速被断除时,是以七种智来断除的。”对此应回应他:“拿出经文来!”他一定找不到别的经文,于是便会引用“即对那些诸法的习行、修习、多修习”这一句,辩称:“以另一个心习行,以另一个心修习,以另一个心多修习。”此时应追问道:“那么,这部经是了义还是不了义?”他会说:“是了义,经文如何说,义即如是。”对此应如此回答:若果真如此,则一个心生起习行,另一个心也生起习行,再一个心还生起习行——如此,终日唯是习行而已,何有修习与多修习?或一个心生起修习,另一个心也生起修习,又一个心还生起修习——如此,终日唯有修习,何有习行与多修习?又或一个心生起多修习,另一个心也生起多修习,又一个心还生起多修习——如此,终日唯有多修习,何有习行与修习?显示巴利原文
Vitaṇḍavādī pana, ‘‘ekacittakkhaṇiko nāma maggo natthi, ‘evaṃ bhāveyya satta vassānī’ti hi vacanato sattapi vassāni maggabhāvanā hoti, kilesā pana lahu chijjantā sattahi ñāṇehi chijjantī’’ti vadati. So ‘‘suttaṃ āharā’’ti vattabbo. Addhā aññaṃ apassanto, ‘‘yā tesaṃyeva dhammānaṃ āsevanā bhāvanā bahulīkamma’’nti idameva suttaṃ āharitvā, ‘‘aññena cittena āsevati, aññena bhāveti, aññena bahulīkarotī’’ti vakkhati. Tato vattabbo – ‘‘kiṃ panidaṃ, suttaṃ neyyatthaṃ nītattha’’nti. Tato vakkhati – ‘‘nītatthaṃ yathā suttaṃ tatheva attho’’ti. Tassa idaṃ uttaraṃ – evaṃ sante ekaṃ cittaṃ āsevamānaṃ uppannaṃ, aparampi āsevamānaṃ, aparampi āsevamānanti evaṃ divasampi āsevanāva bhavissati, kuto bhāvanā, kuto bahulīkammaṃ? Ekaṃ vā bhāvayamānaṃ uppannaṃ aparampi bhāvayamānaṃ aparampi bhāvayamānanti evaṃ divasampi bhāvanāva bhavissati, kuto āsevanā kuto bahulīkammaṃ? Ekaṃ vā bahulīkarontaṃ uppannaṃ, aparampi bahulīkarontaṃ, aparampi bahulīkarontanti evaṃ divasampi bahulīkammameva bhavissati kuto āsevanā, kuto bhāvanāti.
或者他也许会说:“以一个心习行,以两个心修习,以三个心多修习。或以两个心习行,以三个心修习,以一个心多修习。再或以三个心习行,以一个心修习,以两个心多修习。”此时应对他说:“莫以为抓住了我的经文,便可随意言语。解答问题者,须亲近师长,通达佛语,了知法味,而后方可开口。这习行唯是一心刹那的,修习唯是一心刹那的,多修习亦唯是一心刹那的。趋向灭尽的出世间道,绝无多心刹那之理,它便是‘唯一心识刹那’的。”应如是令他通达。他若能明了,自是善好;倘若仍不明了,便打发他离开:“去吧,一大清早就去寺院喝粥去吧!”显示巴利原文
Atha vā evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ekena cittena āsevati, dvīhi bhāveti, tīhi bahulīkaroti. Dvīhi vā āsevati, tīhi bhāveti, ekena bahulīkaroti . Tīhi vā āsevati, ekena bhāveti, dvīhi bahulīkarotī’’ti. So vattabbo – ‘‘mā suttaṃ me laddhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā avaca. Pañhaṃ vissajjentena nāma ācariyassa santike vasitvā buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā attharasaṃ viditvā vattabbaṃ hoti. Ekacittakkhaṇikāva ayaṃ āsevanā, ekacittakkhaṇikā bhāvanā, ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ bahulīkammaṃ. Khayagāmilokuttaramaggo bahulacittakkhaṇiko nāma natthi, ‘ekacittakkhaṇikoyevā’ti saññāpetabbo. Sace sañjānāti, sañjānātu, no ce sañjānāti, gaccha pātova vihāraṃ pavisitvā yāguṃ pivāhī’’ti uyyojetabbo.
463 “圣尼,有几种行?”他这样问,是想知道:那些灭去之后才能入灭尽定的行,究竟是哪些?长老尼明白他的意图后,虽然行有多种,如福行等,却直指身行、语行、心行,答道:“贤友,有三种。”其中,系属于身、依身而造作生起的,称为身行。能造作语言、令语言生起的,称为语行。系属于心、依心而造作生起的,称为心行。他又问:“圣尼,那么什么是……”这里又是问什么呢?因为这些行相互掺杂、混淆不清、不明显,而且很难讲清楚。事实正是如此:在身门,经由执取、执持、放下、动作等过程而生起的八种欲界善思、十二种不善思——这二十种善与不善的思,加上出息和入息,都称为身行。在语门,借着下颚的动作、语言的发出而生起的前述二十种思,加上寻和伺,都称为语行。而当一个人身门、语门都没有动作,独自静坐思维时,所生起的善与不善二十九种思,再加上想和受这两种法,则都称为心行。由此可见,这些行相互掺杂、混杂不清、难以明了、很难解说。所以,她正是想通过询问,让这些行变得清晰明了。显示巴利原文
463.Kati panāyye saṅkhārāti idha kiṃ pucchati? Ye saṅkhāre nirodhetvā nirodhaṃ samāpajjati, te pucchissāmīti pucchati. Tenevassa adhippāyaṃ ñatvā therī, puññābhisaṅkhārādīsu anekesu saṅkhāresu vijjamānesupi, kāyasaṅkhārādayova ācikkhantī, tayome, āvusotiādimāha. Tattha kāyapaṭibaddhattā kāyena saṅkharīyati karīyati nibbattīyatīti kāyasaṅkhāro. Vācaṃ saṅkharoti karoti nibbattetīti vacīsaṅkhāro. Cittapaṭibaddhattā cittena saṅkharīyati karīyati nibbattīyatīti cittasaṅkhāro. Katamo panāyyeti idha kiṃ pucchati? Ime saṅkhārā aññamaññamissā āluḷitā avibhūtā duddīpanā. Tathā hi, kāyadvāre ādānagahaṇamuñcanacopanāni pāpetvā uppannā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā dvādasa akusalacetanāti evaṃ kusalākusalā vīsati cetanāpi assāsapassāsāpi kāyasaṅkhārātveva vuccanti. Vacīdvāre hanusaṃcopanaṃ vacībhedaṃ pāpetvā uppannā vuttappakārāva vīsati cetanāpi vitakkavicārāpi vacīsaṅkhārotveva vuccanti. Kāyavacīdvāresu copanaṃ apattā raho nisinnassa cintayato uppannā kusalākusalā ekūnatiṃsa cetanāpi saññā ca vedanā cāti ime dve dhammāpi cittasaṅkhārotveva vuccanti. Evaṃ ime saṅkhārā aññamaññamissā āluḷitā avibhūtā duddīpanā. Te pākaṭe vibhūte katvā kathāpessāmīti pucchati.
“圣尼,为什么……”这里问的是身行等这些名称的具体含义。在回答中,“依属于身”的意思是:以身为依止,有身则有,无身则无。“依属于心”的意思是:以心为依止,有心则有,无心则无。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panāyyeti idha kāyasaṅkhārādināmassa padatthaṃ pucchati. Tassa vissajjane kāyappaṭibaddhāti kāyanissitā, kāye sati honti, asati na honti. Cittappaṭibaddhāti cittanissitā, citte sati honti, asati na honti.
464 现在,为了弄清楚她是运用想受灭定,还是不运用;以及她在其中是纯熟自在,还是不纯熟,便问道:“圣尼,想受灭定是如何证入的?”等等。在她的回答里,以“我将证入”和“我正证入”这两句,说明了非想非非想处定的阶段;而以“已证入”这一句,说明了在灭尽定中的状况。同样地,前面两句说明的是有心的阶段,后面一句说明的是无心的阶段。“事先已如此修习心”的意思是:在进入灭尽定之前,也就是在设定时限的那个时候,他早已修习了这样一个心——“我将保持这么长时间的无心状态”,这就是设定时限的决意心。所谓“它将此人领入如此状态”,即是说:如此修习的心,将那人引入了那样的无心状态。显示巴利原文
464. Idāni kiṃ nu kho esā saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ valañjeti, na valañjeti. Ciṇṇavasī vā tattha no ciṇṇavasīti jānanatthaṃ pucchanto, kathaṃ panāyye, saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpatti hotītiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane samāpajjissanti vā samāpajjāmīti vā padadvayena nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattikālo kathito. Samāpannoti padena antonirodho. Tathā purimehi dvīhi padehi sacittakakālo kathito, pacchimena acittakakālo. Pubbeva tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti nirodhasamāpattito pubbe addhānaparicchedakāleyeva, ettakaṃ kālaṃ acittako bhavissāmīti addhānaparicchedacittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hoti. Yaṃ taṃ tathattāya upanetīti yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ puggalaṃ tathattāya acittakabhāvāya upaneti.
“语行最先灭去”:在诸行之中,语行最先于第二禅那中灭去。“身行其次灭去”:随后,身行于第四禅那中灭去。“心行再后灭去”:再后,心行于灭尽定中灭去。以“我将要出定”“我正在出定”这两句,说明的是灭尽定内的时段;以“已出定”这句,说明的则是果等至的时段。同样,前两句说明无心阶段,最后一句说明有心阶段。“事前已如此修习心”的意思是:在入灭尽定前、设定时限之际,他便已修习了这样的心——“我将保持这么长时间的无心,然后恢复有心”,这便是设定时限的决意心。所谓“它将此人领入如此状态”,即是这个如此修习的心,把那人带入了那样的有心状态。就这样,前文说明的是入灭尽定,此处说明的则是出灭尽定。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati vacīsaṅkhāroti sesasaṅkhārehi paṭhamaṃ dutiyajjhāneyeva nirujjhati. Tato kāyasaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ kāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne nirujjhati. Tato cittasaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ cittasaṅkhāro antonirodhe nirujjhati. Vuṭṭhahissanti vā vuṭṭhahāmīti vā padadvayena antonirodhakālo kathito. Vuṭṭhitoti padena phalasamāpattikālo. Tathā purimehi dvīhi padehi acittakakālo kathito, pacchimena sacittakakālo. Pubbeva tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti nirodhasamāpattito pubbe addhānaparicchedakāleyeva ettakaṃ kālaṃ acittako hutvā tato paraṃ sacittako bhavissāmīti addhānaparicchedacittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hoti. Yaṃ taṃ tathattāya upanetīti yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ puggalaṃ tathattāya sacittakabhāvāya upaneti. Iti heṭṭhā nirodhasamāpajjanakālo gahito, idha nirodhato vuṭṭhānakālo.
为解说灭尽定,此处说“次第”。灭尽定的解说,在《清净道论》中已先列出论母——“因具足两种力量、三种行的止息,依十六种智行、九种定行而得自在的慧,即是灭尽定智”——并以一切行相做了说明。因此,应依彼中所说而理解。那么,什么是“灭尽”?“灭尽”是指通过对四蕴的反观止息,令其不再生起。他们为何入此定?因厌倦诸行的不断转起,心想:“我们将进入七日无心的状态,安住于乐,这称为见法涅槃,也就是所谓的灭尽。”为达此义而入定。显示巴利原文
Idāni nirodhakathaṃ kathetuṃ vāroti nirodhakathā kathetabbā siyā, sā panesā, ‘‘dvīhi balehi samannāgatattā tayo ca saṅkhārānaṃ paṭippassaddhiyā soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi navahi samādhicariyāhi vasībhāvatāpaññā nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇa’’nti mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbākārena visuddhimagge kathitā. Tasmā tattha kathitanayeneva gahetabbā . Ko panāyaṃ nirodho nāma? Catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ paṭisaṅkhā appavatti. Atha kimatthametaṃ samāpajjantīti. Saṅkhārānaṃ pavatte ukkaṇṭhitā sattāhaṃ acittakā hutvā sukhaṃ viharissāma, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ nāmetaṃ, yadidaṃ nirodhoti etadatthaṃ samāpajjanti.
“首先心行生起”:从灭尽定出定的人,首先生起的是果等至心。这里的“心行”即指与果等至心相应的想与受,故说“首先心行生起”。“其次身行生起”:此后,在有分时,身行生起。问:“果等至难道不会引发呼吸吗?”会引发。但此人的果等至属第四禅那境界,那样的果等至不能引发呼吸。又或,不论果等至是初禅那境界,还是第二、第三、第四禅那境界,从寂静等至出定的比丘,其呼吸皆不可察觉。这一不可察觉性,可借由僧祇婆长老的故事来了解。据说僧祇婆长老从等至出定后,踩在如吉苏迦花般已无火焰的木炭上行走,僧衣丝毫未焦,乃至未出现任何热气,人们说这便是等至的功德。同样,从寂静等至出定的比丘,其呼吸不可察觉,应知这是就有分时而说。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃ uppajjati cittasaṅkhāroti nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa hi phalasamāpatticittaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppajjati. Taṃsampayuttaṃ saññañca vedanañca sandhāya, ‘‘paṭhamaṃ uppajjati cittasaṅkhāro’’ti āha. Tato kāyasaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ bhavaṅgasamaye kāyasaṅkhāro uppajjati. Kiṃ pana phalasamāpatti assāsapassāse na samuṭṭhāpetīti? Samuṭṭhāpeti. Imassa pana catutthajjhānikā phalasamāpatti, sā na samuṭṭhāpeti. Kiṃ vā etena phalasamāpatti paṭhamajjhānikā vā hotu, dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānikā vā, santāya samāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa bhikkhuno assāsapassāsā abbohārikā honti. Tesaṃ abbohārikabhāvo sañjīvattheravatthunā veditabbo. Sañjīvattherassa hi samāpattito vuṭṭhāya kiṃsukapupphasadise vītaccitaṅgāre maddamānassa gacchato cīvare aṃsumattampi na jhāyi, usumākāramattampi nāhosi, samāpattiphalaṃ nāmetanti vadanti. Evamevaṃ santāya samāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa bhikkhuno assāsapassāsā abbohārikā hontīti bhavaṅgasamayenevetaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.
“此后,语行生起”是指:此后,在唯作转起的运用之际,语行生起。有人问:“有分能引生寻与伺吗?”能引生。然而,由它生起的寻与伺并不能构成言语。因此,这是就唯作转起的运用之际而说的。关于“空触”等,应从伴随性质和所缘两方面来说明。从伴随性质来说,“空”即果等至,与它一同生起的触,称为“空触”。“无相触”和“无愿触”同理。从所缘来说,涅槃因空于贪等,故称“空”;因无贪等相状,故称“无相”;因无贪等愿求,故称“无愿”。以空之涅槃为所缘而生起的果等至中的触,称为“空触”。无相触和无愿触同理。显示巴利原文
Tato vacīsaṅkhāroti tato paraṃ kiriyamayapavattavaḷañjanakāle vacīsaṅkhāro uppajjati. Kiṃ bhavaṅgaṃ vitakkavicāre na samuṭṭhāpetīti? Samuṭṭhāpeti. Taṃsamuṭṭhānā pana vitakkavicārā vācaṃ abhisaṅkhātuṃ na sakkontīti kiriyamayapavattavaḷañjanakālenevataṃ kathitaṃ. Suññato phassotiādayo saguṇenāpi ārammaṇenāpi kathetabbā. Saguṇena tāva suññatā nāma phalasamāpatti, tāya sahajātaṃ phassaṃ sandhāya suññato phassoti vuttaṃ. Animittāpaṇihitesupieseva nayo. Ārammaṇena pana nibbānaṃ rāgādīhi suññattā suññaṃ nāma, rāganimittādīnaṃ abhāvā animittaṃ, rāgadosamohappaṇidhīnaṃ abhāvā appaṇihitaṃ. Suññataṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannaphalasamāpattiyaṃ phasso suññato nāma. Animittāpaṇihitesupi eseva nayo.
此外,还有一种称为“导向论”的说法。因为“空”“无相”“无愿”这些词也可用来称呼观。在此,若有比丘将诸行把握为无常,依无常而见,依无常而出起,他的导向出起之观便称为“无相”。若把握为苦,依苦而见,依苦而出起,他的观便称为“无愿”。若把握为无我,依无我而见,依无我而出起,他的观便称为“空”。其中,与无相观相应的道称为“无相”,无相道的果称为“无相”。在触及时,与无相果等至同时生起的触正在触及时,便说“无相触正在触及”。无愿和空同理。然而,若仅依导向论来解说,可能会产生“是空触,还是无相触,还是无愿触”这样的分别。因此,应当从伴随性质和所缘两方面来解说。如此,才能与“三个触正在触及”这一说法相符。显示巴利原文
Aparā āgamaniyakathā nāma hoti, suññatā, animittā, appaṇihitāti hi vipassanāpi vuccati. Tattha yo bhikkhu saṅkhāre aniccato pariggahetvā aniccato disvā aniccato vuṭṭhāti, tassa vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā animittā nāma hoti. Yo dukkhato pariggahetvā dukkhato disvā dukkhato vuṭṭhāti, tassa appaṇihitā nāma. Yo anattato pariggahetvā anattato disvā anattato vuṭṭhāti, tassa suññatā nāma. Tattha animittavipassanāya maggo animitto nāma, animittamaggassa phalaṃ animittaṃ nāma. Animittaphalasamāpattisahajāte phasse phusante animitto phasso phusatīti vuccati. Appaṇihitasuññatesupi eseva nayo. Āgamaniyena kathite pana suññato vā phasso animitto vā phasso appaṇihito vā phassoti vikappo āpajjeyya, tasmā saguṇena ceva ārammaṇena ca kathetabbaṃ. Evañhi tayo phassā phusantīti sameti.
在“倾向远离”等词中,涅槃名为“远离”。倾向、低垂于这远离,称为“倾向远离”。从别处而来,朝向远离,如同弯曲一样安住,称为“趣向远离”。如同向远离倾倒一样安住,称为“斜向远离”。显示巴利原文
Vivekaninnantiādīsu nibbānaṃ viveko nāma, tasmiṃ viveke ninnaṃ onatanti vivekaninnaṃ. Aññato āgantvā yena viveko, tena vaṅkaṃ viya hutvā ṭhitanti vivekapoṇaṃ. Yena viveko, tena patamānaṃ viya ṭhitanti vivekapabbhāraṃ.
465 465. 现在,为了询问“止息哪些受之后才进入灭尽定”,便问道:“圣尼,有多少种受?”在“身体方面的”等等表述中,应当知道:经由前五门生起的乐,名为身乐;经由意门生起的,名为心乐。其中,“乐”是说明其自性;“舒适”是揭示其甘美状态的同义词;“感受”则是显示感受状态、通用于一切受的词语。对于其他词类,方法也相同。在“住时为乐、变易为苦”等的说法中,意思是:乐受存在时是乐,不存在时是苦;苦受存在时是苦,不存在时便是乐;不苦不乐受有觉知的状态是乐,无觉知的状态是苦。显示巴利原文
465. Idāni yā vedanā nirodhetvā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, tā pucchissāmīti pucchanto kati panāyye, vedanāti āha. Kāyikaṃ vātiādīsu pañcadvārikaṃ sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ nāma, manodvārikaṃ cetasikaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha sukhanti sabhāvaniddeso. Sātanti tasseva madhurabhāvadīpakaṃ vevacanaṃ. Vedayitanti vedayitabhāvadīpakaṃ, sabbavedanānaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhātiādīsu sukhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo sukhaṃ, natthibhāvo dukkhaṃ. Dukkhāya vedanāya atthibhāvo dukkhaṃ, natthibhāvo sukhaṃ. Adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya jānanabhāvo sukhaṃ, ajānanabhāvo dukkhanti attho.
“何种随眠随增?”意思是问:哪一种随眠在随增?这是以“未断除”之义,如同沉睡一般存在着,以此提出随眠之问。“朋友毗舍佉,并非于一切乐受,贪随眠都会随增”,意即并非于一切乐受贪随眠都随增,并非于一切乐受它都未被断除,也并非缘于一切乐受它都会生起。这一原则通于一切情况。“应断除的是什么?”这是名为“断除之问”的问法。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ anusayo anusetīti katamo anusayo anuseti. Appahīnaṭṭhena sayito viya hotīti anusayapucchaṃ pucchati. Na kho, āvuso visākha, sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetīti na sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anuseti. Na sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya so appahīno, na sabbaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha uppajjatīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Kiṃ pahātabbanti ayaṃ pahānapucchā nāma.
“他以彼断贪”这句话,以一个答案解答了两个问题。在此,比丘先镇伏贪随眠,然后进入初禅。他将那被禅那镇伏的贪随眠,就那样安住在被镇伏的状态,继续修习观并令其增长,最终以不来道彻底断除它。虽然它已被不来道断除,但由于先前曾被镇伏,所以在初禅那里它就不再随增,因此说“在那里贪随眠不再随增”。而“彼处”是指:那个作为依止、具有最上安稳性质的处所——阿拉汉果。如此,在对此被称为无上解脱的阿拉汉果生起希求时:“若生起希求,则因希求而有忧生。”意思是,当一个人确立了愿望之后,以愿望的确立为根源,忧便会生起。然而,实际上这并非直接由愿望的确立为根源而生起,而是因希求之后不能获得,以“得不到”为根源而生起,故说“因希求而生忧”。在这里,虽然忧的果报绝对属于不善法,但据说这种应当亲近的忧是容许的。因为瑜伽行者会采取为期三个月、六个月或九个月的修行道路。那些选定某种修行道后,努力精进,希望在预定时间内证得阿拉汉果的人,如果无法如期证得,就会生起强烈的忧,乃至泪流不止,正如住在阿邻提迦的大普沙长老那样。显示巴利原文
Rāgaṃ tena pajahatīti ettha ekeneva byākaraṇena dve pucchā vissajjesi. Idha bhikkhu rāgānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, jhānavikkhambhitaṃ rāgānusayaṃ tathā vikkhambhitameva katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anāgāmimaggena samugghāteti. So anāgāmimaggena pahīnopi tathā vikkhambhitattāva paṭhamajjhāne nānuseti nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘na tattha rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti. Tadāyatananti taṃ āyatanaṃ, paramassāsabhāvena patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ arahattanti attho. Iti anuttaresūti evaṃ anuttarā vimokkhāti laddhanāme arahatte. Pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayatoti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentassa. Uppajjati pihāpaccayā domanassanti patthanāya paṭṭhapanamūlakaṃ domanassaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ panetaṃ na patthanāya paṭṭhapanamūlakaṃ uppajjati, patthetvā alabhantassa pana alābhamūlakaṃ uppajjamānaṃ, ‘‘uppajjati pihāpaccayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi domanassaṃ nāma ekantena akusalaṃ, idaṃ pana sevitabbaṃ domanassaṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Yogino hi temāsikaṃ chamāsikaṃ vā navamāsikaṃ vā paṭipadaṃ gaṇhanti. Tesu yo taṃ taṃ paṭipadaṃ gahetvā antokālaparicchedeyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇissāmīti ghaṭento vāyamanto na sakkoti yathāparicchinnakālena pāpuṇituṃ, tassa balavadomanassaṃ uppajjati, āḷindikavāsimahāphussadevattherassa viya assudhārā pavattanti. Thero kira ekūnavīsativassāni gatapaccāgatavattaṃ pūresi. Tassa, ‘‘imasmiṃ vāre arahattaṃ gaṇhissāmi, imasmiṃ vāre visuddhipavāraṇaṃ pavāressāmī’’ti mānasaṃ bandhitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontasseva ekūnavīsativassāni atikkantāni. Pavāraṇādivase āgate therassa assupātena muttadivaso nāma nāhosi. Vīsatime pana vasse arahattaṃ pāṇuṇi.
“以嗔断嗔”:此处即是以忧断嗔。因为并不存在以嗔本身断嗔,或以忧断忧这回事。然而,这位比丘于三个月等期限内,取一种修行方法后,如是反思观察:“比丘,你看!你的戒是否有缺漏?抑或精进、智慧有所不足?难道你的戒不是极为清净,精进已善加策励,智慧已锐利地运作了吗?”他如此观察后,以坚固精进决意:“从今以后,我将不再让这种忧生起。”在三个月、六个月或九个月内,以不来道彻底断除它。正是藉由这种方便,才称为“以嗔断嗔,以忧断忧”。显示巴利原文
Paṭighaṃtena pajahatīti ettha domanasseneva paṭighaṃ pajahati. Na hi paṭigheneva paṭighappahānaṃ, domanassena vā domanassappahānaṃ nāma atthi. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu temāsikādīsu aññataraṃ paṭipadaṃ gahetvā iti paṭisañcikkhati – ‘‘passa bhikkhu, kiṃ tuyhaṃ sīlena hīnaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, udāhu vīriyena, udāhu paññāya, nanu te sīlaṃ suparisuddhaṃ vīriyaṃ supaggahitaṃ paññā sūrā hutvā vahatī’’ti. So evaṃ paṭisañcikkhitvā, ‘‘na dāni puna imassa domanassassa uppajjituṃ dassāmī’’ti vīriyaṃ daḷhaṃ katvā antotemāse vā antochamāse vā antonavamāse vā anāgāmimaggena taṃ samugghāteti. Iminā pariyāyena paṭigheneva paṭighaṃ, domanasseneva domanassaṃ pajahati nāma.
“在那里,嗔随眠不随眠”:意谓对于这样的忧,嗔随眠不随眠。它不缘彼而生起,即嗔随眠于彼处已断除之义。“以此断无明”:此处,比丘镇伏无明随眠而入第四禅;那被禅那所镇伏的无明随眠,保持如是镇伏的状态,增长观,以阿罗汉道彻底断除。它虽被阿罗汉道所断,但因先前已被镇伏,故在第四禅中说为不随眠。因此,“在那里,无明随眠不随眠”。显示巴利原文
Na tattha paṭighānusayo anusetīti tattha evarūpe domanasse paṭighānusayo nānuseti. Na taṃ ārabbha uppajjati, pahīnova tattha paṭighānusayoti attho. Avijjaṃ tena pajahatīti idha bhikkhu avijjānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, jhānavikkhambhitaṃ avijjānusayaṃ tathā vikkhambhitameva katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattamaggena samugghāteti. So arahattamaggena pahīnopi tathā vikkhambhitattāva catutthajjhāne nānuseti nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘na tattha avijjānusayo anusetī’’ti.
466 进而,为提出对等反问,他说:“然而,圣尼!以乐……”等。于解答中,由于乐的对立面是苦,苦的对立面是乐,因此对于这两种受,说明了“异分对等”。而舍受如同黑暗,不明显、难以显发,无明亦然,故此处说明了“同分对等”。然而,凡无明制造黑暗之处,明即驱除黑暗,因此也说明了“异分对等”。于“友!无明……”中,此二法皆为无漏、出世间,故唯说“同分对等”。于“友!解脱……”中,从无漏义、出世间义以及无记义而言,亦唯说“同分对等”。“已超逾”意指已超越问题而去。“未能取得问题的边际”:意为无法把握问题的界限与量度,你去问了无对等之法的对等。“这即是涅槃”,它无对等,不可能以“青、黄”等任何法施设对等来显示。你正是怀着此意而问,这便是其含义。显示巴利原文
466. Idāni paṭibhāgapucchaṃ pucchanto sukhāya panāyyetiādimāha. Tassa vissajjane yasmā sukhassa dukkhaṃ, dukkhassa ca sukhaṃ paccanīkaṃ, tasmā dvīsu vedanāsu visabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito. Upekkhā pana andhakārā avibhūtā duddīpanā, avijjāpi tādisāvāti tenettha sabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito. Yattakesu pana ṭhānesu avijjā tamaṃ karoti, tattakesu vijjā tamaṃ vinodetīti visabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito. Avijjāya kho, āvusoti ettha ubhopete dhammā anāsavā lokuttarāti sabhāgapaṭibhāgova kathito. Vimuttiyā kho, āvusoti ettha anāsavaṭṭhena lokuttaraṭṭhena abyākataṭṭhena ca sabhāgapaṭibhāgova kathito. Accayāsīti ettha pañhaṃ atikkamitvā gatosīti attho. Nāsakkhi pañhānaṃ pariyantaṃ gahetunti pañhānaṃ paricchedapamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ nāsakkhi, appaṭibhāgadhammassa paṭibhāgaṃ pucchi. Nibbānaṃ nāmetaṃ appaṭibhāgaṃ , na sakkā nīlaṃ vā pītakaṃ vāti kenaci dhammena saddhiṃ paṭibhāgaṃ katvā dassetuṃ. Tañca tvaṃ iminā adhippāyena pucchasīti attho.
至此,这位优婆塞应这样理解:如同一位比丘在七家得到筹食,离去后越过七家,站在第八家门口,却全然不知已经错过了所有七家;同样,此人询问无对比之法的对比,便在全部七个有对比的问题上都错失了。「入涅槃」:即进入涅槃的内涵,融入涅槃。「以涅槃为彼岸」:指以涅槃为最上归趣,其归趣至高无上,不由此处更趣他处,这便是它的含义。「以涅槃为最终」:指涅槃是它的终点与归宿。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā cāyaṃ upāsako yathā nāma sattame ghare salākabhattaṃ labhitvā gato bhikkhu satta gharāni atikkamma aṭṭhamassa dvāre ṭhito sabbānipi satta gehāni viraddhova na aññāsi, evamevaṃ appaṭibhāgadhammassa paṭibhāgaṃ pucchanto sabbāsupi sattasu sappaṭibhāgapucchāsu viraddhova hotīti veditabbo. Nibbānogadhanti nibbānabbhantaraṃ nibbānaṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Nibbānaparāyananti nibbānaṃ paraṃ ayanamassa parā gati, na tato paraṃ gacchatīti attho. Nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṃ avasānaṃ assāti nibbānapariyosānaṃ.
467 「具慧者」:指具足慧,善巧于界、善巧于处、善巧于缘起、善巧于处非处。「大慧者」:指具备能把握大利益、大法义、大语词、大辩才的智慧。正如法乐比丘尼所解说,我也同样会那样解说。至此,这部经便成为「佛所说」,不再是声闻所说。犹如大臣所拟的文书,在未加盖国王印章时,不得称为「国王的文书」;一旦加盖印章,便成为国王的文书。同样的,由于「我也同样会那样解说」这一句佛语的印章已经盖上,此经即由世尊亲口印可而成为佛所说。其余各处,义理均很明了。显示巴利原文
467.Paṇḍitāti paṇḍiccena samannāgatā, dhātukusalā āyatanakusalā paṭiccasamuppādakusalā ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalāti attho. Mahāpaññāti mahante atthe mahante dhamme mahantā niruttiyo mahantāni paṭibhānāni pariggaṇhanasamatthāya paññāya samannāgatā. Yathā taṃ dhammadinnāyāti yathā dhammadinnāya bhikkhuniyā byākataṃ, ahampi taṃ evamevaṃ byākareyyanti. Ettāvatā ca pana ayaṃ suttanto jinabhāsito nāma jāto, na sāvakabhāsito. Yathā hi rājayuttehi likhitaṃ paṇṇaṃ yāva rājamuddikāya na lañchitaṃ hoti, na tāva rājapaṇṇanti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati; lañchitamattaṃ pana rājapaṇṇaṃ nāma hoti, tathā, ‘‘ahampi taṃ evameva byākareyya’’nti imāya jinavacanamuddikāya lañchitattā ayaṃ suttanto āhaccavacanena jinabhāsito nāma jāto. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
五、小法受持经释义显示巴利原文
5. Cūḷadhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
468 「如是我闻」这部经是《小法受持经》。其中,「法受持」指所执取的法。「现世乐」指当下的乐,在造业积聚的刹那,是乐、易于行持、能快乐地完成。「未来苦果」指在未来果报成熟时带来痛苦的果报。依此方法,应理解一切词句的涵义。显示巴利原文
468.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷadhammasamādānasuttaṃ. Tattha dhammasamādānānīti dhammoti gahitagahaṇāni. Paccuppannasukhanti paccuppanne sukhaṃ, āyūhanakkhaṇe sukhaṃ sukaraṃ sukhena sakkā pūretuṃ. Āyatiṃ dukkhavipākanti anāgate vipākakāle dukkhavipākaṃ. Iminā upāyena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
469 “于欲无过失”,是指在事欲与烦恼欲中都无过失。“陷入可饮性”,意思是他们因烦恼欲而对事欲陷入可饮、可食的状态,即随心所欲地受用。“结髻者”,指将头发盘结成髻之人。“女出家者”,指出家修苦行的女性。她们这样说:她们宣说遍知,也就是宣说舍断与超越。“摩卢瓦种子荚”,是一种长条形的摩卢瓦果实。它会裂开,是因为日晒干枯而绽裂。“在沙罗树根”,就是在沙罗树的根部。天神因此心生恐惧,为何呢?因为害怕住处被毁。原来,落在树根的摩卢瓦种子会生出藤蔓,攀绕上树。这种藤蔓叶片宽大又繁多,形似黑檀叶。接着,它从树根开始缠绕那棵树,覆盖所有枝丫,形成巨大重压。当风吹或雨打时,它便汇聚成一股洪流般的力量,将那棵树所有的大小枝丫全部折断,令树倒地。于是,依托于那棵树上的天宫便随之破裂、坏灭。天神正是因住处被毁的恐惧而心生怖畏。显示巴利原文
469.Natthi kāmesu dosoti vatthukāmesupi kilesakāmesupi doso natthi. Pātabyataṃ āpajjantīti te vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena pātabyataṃ pivitabbataṃ, yathāruci paribhuñjitabbataṃ āpajjantīti attho. Moḷibaddhāhīti moḷiṃ katvā baddhakesāhi. Paribbājikāhīti tāpasaparibbājikāhi. Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Pariññaṃ paññapentīti pahānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapenti. Māluvāsipāṭikāti dīghasaṇṭhānaṃ māluvāpakkaṃ. Phaleyyāti ātapena sussitvā bhijjeyya. Sālamūleti sālarukkhassa samīpe. Santāsaṃ āpajjeyyāti kasmā āpajjati? Bhavanavināsabhayā. Rukkhamūle patitamāluvābījato hi latā uppajjitvā rukkhaṃ abhiruhati. Sā mahāpattā ceva hoti bahupattā ca, koviḷārapattasadisehi pattehi samannāgatā. Atha taṃ rukkhaṃ mūlato paṭṭhāya vinandhamānā sabbaviṭapāni sañchādetvā mahantaṃ bhāraṃ janetvā tiṭṭhati. Sā vāte vā vāyante deve vā vassante oghanaṃ janetvā tassa rukkhassa sabbasākhāpasākhaṃ bhañjati, bhūmiyaṃ nipāteti. Tato tasmiṃ rukkhe patiṭṭhitavimānaṃ bhijjati nassati. Iti sā bhavanavināsabhayā santāsaṃ āpajjati.
“园天”,指居住于各处花苑、果园中的天神。“林天”,指居住于盲林、善吉林等森林中的天神。“树天”,指居住于特征显著的那勒鲁树、穆钦陀树等树木上的天神。“住于药草、草类与林主树中”的天神,即指住在诃梨勒、余甘子等药草上,住在棕榈、椰子等草类植物上,以及住在林中最年长大树上的天神。“林中工作者”,指在森林中以耕作、割草、采薪、牧牛等任何一种工作维生而四处走动的人。“令拔出”,意思是咀嚼它们。“悬垂者”,指藤蔓像在被风吹打之处嬉戏一般,悬垂摇摆。而“此是乐”的意思是:与这种摩卢瓦藤蔓接触是快乐的,看见它也是快乐的。那位天神因见触藤蔓而生起喜悦,于是这样说:“这将成为我孩子们的饮水之处,将成为他们的游戏之场,我又得到了第二个天宫啊!”显示巴利原文
Ārāmadevatāti tattha tattha pupphārāmaphalārāmesu adhivatthā devatā. Vanadevatāti andhavanasubhagavanādīsu vanesu adhivatthā devatā. Rukkhadevatāti abhilakkhitesu naḷerupucimandādīsu rukkhesu adhivatthā devatā. Osadhitiṇavanappatīsūti harītakīāmalakīādīsu osadhīsu tālanāḷikerādīsu tiṇesu vanajeṭṭhakesu ca vanappatirukkhesu adhivatthā devatā. Vanakammikāti vane kasanalāyanadāruāharaṇagorakkhādīsu kenacideva kammena vā vicarakamanussā. Uddhareyyunti khādeyyuṃ. Vilambinīti vātena pahatapahataṭṭhānesu keḷiṃ karontī viya vilambantī. Sukho imissāti evarūpāya māluvālatāya samphassopi sukho, dassanampi sukhaṃ. Ayaṃ me dārakānaṃ āpānamaṇḍalaṃ bhavissati, kīḷābhūmi bhavissati, dutiyaṃ me vimānaṃ paṭiladdhanti latāya dassanepi samphassepi somanassajātā evamāha.
“应作华盖”,指藤蔓在枝条上方如伞盖般铺展。“应生稠密”,指在下方形成浓密一团。它向上攀爬,将整棵树缠绕起来,然后再向下垂落,触到地面,就是这个意思。“应令破裂”,是指它先形成那样浓密的一团,然后从那里开始,藉着那些垂至根部的枝条向上攀爬,缠绕所有枝条,到达树顶后,又以同样的方式下来再上去,把整棵树紧紧缠裹、覆盖严实,将所有树枝都压在下面,自己反而处在最上方。这样,当风吹起或下雨时,它便会破裂,即折断之意。于是树便只剩下一截树桩。本来依附于树枝的天宫,在树枝被折断时,各处皆碎,等到所有树枝都断落,整个天宫便彻底毁坏。但是,如果是依托在树桩上的天宫,只要树根还在,它就不会毁灭。而这座天宫是依托在树枝上的,所以当所有树枝都碎裂时,天宫也就毁了。那位天神怀抱幼子,立于树桩之上,开始悲泣。显示巴利原文
Viṭabhiṃ kareyyāti sākhānaṃ upari chattākārena tiṭṭheyya. Oghanaṃ janeyyāti heṭṭhā ghanaṃ janeyya. Upari āruyha sakalaṃ rukkhaṃ paliveṭhetvā puna heṭṭhā bhassamānā bhūmiṃ gaṇheyyāti attho. Padāleyyāti evaṃ oghanaṃ katvā puna tato paṭṭhāya yāva mūlā otiṇṇasākhāhi abhiruhamānā sabbasākhā paliveṭhentī matthakaṃ patvā teneva niyāmena puna orohitvā ca abhiruhitvā ca sakalarukkhaṃ saṃsibbitvā ajjhottharantī sabbasākhā heṭṭhā katvā sayaṃ upari ṭhatvā vāte vā vāyante deve vā vassante padāleyya. Bhindeyyāti attho. Khāṇumattameva tiṭṭheyya, tattha yaṃ sākhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ hoti, taṃ sākhāsu bhijjamānāsu tattha tattheva bhijjitvā sabbasākhāsu bhinnāsu sabbaṃ bhijjati. Rukkhaṭṭhakavimānaṃ pana yāva rukkhassa mūlamattampi tiṭṭhati, tāva na nassati. Idaṃ pana vimānaṃ sākhaṭṭhakaṃ, tasmā sabbasākhāsu saṃbhijjamānāsu bhijjittha. Devatā puttake gahetvā khāṇuke ṭhitā paridevituṃ āraddhā.
471 「强贪种子者」指贪欲本性特别厚重的人。他由贪欲而感受苦忧:由于贪欲强烈,他对任何看到的所缘都执取相;于是,他的亲教师与戒师便令对他施以处罚。他屡受处罚,因而感受苦忧,即便如此也绝不违犯戒律。「强嗔种子者」则因微不足道的小事便发怒,甚至与年幼的沙弥互相拉手拉扯般地说话;他也因受处罚而感受苦忧。「痴种子者」对已做或未做之事都不关心,种种应为的义务全被耽误;他也因受处罚而感受苦忧。显示巴利原文
471.Tibbarāgajātikoti bahalarāgasabhāvo. Rāgajaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti tibbarāgajātikattā diṭṭhe diṭṭhe ārammaṇe nimittaṃ gaṇhāti. Athassa ācariyupajjhāyā daṇḍakammaṃ āṇāpenti. So abhikkhaṇaṃ daṇḍakammaṃ karonto dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, natveva vītikkamaṃ karoti. Tibbadosajātikoti appamattikeneva kuppati, daharasāmaṇerehi saddhiṃ hatthaparāmāsādīni karontova katheti. Sopi daṇḍakammapaccayā dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Mohajātiko pana idha kataṃ vā katato akataṃ vā akatato na sallakkheti, tāni tāni kiccāni virādheti. Sopi daṇḍakammapaccayā dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti.
472 「非强贪种子者」等类别,应依与前述相反的规律来理解。为什么这里有的人会成为强贪等种子者,有的人却成为非强贪等种子者呢?这是由业力决定的。因为在造业的刹那,如果某人的贪心所力量强,无贪心所力量弱;而无嗔、无痴心所力量强,嗔、痴心所力量弱,那么力量弱小的无贪便无法制服贪,而力量强大的无嗔、无痴却能制服嗔和痴。由此,依这种业所赋予的结生,他投生后便成为一个贪欲者,习性乐求安乐,不嗔恚,具足智慧,拥有金刚喻智。显示巴利原文
472.Na tibbarāgajātikotiādīni vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbāni. Kasmā panettha koci tibbarāgādijātiko hoti, koci na tibbarāgādijātiko? Kammaniyāmena. Yassa hi kammāyūhanakkhaṇe lobho balavā hoti, alobho mando, adosāmohā balavanto, dosamohā mandā, tassa mando alobho lobhaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti, adosāmohā pana balavanto dosamohe pariyādātuṃ sakkonti. Tasmā so tena kammena dinnapaṭisandhivasena nibbatto luddho hoti, sukhasīlo akkodhano paññavā vajirūpamañāṇo.
若在造业的刹那,贪与嗔的力量强,无贪与无嗔的力量弱,而无痴的力量强,痴的力量弱,则依前述之理,他既是贪欲者,又是嗔恚者,但却具有智慧,具足金刚喻智,犹如达陀巴耶长老。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe lobhadosā balavanto honti, alobhādosā mandā, amoho balavā, moho mando, so purimanayeneva luddho ceva hoti duṭṭho ca, paññavā pana hoti vajirūpamañāṇo dattābhayatthero viya.
若在造业刹那,贪、无嗔、痴三者力强,而无贪、嗔、无痴则弱,则如前说,此人既贪又钝,然性好安乐,且不嗔恚。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe lobhādosamohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva luddho ceva hoti dandho ca, sukhasīlako pana hoti akkodhano.
同样,若在造业刹那,贪、嗔、痴三者皆强,无贪等善法则弱,则如前说,此人既贪、又嗔、且痴。显示巴利原文
Tathā yassa kammāyūhanakkhaṇe tayopi lobhadosamohā balavanto honti, alobhādayo mandā, so purimanayeneva luddho ceva hoti duṭṭho ca mūḷho ca.
然而,若在造业刹那,无贪、嗔、痴三者势强,而贪、无嗔、无痴则弱,则如前说,此人烦恼微薄,纵见天界所缘,心亦不为所动,但他是嗔怒者,且智慧迟钝。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe alobhadosamohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva appakileso hoti, dibbārammaṇampi disvā niccalo, duṭṭho pana hoti dandhapañño ca.
然而,若在造业的那一刹那,无贪、无嗔、无痴这三法势力强盛,其余心所则微弱,那么依前述之理,此人便无贪且性好安乐,但却是愚痴的。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe alobhādosamohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva aluddho ceva hoti sukhasīlako ca, mūḷho pana hoti.
同样,若在造业的那一刹那,无贪、无嗔、无痴这三法势力强盛,其余心所则微弱,那么依前述之理,此人便无贪而有智慧,但却心怀嗔恚、易于发怒。显示巴利原文
Tathā yassa kammāyūhanakkhaṇe alobhadosāmohā balavanto honti, itare mandā, so purimanayeneva aluddho ceva hoti paññavā ca, duṭṭho pana hoti kodhano.
若有一人,在造业刹那,无贪、无嗔、无痴三法强而有力,贪、嗔、痴等法则微弱,他便如摩诃僧伽护长老一般,成为不贪、不嗔、具足智慧之人。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana kammāyūhanakkhaṇe tayopi alobhādayo balavanto honti, lobhādayo mandā, so mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero viya aluddho aduṭṭho paññavā ca hoti.
其余各处,其义易明。显示巴利原文
Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
《破除戏论》(Papañcasūdanī)——《中部》的注疏书显示巴利原文
Papañcasūdaniyā majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya
6. 对《大法受持经》的解释显示巴利原文
6. Mahādhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
473 473. “如是我闻”等,即《大法受持经》。其中,“有如是欲者”,指有这样的意愿;“有如是希求者”,指有这样的志向;“有如是意图者”,指有这样的见解。“在那里”,是指于不可爱之事增长、可爱之事减损之处。“以世尊为根本”:意为世尊是这些法的根本,故称“以世尊为根本”。这是说:尊者!这些法,往昔是由迦叶正自觉者为我们生起的。当他般涅槃后,经过一尊佛的间隔,其他任何沙门或婆罗门皆无力令这些法生起。然而,这些法是由世尊为我们生起的。我们正是依于世尊,才了知、通达这些法,所以说:“尊者!我们的这些法,以世尊为根本。”“以世尊为导引”:世尊是诸法的引导者、调御者、随顺引导者。那些依各自真实相状被分别安立、开显的法,即称为“以世尊为导引”。“以世尊为皈依”:四地的诸法,于一切知智的境界中显现显示巴利原文
473.Evaṃme suttanti mahādhammasamādānasuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃkāmāti evaṃicchā. Evaṃchandāti evaṃajjhāsayā. Evaṃadhippāyāti evaṃladdhikā. Tatrāti tasmiṃ aniṭṭhavaḍḍhane ceva iṭṭhaparihāne ca. Bhagavaṃmūlakāti bhagavā mūlaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃmūlakā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime, bhante, amhākaṃ dhammā pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhena uppāditā, tasmiṃ parinibbute ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ime dhamme uppādetuṃ samattho nāma nāhosi, bhagavatā pana no ime dhammā uppāditā. Bhagavantañhi nissāya mayaṃ ime dhamme ājānāma paṭivijjhāmāti evaṃ bhagavaṃmūlakā no, bhante, dhammāti. Bhagavaṃnettikāti bhagavā hi dhammānaṃ netā vinetā anunetāti. Yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā dassitā dhammā bhagavaṃnettikā nāma honti. Bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇāti catubhūmakā dhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchamānā bhagavati paṭisaranti nāmāti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭisarantīti osaranti samosaranti. Apica mahābodhimaṇḍe nisinnassa bhagavato paṭivedhavasena phasso āgacchati, ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāmoti? Tvaṃ phusanaṭṭhena phasso nāma. Vedanā, saññā, saṅkhārā, viññāṇaṃ āgacchati. Ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāmanti? Tvaṃ vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubhūmakadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhanto bhagavā dhamme paṭisaratītipi bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Bhagavantaññeva paṭibhātūti bhagavatoyeva etassa bhāsitassa attho upaṭṭhātu, tumheyeva no kathetvā dethāti attho.
474 474. “应亲近依托者”,指应当依止的对象。“应敬奉者”,指应当前往亲近的对象。“如同面对无智者那样”:即如同面对无智之人,也就是面对愚人、盲目的凡夫那样。“如同面对智者那样”:即如同面对有智之人,也就是面对具慧的贤士那样。显示巴利原文
474.Sevitabbeti nissayitabbe. Bhajitabbeti upagantabbe. Yathā taṃ aviddasunoti yathā aviduno bālassa andhaputhujjanassa. Yathā taṃ viddasunoti yathā viduno medhāvino paṇḍitassa.
475 475. “比丘们,有法之受持”(atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānaṃ)——在前一部经中,导师是按次第安立论母的;而在此处,导师则随顺法的味力来安立论母。其中,“法受持”(dhammasamādāna),是指对杀生等法的执取。显示巴利原文
475.Atthi, bhikkhave, dhammasamādānanti purimasutte uppaṭipāṭiākārena mātikā ṭhapitā , idha pana yathādhammaraseneva satthā mātikaṃ ṭhapesi. Tattha dhammasamādānanti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ gahaṇaṃ.
476 476. “具无明者”(avijjāgato),即具足无明的人。显示巴利原文
476.Avijjāgatoti avijjāya samannāgato.
477 477. “具明者”(vijjāgato),即具足明、具足智慧的人。显示巴利原文
477.Vijjāgatoti vijjāya samannāgato paññavā.
478 478. 于“与苦俱”一句中,此处的邪行、贪欲、邪见三者,依前思心所与后思心所两种思心所之力,生起苦受。而决定思心所则或与乐俱行,或与舍俱行。其余杀生等七法,依三种思心所之力,皆生起苦受。这是针对此而说:“亦与苦俱,亦与忧俱。”在此,忧即应理解为苦。或复有人,于遍求的前行与完成阶段,身苦亦同此理。显示巴利原文
478.Sahāpi dukkhenāti ettha micchācāro abhijjhā micchādiṭṭhīti ime tāva tayo pubbacetanāya ca aparacetanāya cāti dvinnaṃ cetanānaṃ vasena dukkhavedanā honti. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana sukhasampayuttā vā upekkhāsampayuttā vā hoti. Sesā pāṇātipātādayo satta tissannampi cetanānaṃ vasena dukkhavedanā honti. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassenā’’ti. Domanassameva cettha dukkhanti veditabbaṃ. Pariyeṭṭhiṃ vā āpajjantassa pubbabhāgaparabhāgesu kāyikaṃ dukkhampi vaṭṭatiyeva.
479 479. 于“与乐俱”一句中,此处的杀生、粗恶语、嗔恨三者,依前思心所与后思心所两种思心所之力,生起乐受。而决定思心所则必定与苦俱行。其余七法,依三种思心所之力,皆必定生起乐受。于“与喜悦俱”一句中,此处的喜悦即应理解为乐。或者,对具足可爱触境者,在其前行与完成阶段,身乐同样适用。显示巴利原文
479.Sahāpisukhenāti ettha pāṇātipāto pharusavācā byāpādoti ime tāva tayo pubbacetanāya ca aparacetanāya cāti dvinnaṃ cetanānaṃ vasena sukhavedanā honti. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana dukkhasampayuttāva hoti. Sesā satta tissannampi cetanānaṃ vasena sukhavedanā hontiyeva. Sahāpi somanassenāti somanassameva cettha sukhanti veditabbaṃ. Iṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbasamaṅgino vā pubbabhāgaparabhāgesu kāyikaṃ sukhampi vaṭṭatiyeva.
480 480. 第三种法的受持:于此处,有一类人为渔夫或猎鹿者,唯依杀生而活。有位值得尊重的比丘,虽其并不情愿,仍为他开示杀生的过患及远离杀生的功德,然后授与学处。他受持之时,亦带着痛苦与忧恼而受。此后,纵经数日,当他无力守护时,仍感痛苦。他的前思心所与后思心所皆与苦相伴,而决定思心所则或与乐相伴,或与舍相伴。一切处皆应如此了知。因此,这段话正是专就前行与完成阶段的思心所而说:“也与苦相伴,也与忧相伴。”在此,忧应理解为苦。显示巴利原文
480. Tatiyadhammasamādāne idhekacco macchabandho vā hoti, māgaviko vā, pāṇupaghātaṃyeva nissāya jīvikaṃ kappeti. Tassa garuṭṭhāniyo bhikkhu akāmakasseva pāṇātipāte ādīnavaṃ, pāṇātipātaviratiyā ca ānisaṃsaṃ kathetvā sikkhāpadaṃ deti. So gaṇhantopi dukkhito domanassitova hutvā gaṇhāti. Aparabhāge katipāhaṃ vītināmetvā rakkhituṃ asakkontopi dukkhitova hoti, tassa pubbāparacetanā dukkhasahagatāva honti. Sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana sukhasahagatā vā upekkhāsahagatā vāti evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo . Iti pubbabhāgaparabhāgacetanāva sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘sahāpi dukkhena sahāpi domanassenā’’ti. Domanassameva cettha dukkhanti veditabbaṃ.
481 就第四法的受持而言,在十个场合中,三类前行、完成与令生起的思心所,都必定伴随着乐。正是依此而说:“既伴随着乐,也伴随着喜悦”。在此,“喜悦”应知即是“乐”。显示巴利原文
481. Catutthadhammasamādāne dasasupi padesu tissopi pubbabhāgāparabhāgasanniṭṭhāpakacetanā sukhasampayuttā hontiyeva, taṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘sahāpi sukhena sahāpi somanassenā’’ti. Somanassameva cettha sukhanti veditabbaṃ.
482 “苦味的葫芦”指有苦味的葫芦。“与毒混合”指与哈拉哈拉毒相混合、掺杂、搅和在一起。“不会令人欢喜”指不会令人喜爱,不会令人产生喜悦。“你会遭遇”指你将经历此事。而“若不加思择便饮”是指对此不作省察便饮下。显示巴利原文
482.Tittakālābūti tittakarasaalābu. Visena saṃsaṭṭhoti halāhalavisena sampayutto missito luḷito. Nacchādessatīti na ruccissati na tuṭṭhiṃ karissati. Nigacchasīti gamissasi. Appaṭisaṅkhāya piveyyāti taṃ appaccavekkhitvā piveyya.
483 “饮料杯”指盛满了甘甜饮料的杯子。“颜色具足”指由于饮料的颜色等而色泽美好;因杯中盛有饮料,此杯便被如此称呼。“将令人欢喜”是指它能带来欢喜:因为那哈拉哈拉毒无论放到何处,都会赋予该物原有的味道,所以说“将令人欢喜”。显示巴利原文
483.Āpānīyakaṃsoti āpānīyassa madhurapānakassa bharitakaṃso. Vaṇṇasampannoti pānakavaṇṇādīhi sampannavaṇṇo, kaṃse pakkhittapānakavasena pānakakaṃsopi evaṃ vutto. Chādessatīti tañhi halāhalavisaṃ yattha yattha pakkhittaṃ hoti, tassa tasseva rasaṃ deti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘chādessatī’’ti.
484 「腐尿」即指尿液。犹如人身虽具金色,仍被称为“腐身”;当日新生的藤蔓,亦被称为“腐藤”。同样,刚排出的新鲜尿液,便是“腐尿”。「以种种药」是指以诃子、余甘子等种种药物。「他会快乐」是指他会无病、身现金色、得享安乐。显示巴利原文
484.Pūtimuttanti muttameva. Yathā hi manussabhāvo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo pūtikāyotveva, tadahujātāpi galocilatā pūtilatātveva vuccati. Evaṃ taṅkhaṇaṃ gahitaṃ taruṇampi muttaṃ pūtimuttameva. Nānābhesajjehīti harītakāmalakādīhi nānosadhehi. Sukhī assāti arogo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo sukhī bhaveyya.
485 「酪与蜜」:极为清净的酪与极为甜美的蜜。「混合为一」:合在一处,掺和、搅匀。「它的」:指他饮用此四甜药时会喜欢它。然而,那种混杂胆汁的血液,此药于彼不起作用;它会使食物凝结,阻塞通道。而那种混有胆汁的血液,此药正好是它的清凉之剂。显示巴利原文
485.Dadhi ca madhu cāti suparisuddhaṃ dadhi ca sumadhuraṃ madhu ca. Ekajjhaṃ saṃsaṭṭhanti ekato katvā missitaṃ āluḷitaṃ. Tassa tanti tassa taṃ catumadhurabhesajjaṃ pivato rucceyya. Idañca yaṃ bhagandarasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ pakkhandati, na tassa bhesajjaṃ, āhāraṃ thambhetvā maggaṃ avalañjaṃ karoti. Yaṃ pana pittasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ, tassetaṃ bhesajjaṃ sītalakiriyāya pariyattabhūtaṃ.
486 「于晴朗」:指极为晴朗。「乌云消散已远离」正是此意。「乌云已消散」指乌云离去,(deve)指天空。「其处于虚空之黑暗」:指遍布虚空的黑暗。「普广沙门婆罗门外道之说」:在众多所谓沙门婆罗门的其他外道之说中。「已超越」:已胜伏、超越。「照耀、炙热、放光」:犹如秋季正午时分,太阳朗照、灼热、闪耀。显示巴利原文
486.Viddheti ubbiddhe. Meghavigamena dūrībhūteti attho. Vigatavalāhaketi apagatameghe, deveti ākāse. Ākāsagataṃ tamagatanti ākāsagataṃ tamaṃ. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇaparappavādeti puthūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇasaṅkhātānaṃ paresaṃ vāde. Abhivihaccāti abhihantvā. Bhāsate ca tapate ca virocate cāti saradakāle majjhanhikasamaye ādiccova obhāsaṃ muñcati tapati vijjotatīti.
这部经特别受天神们的喜爱与称心。在此有一则因缘:据说,在南方象养国,有一座名为桑喀拉瓦寺的寺院。在斋堂门口,寄居在桑喀拉瓦树上的天神,于夜间听见一位年少比丘以吟诵调诵出此经后,发出了善哉声。年少比丘问:“这是什么声音?”天神答:“尊者,是我,寄住在这棵树上的天神。”“天神,你对什么感到欢喜?是对音声,还是对经文?”“尊者,音声是谁都有的。我欢喜的是经文。世尊在祇园坐着宣说的那天,与今天所说,连一个音节都没有差别。”“天神,世尊讲经那天,你也听到了吗?”“是的,尊者。”“你当时站在何处听受?”“尊者,我去了祇园,但因有大威德的天神们前来,我未能得到位置,便站在这儿听了。”“站在这里能听清音声吗?”“那么,尊者,您能听到我的声音吗?”“听得到,天神。”“尊者,感觉就像坐我耳边说话一般。”“天神,那你见到世尊的容貌了吗?”“尊者,我心想‘世尊正注视着我呢’,便站不住了。”“天神,那你未能证获更高的殊胜吗?”天神即刻在那里消隐。据说,就在那一天,这位天子证得了入流果。如是,显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ devatānaṃ ativiya piyaṃ manāpaṃ. Tatridaṃ vatthu – dakkhiṇadisāyaṃ kira hatthibhogajanapade saṅgaravihāro nāma atthi. Tassa bhojanasāladvāre saṅgararukkhe adhivatthā devatā rattibhāge ekassa daharassa sarabhaññavasena idaṃ suttaṃ osārentassa sutvā sādhukāraṃ adāsi. Daharo kiṃ esoti āha. Ahaṃ, bhante, imasmiṃ rukkhe adhivatthā devatāti. Kasmiṃ devate pasannāsi, kiṃ sadde, udāhu sutteti? Saddo nāma, bhante, yassa kassaci hotiyeva, sutte pasannāmhi. Satthārā jetavane nisīditvā kathitadivase ca ajja ca ekabyañjanepi nānaṃ natthīti. Assosi tvaṃ devate satthārā kathitadivaseti? Āma, bhante. Kattha ṭhitā assosīti? Jetavanaṃ, bhante, gatāmhi, mahesakkhāsu pana devatāsu āgacchantīsu tattha okāsaṃ alabhitvā idheva ṭhatvā assosinti. Ettha ṭhitāya sakkā sutthu saddo sotunti? Tvaṃ pana, bhante, mayhaṃ saddaṃ suṇasīti? Āma devateti. Dakkhiṇakaṇṇapasse nisīditvā kathanakālo viya, bhante, hotīti. Kiṃ pana devate satthu rūpaṃ passasīti? Satthā mameva oloketīti maññamānā saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkomi, bhanteti. Visesaṃ pana nibbattetuṃ asakkhittha devateti. Devatā tattheva antaradhāyi. Taṃ divasaṃ kiresa devaputto sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhito. Evamidaṃ suttaṃ devatānaṃ piyaṃ manāpaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
第七、对《审察经》的解释。显示巴利原文
7. Vīmaṃsakasuttavaṇṇanā
487 “如是我闻”(Evaṃ me sutan ti)指的是《审察经》。在这里,“审察者”(vīmaṃsakenāti)这个词有三种:义理审察者(atthavīmaṃsaka)、行审察者(saṅkhāravīmaṃsaka)和导师审察者(satthuvīmaṃsaka)。其中,义理审察者出现在这句经文里:“贤友们,智者们是审察者”(paṇḍitā hāvuso, manussā vīmaṃsakā,《相应部·3.2》)。行审察者出现在这里:“阿难,当一位比丘确实精通界、精通处、精通缘起、精通处与非处,阿难,到这种程度,就完全可以把那位明智的比丘称为‘审察者’”(Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hoti, āyatanakusalo ca hoti, paṭiccasamuppādakusalo ca hoti, ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalo ca hoti, ettāvatā kho, ānanda, paṇḍito bhikkhu vīmaṃsakoti alaṃ vacanāyā,《中部》3.124)。而在这部经里,指的是导师审察者。“心差别”(cetopariyāya)就是指心的种类、心的判定。“审察”(samannesanā)就是指寻求、全面寻求、考察。“如是了知”(iti viññāṇāya)意思是:为了这样去认知。显示巴利原文
487.Evaṃme sutanti vīmaṃsakasuttaṃ. Tattha vīmaṃsakenāti tayo vīmaṃsakā – atthavīmaṃsako saṅkhāravīmaṃsako satthuvīmaṃsakoti. Tesu, ‘‘paṇḍitā hāvuso, manussā vīmaṃsakā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.2) ettha atthavīmaṃsako āgato. ‘‘Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hoti, āyatanakusalo ca hoti, paṭiccasamuppādakusalo ca hoti, ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalo ca hoti, ettāvatā kho, ānanda, paṇḍito bhikkhu vīmaṃsakoti alaṃ vacanāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.124) ettha saṅkhāravīmaṃsako āgato. Imasmiṃ pana sutte satthuvīmaṃsako adhippeto. Cetopariyāyanti cittavāraṃ cittaparicchedaṃ. Samannesanāti esanā pariyesanā upaparikkhā. Iti viññāṇāyāti evaṃ vijānanatthāya.
488 在“于两种法上应当审察如来”这句话里,这里指出了善知识的支持作用。因为善知识的支持确实巨大,这个巨大性可以这样理解:有一次,阿难尊者心里想:“梵行有一半是靠自身的能力,有一半是靠善知识的能力。”他无法凭自己的理解下定论,就去拜见世尊,问道:“尊者,梵行的一半是不是指这善友的状态、善同伴的状态、与善人交往的状态?”世尊说:“阿难,不要这样说,阿难,千万别这样说。阿难,整个梵行就是这善友的状态、善同伴的状态、与善人交往的状态。阿难,对于一位有善友、有善同伴、与善人交往的比丘,完全可以预期,他将修习圣八支道,也将多修习圣八支道。那么,阿难,一位有善友……(中略)……修习圣八支道、多修习圣八支道的比丘是怎样做的呢?阿难,这里一位比丘修习依远离而住的正见……(中略)……修习依远离而住的正定。阿难,比丘正是像这样……多修习。阿难,你也应通过这个道理这样来理解:整个梵行就是这善友的状态、善同伴的状态、与善人交往的状态。阿难,正是因为依靠我这个善友,有生法的众生,才从生中解脱出来;有老法的……(中略)……有愁、悲、苦、忧、恼法的众生,才从愁、悲、苦、忧、恼中解脱出来。”(《相应部·5.2》)显示巴利原文
488.Dvīsu dhammesu tathāgato samannesitabboti idha kalyāṇamittūpanissayaṃ dasseti. Mahā hi esa kalyāṇamittūpanissayo nāma. Tassa mahantabhāvo evaṃ veditabbo – ekasmiṃ hi samaye āyasmā ānando upaḍḍhaṃ attano ānubhāvena hoti, upaḍḍhaṃ kalyāṇamittānubhāvenāti cintetvā attano dhammatāya nicchetuṃ asakkonto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchi, – ‘‘upaḍḍhamidaṃ, bhante, brahmacariyassa, yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā kalyāṇasahāyatā kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā’’ti. Bhagavā āha – ‘‘mā hevaṃ, ānanda, mā hevaṃ, ānanda, sakalamevidaṃ, ānanda, brahmacariyaṃ yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā kalyāṇasahāyatā, kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā. Kalyāṇamittassetaṃ, ānanda, bhikkhuno pāṭikaṅkhaṃ kalyāṇasahāyassa kalyāṇasampavaṅkassa, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessati, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkarissati. Kathañcānanda, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto…pe… ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāveti, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkaroti. Idhānanda, bhikkhu sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāveti…pe… sammāsamādhiṃ bhāveti vivekanissitaṃ evaṃ kho, ānanda, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto…pe… bahulīkaroti, tadamināpetaṃ, ānanda, pariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Yathā sakalamevidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā kalyāṇasahāyatā kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā. Mamañhi, ānanda, kalyāṇamittaṃ āgamma jātidhammā sattā jātiyā parimuccanti. Jarādhammā…pe… sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammā sattā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsehi parimuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.2).
在开示比丘们的外缘成就时,世尊也这样说:“比丘们,作为外缘,除了这一种,我看不到其他任何一种条件能带来这么大的利益,比丘们,那就是善友。比丘们,善友能带来巨大的利益。”(《增支部·1.113》)在为大纯陀开示削减烦恼的修行方式时,世尊也说:“别人将会成为恶友,而我们在此处必定要成为善友——应当作这样的削减。”(《中部·1.83》)在向弥醯长老宣说令心解脱成熟的诸法时,世尊也特别赞叹善友的支持,说:“弥醯,对于尚未成熟的心解脱,有五种法能使它成熟。哪五种呢?弥醯,此处一位比丘是善友……”(《无问自说》31)当他反复教导爱子罗睺罗长老时,也说:显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūnaṃ bāhiraṅgasampattiṃ kathentopi āha – ‘‘bāhiraṃ, bhikkhave, aṅganti karitvā nāññaṃ ekaṅgampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ mahato atthāya saṃvattati, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, kalyāṇamittatā. Kalyāṇamittatā, bhikkhave, mahato atthāya saṃvattatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.113). Mahācundassa kilesasallekhapaṭipadaṃ kathentopi, ‘‘pare pāpamittā bhavissanti, mayamettha kalyāṇamittā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83) āha. Meghiyattherassa vimuttiparipācaniyadhamme kathentopi, ‘‘aparipakkāya, meghiya, cetovimuttiyā pañca dhammā paripākāya saṃvattanti. Katame pañca? Idha, meghiya, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hoti’’ti (udā. 31) kalyāṇamittūpanissayameva visesesi. Piyaputtassa rāhulattherassa abhiṇhovādaṃ dentopi –
你应亲近善友,选择僻静的坐卧处;
远离、无喧闹;于饮食应知量。
对于衣服、团食,以及坐卧处等诸资具,
于这些物,勿生渴爱,不再返回世间。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mitte bhajassu kalyāṇe, pantañca sayanāsanaṃ; Vivittaṃ appanigghosaṃ, mattaññū hohi bhojane. Cīvare piṇḍapāte ca, paccaye sayanāsane; Etesu taṇhaṃ mākāsi, mā lokaṃ punarāgamī’’ti. (su. ni. 340, 341) –
他首先开示了亲近善知识这件事的殊胜。确实,这种亲近善知识的利益是非常大的。在这里,为了显示这一点,世尊开始了这样的教导:“应当在两种法上去寻找如来”。意思是:有智慧的比丘应该在两种法上去寻找、去探寻如来。由此,世尊作狮子吼说:“如果这样想:‘这位是大族姓出身’,或‘具有种种相好’,或‘容貌庄严、令人悦目’,或‘有名望、有特征’,或‘依靠这个人,我就可以得到衣服等资具’——思虑这些之后而来依靠我而住,是没必要的。但如果有人这样认准了:‘这位有能力做我的导师,能够完成导师的责任’,他应该来亲近我。”据称,这部经确实名为“佛陀狮子吼经”。显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇamittūpanissayameva sabbapaṭhamaṃ kathesi. Evaṃ mahā esa kalyāṇamittūpanissayo nāma. Idhāpi taṃ dassento bhagavā dvīsu dhammesu tathāgato samannesitabboti desanaṃ ārabhi. Paṇḍito bhikkhu dvīsu dhammesu tathāgataṃ esatu gavesatūti attho. Etena bhagavā ayaṃ mahājaccoti vā, lakkhaṇasampannoti vā, abhirūpo dassanīyoti vā, abhiññāto abhilakkhitoti vā, imaṃ nissāyāhaṃ cīvarādayo paccaye labhissāmīti vā, evaṃ cintetvā maṃ nissāya vasanakiccaṃ natthi. Yo pana evaṃ sallakkheti, ‘‘pahoti me esa satthā hutvā satthukiccaṃ sādhetu’’nti, so maṃ bhajatūti sīhanādaṃ nadati. Buddhasīhanādo kira nāmesa suttantoti.
现在为了显示那两类法,他说了“眼识所知与耳识所知”。其中,导师的身行为,对于审察者而言是眼识所知的法;语行为,则是耳识所知的法。接着,为了显示应如何审察那些法,他说道“哪些是杂染的”等语。其中,“杂染的”指与烦恼相应的。那些杂染并非眼识或耳识所能直接认知。然而,正如水在晃动或泛起水泡时,便知其中有鱼;同样,审察者看见有人造作杀生等身恶行,或听见有人说出妄语等语恶行,便能推知引发这些行为的内心是杂染的。因此才这样说。因为对于杂染的心,其身行与语行也就可称为杂染。“它们不存在于如来”的意思是:这些在如来身上不存在,不可得。这样了知,是指知道它们是因为确实不存在才不可得,而非由于隐藏。正如世尊有一天在比丘僧团中,就这些法进行自恣时所说的:“来吧,比丘们,我现在自恣,你们对我的任何身行或语行,不要有所责备。”这样说后,具寿舍利弗从座而起,将郁多罗僧衣搭于一边肩上,朝向世尊的方向合掌,对世尊这样说:“尊者,我们对世尊的身行或语行,没有任何可责备之处。因为尊者,世尊显示巴利原文
Idāni te dve dhamme dassento cakkhusotaviññeyyesūti āha. Tattha satthu kāyiko samācāro vīmaṃsakassa cakkhuviññeyyo dhammo nāma. Vācasiko samācāro sotaviññeyyo dhammo nāma. Idāni tesu samannesitabbākāraṃ dassento ye saṃkiliṭṭhātiādimāha. Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhāti kilesasampayuttā. Te ca na cakkhusotaviññeyyā. Yathā pana udake calante vā pupphuḷake vā muñcante anto maccho atthīti viññāyati, evaṃ pāṇātipātādīni vā karontassa, musāvādādīni vā bhaṇantassa kāyavacīsamācāre disvā ca sutvā ca taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhanti viññāyati. Tasmā evamāha. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa hi kāyavacīsamācārāpi saṃkiliṭṭhāyeva nāma. Na te tathāgatassa saṃvijjantīti na te tathāgatassa atthi. Na upalabbhantīti evaṃ jānātīti attho. Natthitāyeva hi te na upalabbhanti na paṭicchannatāya. Tathā hi bhagavā ekadivasaṃ imesu dhammesu bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pavārento āha – ‘‘handa dāni, bhikkhave, pavāremi vo, na ca me kiñci garahatha kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā’’ti. Evaṃ vutte āyasmā sāriputto uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘na kho mayaṃ, bhante, bhagavato kiñci garahāma kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā. Bhagavā hi, bhante, anuppannassa maggassa uppādetā, asañjātassa maggassa sañjānetā, anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā, maggaññū maggavidū maggakovido. Maggānugā ca, bhante, etarahi sāvakā viharanti pacchāsamannāgatā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.215). Evaṃ parisuddhā tathāgatassa kāyavacīsamācārā. Uttaropi sudaṃ māṇavo tathāgatassa kāyavacīdvāre anārādhanīyaṃ kiñci passissāmīti satta māse anubandhitvā likkhāmattampi na addasa. Manussabhūto vā esa buddhabhūtassa kāyavacīdvāre kiṃ anārādhanīyaṃ passissati? Māropi devaputto bodhisattassa sato mahābhinikkhamanato paṭṭhāya chabbassāni gavesamāno kiñci anārādhanīyaṃ nāddasa, antamaso cetoparivitakkamattampi. Māro kira cintesi – ‘‘sacassa vitakkitamattampi akusalaṃ passissāmi, tattheva naṃ muddhani paharitvā pakkamissāmī’’ti. So chabbassāni adisvā buddhabhūtampi ekaṃ vassaṃ anubandhitvā kiñci vajjaṃ apassanto gamanasamaye vanditvā –
大雄大福,神通名誉,威光闪耀;
超越一切怨仇与怖畏,我顶礼乔达摩双足。”(《相应部》1.159)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mahāvīra mahāpuññaṃ, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Sabbaverabhayātītaṃ, pāde vandāmi gotama’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.159) –
说此偈后,他便离去。显示巴利原文
Gāthaṃ vatvā gato.
“混杂的”:指有时黑、有时白,如此黑白相杂。“纯白的”:指完全清净、远离一切烦恼。“存在”:指这些纯白的法确实存在、可以证得。对于如来而言,身行清净等纯白之法确实存在。因此他说:“比丘们,如来有此四种无需防护之法。哪四种呢?比丘们,如来的身行清净,如来的身恶行不存在,因此如来不需要为‘莫令他人知我此事’而作防护。如来的语行清净……意行清净……活命清净,比丘们,如来的邪命不存在,因此如来不需要为‘莫令他人知我此事’而作防护。”(《增支部》7.58)显示巴利原文
Vītimissāti kāle kaṇhā, kāle sukkāti evaṃ vomissakā. Vodātāti parisuddhā nikkilesā. Saṃvijjantīti vodātā dhammā atthi upalabbhanti. Tathāgatassa hi parisuddhā kāyasamācārādayo. Tenāha – ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa arakkheyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Parisuddhakāyasamācāro, bhikkhave, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṃ, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya, ‘mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’ti. Parisuddhavacīsamācāro… parisuddhamanosamācāro… parisuddhājīvo, bhikkhave, tathāgato , natthi tathāgatassa micchājīvo, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya, mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’’ti (a. ni. 7.58).
“这个善法”是指此无过失的活命第八戒。“这位具寿导师是长久具足,从极久远以来便已具备,还是短暂具足,仅在昨日、前日或大前日方才具备?”应当如此探求,这便是它的意义。有些人住在一处时,造作许多邪命之事,时间一久便会暴露,变得明显。他便前往边地村落或海边,搭建一间草屋,装作如同住阿兰若的比丘一般生活。人们对他生起崇敬,供养他殊胜的资具。当地的比丘们见他受到特殊照料,心想:“这位具寿实在过于傲慢,他究竟是谁?”观察后便得知:“他在某处,名唤某某,行了邪命后便离开了。”于是他们集会,依法、平等地对他施行驱逐等羯磨,说道:“不可与此人共行布萨或自恣。”正是为了审查这种隐秘行持是否存在,所以才这样说。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ kusalaṃ dhammanti imaṃ anavajjaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ. ‘‘Ayamāyasmā satthā kiṃ nu kho dīgharattaṃ samāpanno aticirakālato paṭṭhāya iminā samannāgato, udāhu ittarasamāpanno hiyyo vā pare vā parasuve vā divase samāpanno’’ti evaṃ gavesatūti attho. Ekaccena hi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantena bahu micchājīvakammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ tattha kālātikkame paññāyati, pākaṭaṃ hoti. So aññataraṃ paccantagāmaṃ vā samuddatīraṃ vā gantvā paṇṇasālaṃ kāretvā āraññako viya hutvā viharati. Manussā sambhāvanaṃ uppādetvā tassa paṇīte paccaye denti. Janapadavāsino bhikkhū tassa parihāraṃ disvā, ‘‘atidappito vatāyaṃ āyasmā, ko nu kho eso’’ti pariggaṇhantā, ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne asukaṃ nāma micchājīvaṃ katvā pakkantabhikkhū’’ti ñatvā na sakkā iminā saddhiṃ uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā kātunti sannipatitvā dhammena samena ukkhepanīyādīsu aññataraṃ kammaṃ karonti. Evarūpāya paṭicchannapaṭipattiyā atthibhāvaṃ vā natthibhāvaṃ vā vīmaṃsāpetuṃ evamāha.
“如此了知”意谓了知他长久以来具足,而非短暂具足。这不足为奇。如今如来已证一切知智,其活命第八戒在长夜中本自清净,何奇之有?——他在菩萨时期亦是如此。显示巴利原文
Evaṃjānātīti dīgharattaṃ samāpanno, na ittarasamāpannoti jānāti. Anacchariyaṃ cetaṃ. Yaṃ tathāgatassa etarahi sabbaññutaṃ pattassa dīgharattaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ parisuddhaṃ bhaveyya. Yassa bodhisattakālepi evaṃ ahosi.
据说在过去,犍陀罗王与韦提希王二人为友。他们见到欲乐的过患,便将王位交付给儿子,出家为仙人,在一座阿兰若村乞食。边地素来难得盐巴。他们求得无盐的粥,坐在一间厅堂里饮用。偶尔有人会拿盐粉来给他们。一天,有人用叶子裹了盐粉,送给韦提希仙人。韦提希仙人接过,将一半放在犍陀罗仙人近旁,一半放在自己这边。后来,他见自己还剩了一点,心想“别糟蹋了”,便用叶子包妥,藏在草丛里。又一日,喝粥时他记起此事,见到那盐粉,便走到犍陀罗仙人跟前说:“尊者,请取一些。”犍陀罗仙人问:“韦提希,你从哪里得来的?”韦提希仙人说:“前日吃剩的,我怕浪费,便收存起来了。”犍陀罗仙人不肯取用,只是饮下无盐的粥,并对韦提希仙人说:显示巴利原文
Atīte kira gandhārarājā ca vedeharājā ca dvepi sahāyakā hutvā kāmesu ādīnavaṃ disvā rajjāni puttānaṃ niyyātetvā isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā ekasmiṃ araññagāmake piṇḍāya caranti. Paccanto nāma dullabhaloṇo hoti. Tato aloṇaṃ yāguṃ labhitvā ekissāya sālāya nisīditvā pivanti. Antarantare manussā loṇacuṇṇaṃ āharitvā denti. Ekadivasaṃ eko vedehisissa paṇṇe pakkhipitvā loṇacuṇṇaṃ adāsi . Vedehisi gahetvā upaḍḍhaṃ gandhārisissa-santike ṭhapetvā upaḍḍhaṃ attano santike ṭhapesi. Tato thokaṃ paribhuttāvasesaṃ disvā, ‘‘mā idaṃ nassī’’ti paṇṇena veṭhetvā tiṇagahane ṭhapesi. Puna ekasmiṃ divase yāgupānakāle satiṃ katvā olokento taṃ disvā gandhārisiṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘ito thokaṃ gaṇhatha ācariyā’’ti āha. Kuto te laddhaṃ vedehisīti? Tasmiṃ divase paribhuttāvasesaṃ ‘‘mā nassī’’ti mayā ṭhapitanti. Gandhārisi gahetuṃ na icchati, aloṇakaṃyeva yāguṃ pivitvā vedehaṃ isiṃ avoca –
“弃舍了十六座人烟稠密的千户大城,
仓库已经充盈,你却还在囤积。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Hitvā gāmasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni soḷasa; Koṭṭhāgārāni phītāni, sannidhiṃ dāni kubbasī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.76);
韦提希仙人说:“你们舍弃王位出家了,如今为何又为了储藏一点点盐末,做出有违出家的行为呢?”犍陀罗仙人问:“我做了什么吗,韦提希?”于是韦提希仙人对他说:显示巴利原文
Vedehisi avoca – ‘‘tumhe rajjaṃ pahāya pabbajitā, idāni kasmā loṇacuṇṇamattasannidhikāraṇā pabbajjāya anucchavikaṃ na karothā’’ti? Kiṃ mayā kataṃ vedehisīti? Atha naṃ āha –
他已舍弃犍陀罗国,那原本拥有丰饶财富的国土;
你既已离于统治,如今却在此发号施令。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Hitvā gandhāravisayaṃ, pahūtadhanadhāriyaṃ; Pasāsanato nikkhanto, idha dāni pasāsasī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.77);
犍陀罗说:显示巴利原文
Gandhāro āha –
「对于正在宣说正法的我,恶不会染污。」(《本生经》1.7.78)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dhammaṃ bhaṇāmi vedeha, adhammo me na ruccati; Dhammaṃ me bhaṇamānassa, na pāpamupalimpatī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.78);
不论以什么理由,他人遭受伤害;
“即便是有重大利益的话,智者也不应说。”(《本生经》1.7.79)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yena kenaci vaṇṇena, paro labhati ruppanaṃ; Mahatthiyampi ce vācaṃ, na taṃ bhāseyya paṇḍito’’ti. (jā. 1.7.79);
犍陀罗说:显示巴利原文
Gandhāro āha –
“即使被伤害,或不被伤害,纵使被猛烈撕碎;
「当我宣说法时,恶业不能染污我。」(本生经 1.7.80)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmaṃ ruppatu vā mā vā, bhusaṃva vikirīyatu; Dhammaṃ me bhaṇamānassa, na pāpamupalimpatī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.80);
于是,韦提希仙人这样思惟:「既无自身的智慧,又未曾在师长座前学习律仪,便如盲牛游荡林中。」思惟已,说道:显示巴利原文
Tato vedehisi yassa sakāpi buddhi natthi, ācariyasantike vinayaṃ na sikkhati, so andhamahiṃso viya vane caratīti cintetvā āha –
「若无自身的智慧,或未善学律仪;
那么大多数人,便会如同森林中的盲牛般四处游荡。
然而正因在此处,有些人于师长跟前已善加学习;
因此,这些为律所调伏者,安住于善定而行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘No ce assa sakā buddhi, vinayo vā susikkhito; Vane andhamahiṃsova, careyya bahuko jano. Yasmā ca panidhekacce, āceramhi susikkhitā; Tasmā vinītavinayā, caranti susamāhitā’’ti. (jā. 1.7.81-82);
韦提希仙人这样说后,并不知道那是自己所为,便向犍陀罗仙人求恕。两人修习苦行后,往生梵天界。如是,如来尚为菩萨时,于漫长时劫中,以正命为第八支的戒,恒得清净。显示巴利原文
Evañca pana vatvā vedehisi ajānitvā mayā katanti gandhārisiṃ khamāpesi. Te ubhopi tapaṃ caritvā brahmalokaṃ agamaṃsu. Evaṃ tathāgatassa bodhisattakālepi dīgharattaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ parisuddhaṃ ahosi.
「这位具寿比丘是否因犯过人法而获得了名声?这位具寿、我们的导师比丘,是否犯了众所周知的、显而易见的过失?而他自己又是否已获得眷属成就?」为显示令比丘们如此审察:「以他那人所共知的犯过状态与依附名声的状态,究竟是否会见到某些过患?」世尊说:「诸比丘,只要比丘尚不为人所知,未被国王、大臣等所熟知,或者尚未获得眷属成就,那时,某些如慢与过慢等过患便不存在,他会安住得如同已寂静、近寂静者,如同入流者,如同一来者。他究竟是圣者还是凡夫,这是无法得知的。」显示巴利原文
Uttajjhāpanno ayamāyasmā bhikkhu yasapattoti ayamāyasmā amhākaṃ satthā bhikkhu ñattaṃ paññātabhāvaṃ pākaṭabhāvaṃ ajjhāpanno nu kho, sayañca parivārasampattiṃ patto nu kho noti. Tena cassa paññātajjhāpannabhāvena yasasannissitabhāvena ca kiṃ ekacce ādīnavā sandissanti udāhu noti evaṃ samannesantūti dasseti. Na tāva, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, yāva bhikkhu na rājarājamahāmattādīsu abhiññātabhāvaṃ vā parivārasampattiṃ vā āpanno hoti, tāva ekacce mānātimānādayo ādīnavā na saṃvijjanti upasantūpasanto viya sotāpanno viya sakadāgāmī viya ca viharati. Ariyo nu kho puthujjano nu khotipi ñātuṃ na sakkā hoti.
诸比丘,若说「自从……那时起」,这是指当这里有位比丘变得闻名,或拥有众多随从时,他就会像一头用尖角乱撞牛群的恶牛,又像踩踏鹿群的豹子一般,到处刺伤其他比丘。他无恭敬心,行为不合众,走起路来仿佛只用趾尖触地。然而,另有一种善男子则恰恰相反:他越是有名、越有声誉,就越如因谷粒饱满而低垂的稻穗般,更加谦和。当国王、大臣等前来亲近时,他会省思自己「实无所拥有」,于内心确立沙门的自觉。他像一头去角的壮牛,又如旃陀罗的幼童,温顺柔和,心态谦下,为比丘僧团及与天神的世间带来利益与安乐。正是针对这种行持,世尊才说:「在此,他不会有某类过失。」显示巴利原文
Yatoca kho, bhikkhaveti yadā pana idhekacco bhikkhu ñāto hoti parivārasampanno vā, tadā tiṇhena siṅgena gogaṇaṃ vijjhanto duṭṭhagoṇo viya, migasaṅghaṃ abhimaddamāno dīpi viya ca aññe bhikkhū tattha tattha vijjhanto agāravo asabhāgavutti aggapādena bhūmiṃ phusanto viya carati. Ekacco pana kulaputto yathā yathā ñāto hoti yasassī, tathā tathā phalabhārabharito viya sāli suṭṭhutaraṃ onamati, rājarājamahāmattādīsu upasaṅkamantesu akiñcanabhāvaṃ paccavekkhitvā samaṇasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā chinnavisāṇausabho viya, caṇḍāladārako viya ca sorato nivāto nīcacitto hutvā bhikkhusaṅghassa ceva sadevakassa ca lokassa, hitāya sukhāya paṭipajjati. Evarūpaṃ paṭipattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘nāssa idhekacce ādīnavā’’ti āha.
而如来在八种世间法中,始终是如如者。得利时,他如如;失利时,他也如如;享誉时,他如如;受毁时,他如如;被称赞时,他如如;遭讥讽时,他如如;安乐时,他如如;受苦时,他同样如如。因此,无论从哪方面来看,他都完全没有这里所说的那些过失。‘无怖畏而离止者’:意思是自身已无怖畏,故而得离;也就是究竟远离、恒常远离。又,并非因怖畏而远离,所以称为无怖畏而离止者。怖畏有四种:烦恼的怖畏、流转生死的怖畏、恶趣的怖畏,以及受人非难的怖畏。凡夫对这四种怖畏都会畏惧。有学圣者唯对其中三种感到畏惧,因为他们已断了恶趣的怖畏;所以,七类有学是‘因怖畏而离止者’,而诸漏尽者则称为‘无怖畏而离止者’,因为对他来说,一种怖畏也不存在了。难道他不畏惧他人的非难吗?确实不畏惧。不过,出于对其他众生的悲悯,他会谨慎守护,避免让人非难,心想:‘不要有众生因为我这样的漏尽者而造下恶业,趋于毁灭。’这就如同住在红莲池精舍的耶舍长老那样。显示巴利原文
Tathāgato pana aṭṭhasu lokadhammesu tādī, so hi lābhepi tādī, alābhepi tādī, yasepi tādī, ayasepi tādī, pasaṃsāyapi tādī, nindāyapi tādī, sukhepi tādī, dukkhepi tādī, tasmā sabbākārena nāssa idhekacce ādīnavā saṃvijjanti. Abhayūparatoti abhayo hutvā uparato, accantūparato satatūparatoti attho. Na vā bhayena uparatotipi abhayūparato. Cattāri hi bhayāni kilesabhayaṃ vaṭṭabhayaṃ duggatibhayaṃ upavādabhayanti. Puthujjano catūhipi bhayehi bhāyati. Sekkhā tīhi, tesañhi duggatibhayaṃ pahīnaṃ, iti satta sekkhā bhayūparatā, khīṇāsavo abhayūparato nāma, tassa hi ekampi bhayaṃ natthi. Kiṃ paravādabhayaṃ natthīti? Natthi. Parānuddayaṃ pana paṭicca, ‘‘mādisaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ paṭicca sattā mā nassantū’’ti upavādaṃ rakkhati. Mūluppalavāpivihāravāsī yasatthero viya.
据说,那位耶舍长老进入红莲池村托钵。当他来到一位施主家门口时,有人接过他的钵,靠着门槛旁的矮凳为他铺好了坐具。那位大臣的女儿也靠着同一张矮凳,在后方为自己铺了一个更低的坐具坐下。随后,一位同住比丘也进村托钵,他站在门口往里一看,望见长老与大臣的女儿同坐在一张床座上,心中便想:‘这个穿粪扫衣的,在寺院里装得那样宁静安稳,到了村子却和女施主同坐一张床。’他又再三打量,想:‘莫非我看错了?’但仍认定自己没有看错,便离开了。长老用完斋饭,回到寺院,走进自己的住处,关上门坐下。那位同住比丘也用完了斋,回到寺院,盘算着:‘我要呵斥那个穿粪扫衣的,把他赶出寺院。’他举止放纵地来到长老住处,从日常的水罐中舀水,大声地洗脚。长老思惟:‘这个举止粗暴的人是谁?’他明白了一切后,心想:‘此人对我的嗔恨已经生起,不要因此堕入恶趣才是。’于是腾空而起,在靠近屋檐环板之处结跏趺坐。那位同住比丘粗暴地提起门闩,开门进入,却不见长老,以为他钻到床底下去了,察看之后显示巴利原文
Thero kira mūluppalavāpigāmaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Athassa upaṭṭhākakuladvāraṃ pattassa pattaṃ gahetvā thaṇḍilapīṭhakaṃ nissāya āsanaṃ paññapesuṃ. Amaccadhītāpi taṃyeva pīṭhakaṃ nissāya paratobhāge nīcataraṃ āsanaṃ paññāpetvā nisīdi. Eko nevāsiko bhikkhu pacchā piṇḍāya paviṭṭho dvāre ṭhatvāva olokento thero amaccadhītarā saddhiṃ ekamañce nisinnoti sallakkhetvā, ‘‘ayaṃ paṃsukūliko vihāreva upasantūpasanto viya viharati, antogāme pana upaṭṭhāyikāhi saddhiṃ ekamañce nisīdatī’’ti cintetvā, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho mayā duddiṭṭha’’nti punappunaṃ oloketvā tathāsaññīva hutvā pakkāmi. Theropi bhattakiccaṃ katvā vihāraṃ gantvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisīdi. Nevāsikopi katabhattakicco vihāraṃ gantvā, ‘‘taṃ paṃsukūlikaṃ niggaṇhitvā vihārā nikkaḍḍhissāmī’’ti asaññatanīhārena therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā paribhogaghaṭato uluṅkena udakaṃ gahetvā mahāsaddaṃ karonto pāde dhovi. Thero, ‘‘ko nu kho ayaṃ asaññatacāriko’’ti āvajjanto sabbaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘ayaṃ mayi manaṃ padosetvā apāyūpago mā ahosī’’ti vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā kaṇṇikāmaṇḍalasamīpe pallaṅkena nisīdi. Nevāsiko duṭṭhākārena ghaṭikaṃ ukkhipitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā anto paviṭṭho theraṃ apassanto, ‘‘heṭṭhāmañcaṃ paviṭṭho bhavissatī’’ti oloketvā tatthāpi apassanto nikkhamituṃ ārabhi. Thero ukkāsi. Itaro uddhaṃ olokento disvā adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto evamāha – ‘‘patirūpaṃ te, āvuso, paṃsukūlika evaṃ ānubhāvasampannassa upaṭṭhāyikāya saddhiṃ ekamañce nisīditu’’nti. Pabbajitā nāma, bhante, mātugāmena saddhiṃ na ekamañce nisīdanti, tumhehi pana duddiṭṭhametanti. Evaṃ khīṇāsavā parānuddayāya upavādaṃ rakkhanti.
由贪尽:即通过贪的彻底灭尽。因为已离贪,所以他不会去亲近欲乐,并非靠思惟抉择来强行克制。而当他:当这位正在审察的比丘如此了知如来断除烦恼之事後,不论在何处,行住坐卧之时,乃至坐在四众弟子聚集、布置庄严的法座上,他也可以如此赞叹道:‘导师正是这样——离贪、离嗔、离痴,吐弃了烦恼,断除了垢秽,如同脱离一切云雾的满月,极为清净。’正当他如此赞叹如来断烦恼功德时,他人可能会这般询问——这便是这段文字的意涵。显示巴利原文
Khayā rāgassāti rāgassa khayeneva. Vītarāgattā kāme na paṭisevati, na paṭisaṅkhāya vāretvāti. Tañceti evaṃ tathāgatassa kilesappahānaṃ ñatvā tattha tattha ṭhitanisinnakālādīsupi catuparisamajjhe alaṅkatadhammāsane nisīditvāpi itipi satthā vītarāgo vītadoso vītamoho vantakileso pahīnamalo abbhā muttapuṇṇacando viya suparisuddhoti evaṃ tathāgatassa kilesappahāne vaṇṇaṃ kathayamānaṃ taṃ vīmaṃsakaṃ bhikkhuṃ pare evaṃ puccheyyuṃ ceti attho.
“因相”(ākārā):指各种缘由和根据。“随觉”(anvayā):指随之而起的观察智慧。“或于僧众中住”(Saṅghe vā viharanto):指时而在人数不定的比丘僧众中居住。“或独一而住”(Eko vā viharanto):即如经中所说“诸比丘,我欲独自静修半月”、“我欲独自静修三月”,在如此隐居时,以及在巴利雷亚林丛中独住。“善行者”(Sugatā):指那些修行善巧、行于正道、精勤用功、与道相应者。确有此类比丘。“恶行者”(Duggatā):指那些修行不善、行持错误、一味贪着身体强壮、舍弃业处者。亦有此类比丘。“教诫众徒”(Gaṇamanusāsanti):指那些被群体关系所束缚、乐于群居、习惯群体生活、不断呵护治理群体者。亦有此类比丘。与之相反,则是那些脱离群体、无有系缚、独处自在的比丘。显示巴利原文
Ākārāti kāraṇāni. Anvayāti anubuddhiyo. Saṅghe vā viharantoti appekadā aparicchinnagaṇanassa bhikkhusaṅghassa majjhe viharanto. Eko vā viharantoti icchāmahaṃ, bhikkhave , aḍḍhamāsaṃ paṭisallīyitunti, temāsaṃ paṭisallīyitunti evaṃ paṭisallāne ceva pālileyyakavanasaṇḍe ca ekako viharanto. Sugatāti suṭṭhugatā suppaṭipannā kārakā yuttapayuttā. Evarūpāpi hi ekacce bhikkhū atthi. Duggatāti duṭṭhugatā duppaṭipannā kāyadaḷhibahulā vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānā. Evarūpāpi ekacce atthi. Gaṇamanusāsantīti gaṇabandhanena baddhā gaṇārāmā gaṇabahulikā hutvā gaṇaṃ pariharanti. Evarūpāpi ekacce atthi. Tesaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtā gaṇato nissaṭā visaṃsaṭṭhā vippamuttavihārinopi atthi.
“沉溺于利养中”(Āmisesu sandissanti):指有些比丘贪求利养,唯以利养为眼目,四处游走只为了四资具之利,陷溺于利养中。另有一些比丘,则不被利养所染,对于四资具心能回转而不染着,犹如离云之月而安住。“此具寿不因此轻视彼”(Nāyamāyasmā taṃ tena avajānāti):意思是,这位具寿——也就是导师——不会因某些人的行持而轻视他们。他既不会起世俗的褒扬心想:“此人是精勤的行道者”、“此人脱离了群体,无所系缚”、“此人不被利养所染,心能从资具中回转,如同离云之月”,也不会起世俗的贬抑心想:“此人修行行径低劣,未真实用功,身体粗重,舍弃业处”、“此人被群体的绳索所缚”、“此人贪着利养,心浮气躁,唯以利养为眼目”。这是什么意思呢?这是在说明如来于一切众生中,是“如如者”(住于平等)。因为——显示巴利原文
Āmisesu sandissantīti āmisagiddhā āmisacakkhukā catupaccayaāmisatthameva āhiṇḍamānā āmisesu sandissamānakabhikkhūpi atthi. Āmisena anupalittā catūhi paccayehi vinivattamānasā abbhā muttacandasadisā hutvā viharamānāpi atthi. Nāyamāyasmā taṃ tena avajānātīti ayaṃ āyasmā satthā tāya tāya paṭipattiyā taṃ taṃ puggalaṃ nāvajānāti, ayaṃ paṭipanno kārako, ayaṃ gaṇato nissaṭo visaṃsaṭṭho. Ayaṃ āmisena anupalitto paccayehi vinivattamānaso abbhā mutto candimā viyāti evamassa gehasitavasena ussādanāpi natthi. Ayaṃ duppaṭipanno akārako kāyadaḷhibahulo vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhāno, ayaṃ gaṇabandhanabaddho, ayaṃ āmisagiddho lolo āmisacakkhukoti evamassa gehasitavasena apasādanāpi natthīti attho. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ hoti? Tathāgatassa sattesu tādibhāvo kathito hoti. Ayañhi –
对于杀人的提婆达多、盗贼央掘魔罗,
无论是对财护象还是对罗睺罗,牟尼于一切众生皆平等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vadhakassa devadattassa, corassaṅgulimālino; Dhanapāle rāhule ca, sabbesaṃ samako munī’’ti. (mi. pa. 6.6.5);
489 此处,“诸比丘”指这两类检验者:一者因问“这位尊者的因相是什么?”而来的“结缚检验者”,另一者因认为“这位尊者是安住无畏、离执的人”而来的“根本检验者”。在这两者之中,根本检验者应当进一步直接反问如来。因为他先前是从别人言说中得出最终结论的。而别人有可能在知晓的情况下说,也可能在不知晓的情况下说;如此,其所说既有可能是真实的,也有可能是不真实的。因此,意思是:不应仅凭他人的言说便下结论,而应在此基础上更进一步,直接向如来追问。显示巴利原文
489.Tatra, bhikkhaveti tesu dvīsu vīmaṃsakesu. Yo, ‘‘ke panāyasmato ākārā’’ti pucchāyaṃ āgato gaṇṭhivīmaṃsako ca, yo ‘‘abhayūparato ayamāyasmā’’ti āgato mūlavīmaṃsako ca. Tesu mūlavīmaṃsakena tathāgatova uttari paṭipucchitabbo. So hi pubbe parasseva kathāya niṭṭhaṅgato. Paro ca nāma jānitvāpi katheyya ajānitvāpi. Evamassa kathā bhūtāpi hoti abhūtāpi, tasmā parasseva kathāya niṭṭhaṃ agantvā tato uttari tathāgatova paṭipucchitabboti attho.
“在解说时”:此处,因如来绝无错误的解说,故不分别说“正说”或“邪说”,唯直接说“在解说时”。“这是我的道路,这是我的行处”,意即:这是我的道,这是我的境。也有读作“etāpātho”的,其意为:我那与梵行命相应的增上戒是清净的;正因我此戒的清净,我才能如此在检验比丘的智门中显现,即如此进入他的视野。而“我却不因此成为那样的人”则是显示:我虽然具足此清净戒,却不会因此自满,亦无渴爱;我因为戒的清净而无有渴爱。显示巴利原文
Byākaramānoti ettha yasmā tathāgatassa micchābyākaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā sammā micchāti avatvā byākaramānotveva vuttaṃ. Etaṃ pathohamasmietaṃ gocaroti esa mayhaṃ patho esa gocaroti attho. ‘‘Etāpātho’’tipi pāṭho, tassattho mayhaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ parisuddhaṃ, svāhaṃ tassa parisuddhabhāvena vīmaṃsakassa bhikkhuno ñāṇamukhe etāpātho, evaṃ āpāthaṃ gacchāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. No ca tena tammayoti tenapi cāhaṃ parisuddhena sīlena na tammayo, na sataṇho, parisuddhasīlattāva nittaṇhohamasmīti dīpeti.
说「更上更上、更殊胜更殊胜」是指:佛陀将法变得层层递进、越来越殊胜而予以开示。
说「具有对立面的黑白」指的是:黑法与白法,并且使它们带有对立面,成为一对相互敌对的法来开示。也就是,通过排斥黑法而显现白法,通过排斥白法而显现黑法,以这样具有对立面的方式开示黑与白。即使在开示黑法时,也是带着精进力、带着果报来开示;在开示白法时,也同样带着精进力、带着果报来开示。
「以证智了知此中某一法,在诸法中到达究竟」的意思是:在那已开示的法中,以证智了知某个构成证悟的法。借助这个证悟之法,在教法中到达究竟。
「于师净信」:像这样在法上到达究竟之后,他更加深信“世尊即是正自觉者”,从而对老师产生净信。
不仅如此,因为世尊所宣说的法,具有“导向出离”的性质,所以也是世尊所善说的法。
而随此法修行的僧团,因为修行的是远离歪曲等过失的行道,所以也是善修行的。他这样对法和僧团也产生净信。
「而那样……」指的是:那位如此产生净信的比丘,会在不同的场合,赞叹这三种宝的功德。显示巴利原文
Uttaruttariṃpaṇītapaṇītanti uttaruttariṃ ceva paṇītatarañca katvā deseti. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāganti kaṇhaṃ ceva sukkañca, tañca kho sappaṭibhāgaṃ savipakkhaṃ katvā, kaṇhaṃ paṭibāhitvā sukkanti sukkaṃ paṭibāhitvā kaṇhanti evaṃ sappaṭibhāgaṃ katvā kaṇhasukkaṃ deseti. Kaṇhaṃ desentopi saussāhaṃ savipākaṃ deseti, sukkaṃ desentopi saussāhaṃ savipākaṃ deseti. Abhiññāya idhekaccaṃ dhammaṃ dhammesu niṭṭhaṃ gacchatīti tasmiṃ desite dhamme ekaccaṃ paṭivedhadhammaṃ abhiññāya tena paṭivedhadhammena desanādhamme niṭṭhaṃ gacchati. Satthari pasīdatīti evaṃ dhamme niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhiyyosomattāya sammāsambuddho so bhagavāti satthari pasīdati. Tena pana bhagavatā yo dhammo akkhāto, sopi svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo niyyānikattā. Yvāssa taṃ dhammaṃ paṭipanno saṅgho, sopi suppaṭipanno vaṅkādidosarahitaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipannattāti evaṃ dhamme saṅghepi pasīdati. Tañceti taṃ evaṃ pasannaṃ tattha tattha tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathentaṃ bhikkhuṃ.
490 「以这些理由」是指这些用来检验导师的根据。
「以这些语句」是指用这些文字组合而成的语句。
「以这些文句」是指通过这些在此处所说的文字。
「信已安立」:确定无疑的净信已经建立起来。
「已生根」:指依入流道而生起的根本信,因为入流道即是信的“根”。
「有理由的」:因为是经过寻找原因后才接受,所以是带有缘由的信。
「以见为根本」:以入流道为根本,因为入流道即称为“见”。
「坚固的」:指牢不可破。
「不可被夺的」:指不能被夺走。不论是“沙门”——止息诸恶的修行人,“婆罗门”——断除诸恶的修行人,“天”——依业投生的天神,还是“魔”——自在天魔,都不能夺走它。因为即使是自在天魔,也无法夺走入流者的信,正如苏兰巴塔的情况那样。显示巴利原文
490.Imehi ākārehīti imehi satthuvīmaṃsanakāraṇehi. Imehi padehīti imehi akkharasampiṇḍanapadehi. Imehi byañjanehīti imehi idha vuttehi akkharehi. Saddhā niviṭṭhāti okappanā patiṭṭhitā. Mūlajātāti sotāpattimaggavasena sañjātamūlā. Sotāpattimaggo hi saddhāya mūlaṃ nāma. Ākāravatīti kāraṇaṃ pariyesitvā gahitattā sakāraṇā. Dassanamūlikāti sotāpattimaggamūlikā. So hi dassananti vuccati. Daḷhāti thirā. Asaṃhāriyāti harituṃ na sakkā. Samaṇena vāti samitapāpasamaṇena vā. Brāhmaṇena vāti bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇena vā. Devena vāti upapattidevena vā. Mārena vāti vasavattimārena vā, sotāpannassa hi vasavattimārenāpi saddhā asaṃhāriyā hoti sūrambaṭṭhassa viya.
据说,这位苏兰巴塔听了世尊说法后,证得入流果,回到家中。那时,魔王化现为具足三十二相庄严的佛陀形象,站在他家门口,派人传话说:“导师来了。”苏兰心想:“我刚从导师那里听法回来,这到底是怎么回事?”他走上前去,以为是导师,便礼拜后站在一旁。魔王说:“苏兰巴塔,我对你说的‘色是无常的……乃至……识是无常的’,那是我未经思量、信口说的。因此,你应执取‘色是常的……乃至……识是常的’。”苏兰心想:“佛陀绝不可能未经思量、未现观而说任何事,这必定是魔王为了扰乱我而来。”于是他对魔王说:“你是魔!”魔王无法说谎,便承认:“是,我是魔。”当被问“为何而来?”时,魔王说:“为了动摇你的信心。”(苏兰说:)“黑魔!你且独自待着吧,像你这样的魔,即使一百个、一千个,也无力动摇我的信心。由圣道生起的信心,如同安立于石地上的须弥山一般,是不动的,你在这里能做什么?”他弹了一下响指。魔王无法站立,当场便消失了。
“或由梵天”的意思是:由梵身天等中的某位梵天。
“或由世间任何其他有情”的意思是:除了这些沙门等之外,世间任何其他有情。显示巴利原文
So kira satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpanno hutvā gehaṃ āgato. Atha māro dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ buddharūpaṃ māpetvā tassa gharadvāre ṭhatvā – ‘‘satthā āgato’’ti sāsanaṃ pahiṇi. Sūro cintesi, ‘‘ahaṃ idāneva satthu santikā dhammaṃ sutvā āgato, kiṃ nu kho bhavissatī’’ti upasaṅkamitvā satthusaññāya vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Māro āha – ‘‘yaṃ te mayā, sūrambaṭṭha, rūpaṃ aniccaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ aniccanti kathitaṃ, taṃ anupadhāretvāva sahasā mayā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā tvaṃ rūpaṃ niccaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ niccanti gaṇhāhī’’ti. Sūro cintesi – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, yaṃ buddhā anupadhāretvā apaccakkhaṃ katvā kiñci katheyyuṃ, addhā ayaṃ mayhaṃ vibādhanatthaṃ māro āgato’’ti. Tato naṃ tvaṃ māroti āha. So musāvādaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi, āma mārosmīti paṭijāni. Kasmā āgatosīti vutte tava saddhācālanatthanti āha. Kaṇha pāpima, tvaṃ tāva ekako tiṭṭha, tādisānaṃ mārānaṃ satampi sahassampi mama saddhaṃ cāletuṃ asamatthaṃ, maggena āgatā saddhā nāma silāpathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitasineru viya acalā hoti, kiṃ tvaṃ etthāti accharaṃ pahari. So ṭhātuṃ asakkonto tatthevantaradhāyi. Brahmunā vāti brahmakāyikādīsu aññatarabrahmunā vā. Kenaci vā lokasminti ete samaṇādayo ṭhapetvā aññenapi kenaci vā lokasmiṃ harituṃ na sakkā. Dhammasamannesanāti sabhāvasamannesanā. Dhammatāsusamanniṭṭhoti dhammatāya susamanniṭṭho, sabhāveneva suṭṭhu samannesito hotīti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第八 〈憍赏弥经〉注释显示巴利原文
8. Kosambiyasuttavaṇṇanā
491 如是我闻,这部经是《憍赏弥经》。其中,“憍赏弥”是一个以憍赏弥树命名的城市。相传这座城市的园林、池塘等各处都繁茂地长满了憍赏弥树,因此得名“憍赏弥”。也有人认为,城因建在一位名为库桑巴的仙人草庵附近而得名。“瞿师罗园”则指由瞿师罗富翁所建的园林。显示巴利原文
491.Evaṃme sutanti kosambiyasuttaṃ. Tattha kosambiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tassa kira nagarassa ārāmapokkharaṇīādīsu tesu tesu ṭhānesu kosambarukkhāva ussannā ahesuṃ, tasmā kosambīti saṅkhaṃ agamāsi. Kusambassa nāma isino assamato avidūre māpitattātipi eke. Ghositārāmeti ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme.
据说过去有一个名为阿迪拉的国家。那时,一个名叫科图哈拉卡的穷人因畏惧饥荒,带着妻儿前往一处田地丰饶、食物充足的国家。途中,他无力再背负儿子,便将其抛弃后自行离去。孩子的母亲折返回来,带上儿子一同前往。他们走入一个牧牛人的村庄,当时牧牛人们正好备好了捣碎的乳粥。他们得到乳粥后便吃了起来。之后,那个男子因进食乳粥过量,无法消化,于夜间死去,在彼处投生于一只母狗的子宫,结生为狗。这只狗后来成了牧牛人所喜爱且称心的狗。牧牛人常去侍奉一位独觉佛。那位独觉佛用餐后,也会给狗一团食物。狗对独觉佛生起了好感,因此常跟随牧牛人一同去草舍。显示巴利原文
Pubbe kira addilaraṭṭhaṃ nāma ahosi. Tato kotūhalako nāma daliddo chātakabhayena saputtadāro kedāraparicchinnaṃ subhikkhaṃ raṭṭhaṃ gacchanto puttaṃ vahituṃ asakkonto chaḍḍetvā agamāsi. Mātā nivattitvā taṃ gahetvā gatā. Te ekaṃ gopālakagāmakaṃ pavisiṃsu, gopālakānañca tadā pahatapāyaso paṭiyatto hoti, tato pāyasaṃ labhitvā bhuñjiṃsu. Atha so puriso pahūtapāyasaṃ bhuñjitvā jirāpetuṃ asakkonto rattibhāge kālaṃ katvā tattheva sunakhiyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā kukkuro jāto. So gopālakassa piyo ahosi manāpo, gopālako ca paccekabuddhaṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Paccekabuddhopi bhattakiccāvasāne kukkurassa ekaṃ piṇḍaṃ deti. So paccekabuddhe sinehaṃ uppādetvā gopālakena saddhiṃ paṇṇasālampi gacchati.
当牧牛人不在时,到了用餐时间,狗就自己跑去独觉佛的草舍门口吠叫,来告知时间;在路上见到凶猛的野兽,它也会吠叫着把它们赶跑。后来,它以对独觉佛的柔软心死去,投生到了天界。在那里,它的名字就叫‘瞿沙天子’。它从天界死后,投生在憍赏弥的一个家族中。一位没有儿子的富翁,给了它今生的父母一笔钱,把它收为养子。后来,当富翁自己的亲生儿子出生后,便试图七次杀害它。但因为它具有福德,七次都躲过死劫。最后,靠着一位富翁女儿的聪明才智得以活命,并在养父去世后,继承了富翁的地位,被称为瞿师罗富翁。在憍赏弥,还有另外两位富翁,名叫库库塔富翁和帕瓦利卡富翁。他们三位一起,就是那时的三大富翁。显示巴利原文
So gopālake asannihite bhattavelāya sayameva gantvā kālārocanatthaṃ paṇṇasāladvāre bhussati, antarāmaggepi caṇḍamige disvā bhussitvā palāpeti. So paccekabuddhe mudukena cittena kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatti. Tatrassa ghosakadevaputtotveva nāmaṃ ahosi. So devalokato cavitvā kosambiyaṃ ekasmiṃ kulaghare nibbatti. Taṃ aputtako seṭṭhi tassa mātāpitūnaṃ dhanaṃ datvā puttaṃ katvā aggahesi. Atha so attano putte jāte sattakkhattuṃ mārāpetuṃ upakkami. So puññavantatāya sattasupi ṭhānesu maraṇaṃ appatvā avasāne ekāya seṭṭhidhītāya veyyattiyena laddhajīviko aparabhāge pituaccayena seṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ patvā ghositaseṭṭhi nāma jāto. Aññepi kosambiyaṃ kukkuṭaseṭṭhi pāvārikaseṭṭhīti dve seṭṭhino santi. Imehi saddhiṃ tayo ahesuṃ.
那时,这几位富商的朋友——五百位仙人,以这些富商为施主,住在山脚下。仙人们时常为食用一些咸酸粥而来到人烟之处。有一次,正值热季,他们前往人间,穿越一片没有水的茫茫旷野。在旷野的尽头,他们望见一棵大榕树,心中便想:‘如此壮观的树中,必定住有具大威德的天神。若她能赐予我们些许饮水或食物,那该多好。’天神感知到仙人们的心意,心想:‘我要照应他们。’于是以威神力从树枝间放出一股如犁头般粗细的水流。仙人们看见那如同银柱般流下的水,纷纷用各自的容器接取,受用之后,心中又想:‘天神给了我们饮用的水,但这里仍是远离村落的深林,如果也能给我们食物,那就太好了。’天神又随顺他们的心意,施予他们天界的粥与硬食等,令他们饱足。仙人们继续思惟:‘天神既给了我们饮水,又给了我们食物,一切都已赐予。若能现身让我们看见,那就太好了。’显示巴利原文
Tena ca samayena tesaṃ sahāyakānaṃ seṭṭhīnaṃ kulūpakā pañcasatā isayo pabbatapāde vasiṃsu. Te kālena kālaṃ loṇambilasevanatthāya manussapathaṃ āgacchanti. Athekasmiṃ vāre gimhasamaye manussapathaṃ āgacchantā nirudakamahākantāraṃ atikkamitvā kantārapariyosāne mahantaṃ nigrodharukkhaṃ disvā cintesuṃ – ‘‘yādiso ayaṃ rukkho, addhā ettha mahesakkhāya devatāya bhavitabbaṃ, sādhu vatassa, sace no pānīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyyā’’ti. Devatā isīnaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā imesaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissāmīti attano ānubhāvena viṭapantarato naṅgalasīsamattaṃ udakadhāraṃ pavattesi. Isigaṇo rajatakkhandhasadisaṃ udakavaṭṭiṃ disvā attano bhājanehi udakaṃ gahetvā paribhogaṃ katvā cintesi – ‘‘devatāya amhākaṃ paribhogaudakaṃ dinnaṃ, idaṃ pana agāmakaṃ mahāaraññaṃ, sādhu vatassa, sace no āhārampi dadeyyā’’ti. Devatā isīnaṃ upasaṃkappanavasena dibbāni yāgukhajjakādīni datvā santappesi. Isayo cintayiṃsu – ‘‘devatāya amhākaṃ paribhogaudakampi bhojanampi sabbaṃ dinnaṃ, sādhu vatassa, sace no attānaṃ dasseyyā’’ti.
天神洞知他们的心意后,便显现出上半身。仙人们问道:‘天神啊,您的成就如此广大,您过去造了什么业,才获得这样的大成就呢?’‘尊者,并非造了什么极大的业,只是做了一点小小的业罢了。’原来,这位天神是靠着半布萨的业,才获得那种成就的。显示巴利原文
Devatā tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā upaḍḍhakāyaṃ dassesi. Te āhaṃsu – ‘‘devate, mahatī te sampatti, kiṃ kammaṃ katvā imaṃ sampattiṃ adhigatāsī’’ti? Bhante, nātimahantaṃ parittakaṃ kammaṃ katvāti. Upaḍḍhauposathakammaṃ nissāya hi devatāya sā sampatti laddhā.
相传,这位天子原本是给孤独长者家中一名佣工。因为在长者的家中,每到布萨日,下至奴仆佣工,举家上下所有人都会持守布萨。有一天,这名佣工一大早就独自外出干活了。大长者留意着要给仆从们分发食物津贴,得知只有他一人去了林间,便把他的那份津贴也留下了。一个做饭的女奴只煮了他一个人的饭,等他回来后,把饭盛给了他。那佣工问道:‘平常这个时候,家中一片喧嚷,今天却格外安静,这是怎么回事?’女奴告诉他:‘今天家中所有人都持守布萨,大长者只给了你一个人食物津贴。’‘是这样吗,大娘?’‘是的,主人。’‘大娘,在现在这种时候,如果受了布萨,算不算完整的布萨业呢?请你替我去问问大长者。’女奴去问过后,大长者说:‘这不算完整的布萨业,但能计为一半的业。就让他也成为持布萨者吧。’佣工听后,没有吃饭,漱口之后便持守了布萨,然后回到自己的住处躺下。他由于断食而身体虚弱,夜里风大扰动,于破晓时分死去。他凭着这半布萨业的果报,投生在大轮森林中一棵榕树上,成为一位天子。后来,他便将这段经历告诉了那些仙人。显示巴利原文
Anāthapiṇḍikassa kira gehe ayaṃ devaputto kammakāro ahosi. Seṭṭhissa hi gehe uposathadivasesu antamaso dāsakammakāre upādāya sabbo jano uposathiko hoti. Ekadivasaṃ ayaṃ kammakāro ekakova pāto uṭṭhāya kammantaṃ gato. Mahāseṭṭhi nivāpaṃ labhanamanusse sallakkhento etassevekassa araññaṃ gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā assa sāyamāsatthāya nivāpaṃ adāsi. Bhattakārikā dāsī ekasseva bhattaṃ pacitvā araññato āgatassa bhattaṃ vaḍḍhetvā adāsi, kammakāro āha – ‘‘aññesu divasesu imasmiṃ kāle gehaṃ ekasaddaṃ ahosi, ajja ativiya sannisinnaṃ, kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti ? Tassa sā ācikkhi – ‘‘ajja imasmiṃ gehe sabbe manussā uposathikā, mahāseṭṭhi tuyhevekassa nivāpaṃ adāsī’’ti. Evaṃ ammāti? Āma sāmīti. Imasmiṃ kāle uposathaṃ samādinnassa uposathakammaṃ hoti na hotīti mahāseṭṭhiṃ puccha ammāti? Tāya gantvā pucchito mahāseṭṭhi āha – ‘‘sakalauposathakammaṃ na hoti, upaḍḍhakammaṃ pana hoti, uposathiko hotū’’ti . Kammakāro bhattaṃ abhuñjitvā mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā uposathiko hutvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā nipajji. Tassa āhāraparikkhīṇakāyassa rattiṃ vāto kuppi. So paccūsasamaye kālaṃ katvā upaḍḍhauposathakammanissandena mahāvaṭṭaniaṭaviyaṃ nigrodharukkhe devaputto hutvā nibbatti. So taṃ pavattiṃ isīnaṃ ārocesi.
仙人们问道:“您为我们宣说过去从未听闻的佛、法、僧,难道佛陀真的出现于世了吗?”天子回答:“是的,尊者,出现了。”仙人们又问:“如今世尊住在何处?”天子说:“尊者,在舍卫城附近的祇园精舍。”仙人们便说:“诸位暂且留步,我们去拜见彼世尊。”于是他们满怀欢喜地启程,一路辗转来到了憍赏弥城。城中的大富长者听说“仙人们来了”,便出城相迎,并邀请道:“尊者,明日请接受我们的供养。”第二天,便为仙人们举办了盛大的布施。仙人们用完斋饭后,便告辞说要离开。长者们问道:“尊者,你们往日来此,总要住上一两个月,甚至三四个月才走。为何这次昨日方至,今日就说要离去呢?”仙人们答言:“居士,的确如此,但如今佛陀已出现于世。而生命无常,死期无法预知,因此我们急于赶路。”长者便说:“若如此,尊者,我们也一同随行吧。”仙人们道:“诸位在家人队伍庞大,还请留步,我们先行一步。”于是他们启程上路,途中几乎不作停歇,以最快的速度赶至舍卫城,径往祇园精舍,来到世尊身边。听闻世尊甘露妙法后,他们全部显示巴利原文
Isayo tumhehi mayaṃ buddho, dhammo, saṅghoti asutapubbaṃ sāvitā, uppanno nu kho loke buddhoti? Āma, bhante, uppannoti. Idāni kuhiṃ vasatīti? Sāvatthiṃ nissāya jetavane, bhanteti. Isayo tiṭṭhatha tāva tumhe mayaṃ satthāraṃ passissāmāti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā nikkhamitvā anupubbena kosambinagaraṃ sampāpuṇiṃsu. Mahāseṭṭhino, ‘‘isayo āgatā’’ti paccuggamanaṃ katvā, ‘‘sve amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhatha, bhante’’ti nimantetvā punadivase isigaṇassa mahādānaṃ adaṃsu. Isayo bhuñjitvāva gacchāmāti āpucchiṃsu. Tumhe, bhante, aññasmiṃ kāle ekampi māsaṃ dvepi tayopi cattāropi māse vasitvā gacchatha. Imasmiṃ pana vāre hiyyo āgantvā ajjeva gacchāmāti vadatha, kimidanti? Āma gahapatayo buddho loke uppanno, na kho pana sakkā jīvitantarāyo vidituṃ, tena mayaṃ turitā gacchāmāti. Tena hi, bhante, mayampi gacchāma, amhehi saddhiṃyeva gacchathāti. Tumhe agāriyā nāma mahājaṭā, tiṭṭhatha tumhe, mayaṃ puretaraṃ gamissāmāti nikkhamitvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne dvepi divasāni avasitvā turitagamaneneva sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanavihāre satthu santikameva agamaṃsu. Satthu madhuradhammakathaṃ sutvā sabbeva pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.
那三位长者亦各以五百辆牛车,满载酥油、蜂蜜、糖浆等物,以及精致的细布等,从憍赏弥出发,一路抵达舍卫城。他们在祇园精舍附近扎下营地,然后前往世尊跟前,顶礼、问讯已毕,退坐一面。世尊为这三位好友宣说了甘露般的妙法。他们内心生起殊胜的喜悦,便邀请世尊,于次日举办了盛大的布施。随后又再次邀请,隔日再作供养……就这样,他们连续行施了半个月,而后跪拜于世尊足下恳求:“请您垂允前往我们的地方吧。”世尊对他们说:“居士们,诸如来乐于栖止于空寂之处。”长者们领会了其中含义,知道这已算作允许,心想:“世尊已应允了我们。”于是他们向拥有十力的世尊顶礼后,便告辞离去。在返程途中,他们每走一由旬便建造一座寺院,一路造着寺院回到了憍赏弥,并宣告:“佛陀已经出世。”随后,三人又各自在自己的园林中,花费巨资为世尊建造了居住的精舍。其中,由库库塔长者建造的,名为鸡园;由帕瓦利卡长者在芒果林中建造的,名为波波利庵婆林;由瞿师罗长者建造的,则称为瞿师罗园。这里所说“在瞿师罗长者建造的园林中”,正是针对这一情况而说。显示巴利原文
Tepi tayo seṭṭhino pañcahi pañcahi sakaṭasatehi sappimadhuphāṇitādīni ceva paṭṭunnadukūlādīni ca ādāya kosambito nikkhamitvā anupubbena sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanasāmante khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Satthā tiṇṇampi sahāyakānaṃ madhuradhammakathaṃ kathesi. Te balavasomanassajātā satthāraṃ nimantetvā punadivase mahādānaṃ adaṃsu. Puna nimantetvā punadivaseti evaṃ aḍḍhamāsaṃ dānaṃ datvā, ‘‘amhākaṃ janapadaṃ āgamanāya paṭiññaṃ dethā’’ti pādamūle nipajjiṃsu. Bhagavā, ‘‘suññāgāre kho gahapatayo tathāgatā abhiramantī’’ti āha. Ettāvatā paṭiññā dinnā nāma hotīti gahapatayo sallakkhetvā dinnā no bhagavatā paṭiññāti dasabalaṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā antarāmagge yojane yojane ṭhāne vihāraṃ kāretvā anupubbena kosambiṃ patvā, ‘‘loke buddho uppanno’’ti kathayiṃsu. Tayopi janā attano attano ārāme mahantaṃ dhanapariccāgaṃ katvā bhagavato vasanatthāya vihāre kārāpayiṃsu. Tattha kukkuṭaseṭṭhinā kārito kukkuṭārāmo nāma ahosi. Pāvārikaseṭṭhinā ambavane kārito pāvārikambavano nāma ahosi. Ghositena kārito ghositārāmo nāma ahosi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ghositaseṭṭhinā kārite ārāme’’ti.
“争论者”等的释义如下:争吵的前奏,名为“争论”,生起了这种前奏者,即称为“争论者”。因互相推搡等行为,致使冲突达到顶点,由此爆发了争吵者,称为“争吵者”。彼此说违逆对方的话,即是“争议”,陷入这种争议者,称为“陷入争议者”。“以口舌”即是以话语作刺;“刺伤”则是以言语去戳痛对方。他们既不能互相使对方明白,也不接受对方的劝说——也就是说,即便将义理和理由陈述出来,也不会让彼此知悉。即使有人尝试说服,对方也不接纳那种规劝,即不愿意了解,这便是此处所要表达的意思。对于“使理解”一词,其义理亦是如此,且此处的“使理解”,实为“说服”的同义词。那么,他们为何会成为争论者呢?其实,只是因为一件极为微小的事情。显示巴利原文
Bhaṇḍanajātātiādīsu kalahassa pubbabhāgo bhaṇḍanaṃ nāma, taṃ jātaṃ etesanti bhaṇḍanajātā. Hatthaparāmāsādivasena matthakaṃ patto kalaho jāto etesanti kalahajātā. Viruddhabhūtaṃ vādanti vivādaṃ, taṃ āpannāti vivādāpannā. Mukhasattīhīti vācāsattīhi. Vitudantāti vijjhantā. Te na ceva aññamaññaṃ saññāpenti na ca saññattiṃ upentīti te atthañca kāraṇañca dassetvā neva aññamaññaṃ jānāpenti. Sacepi saññāpetuṃ ārabhanti, tathāpi saññattiṃ na upenti, jānituṃ na icchantīti attho. Nijjhattiyāpi eseva nayo. Ettha ca nijjhattīti saññattivevacanamevetaṃ. Kasmā panete bhaṇḍanajātā ahesunti? Appamattakena kāraṇena.
据说有两位比丘住在同一座寺院里:一位是持律者,一位是经师。有一天,经师比丘进入厕所,将用剩的净水留在水器里便出来了。持律者随后进去,看见那水,出来便问那位比丘:“贤友,这水是你留下的吗?”“是的,贤友。”“你不知道这样做是犯戒吗?”“不知道,贤友。”“贤友,这样做是犯戒的。”“若是犯戒,我愿发露忏悔。”“然而,贤友,若非故意,于心不留意时所作,则不算犯戒。”经师比丘由此便对这项犯戒生起了“这并不犯”的见解。显示巴利原文
Dve kira bhikkhū ekasmiṃ āvāse vasanti vinayadharo ca suttantiko ca. Tesu suttantiko bhikkhu ekadivasaṃ vaccakuṭiṃ paviṭṭho ācamanaudakāvasesaṃ bhājane ṭhapetvāva nikkhami. Vinayadharo pacchā paviṭṭho taṃ udakaṃ disvā nikkhamitvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ pucchi, āvuso, tayā idaṃ udakaṃ ṭhapitanti? Āma, āvusoti. Tvamettha āpattibhāvaṃ na jānāsīti? Āma na jānāmīti. Hoti, āvuso, ettha āpattīti. Sace hoti desessāmīti. Sace pana te, āvuso, asañcicca asatiyā kataṃ, natthi te āpattīti. So tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi ahosi.
持律者便对自己的弟子们说:“这位经师犯了戒,却浑然不知。”那些弟子见到经师的弟子们,便说:“你们的亲教师犯了戒,却连犯戒的状态都认不清。”那些弟子回去禀告了自己的亲教师。亲教师说:“这位持律者先前说‘不犯’,现在又说‘犯’,他可是妄语者。”那些弟子又回去说:“你们的亲教师才是妄语者。”就这样,双方的口角愈演愈烈。基于此事,才有了后面的那番话。显示巴利原文
Vinayadharo attano nissitakānaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ suttantiko āpattiṃ āpajjamānopi na jānātī’’ti ārocesi. Te tassa nissitake disvā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ upajjhāyo āpattiṃ āpajjitvāpi āpattibhāvaṃ na jānātī’’ti āhaṃsu. Te gantvā attano upajjhāyassa ārocesuṃ. So evamāha – ‘‘ayaṃ vinayadharo pubbe ‘anāpattī’ti vatvā idāni ‘āpattī’ti vadati, musāvādī eso’’ti. Te gantvā, ‘‘tumhākaṃ upajjhāyo musāvādī’’ti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ kalahaṃ vaḍḍhayiṃsu, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“禀告世尊”这句话,指的就是那位比丘向世尊说了:“尊者,在此地,憍赏弥的比丘们生起了争论……”等这番话。他这样做,既非出于个人偏爱,也非为了制造分裂,而完全是出于对僧团利益的关切与慈悯。据说,这位比丘是一位能够促成和合的人,因此他心中思忖:“这些比丘已经生起争论,单凭我或其他比丘都无法令他们和合。这不含天神在内的世间,唯有那位无敌者世尊,或许能亲自前往,或是将他们唤至跟前,开示包含忍辱与慈爱的六和合法,从而促成和合。”正是出于这种希望对僧团有所利益、有所慈悯的心,他才前去禀告了世尊。显示巴利原文
Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti etaṃ, ‘‘idha, bhante, kosambiyaṃ bhikkhū bhaṇḍanajātā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tañca kho neva piyakamyatāya na bhedādhippāyena, atha kho atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya. Sāmaggikārako kiresa bhikkhu, tasmāssa etadahosi – ‘‘yathā ime bhikkhū vivādaṃ āraddhā, na sakkā mayā, nāpi aññena bhikkhunā samaggā kātuṃ, appeva nāma sadevake loke appaṭipuggalo bhagavā sayaṃ vā gantvā, attano vā santikaṃ pakkosāpetvā etesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ khantimettāpaṭisaṃyuttaṃ sāraṇīyadhammadesanaṃ kathetvā sāmaggiṃ kareyyā’’ti atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya gantvā avoca.
492 “诸比丘,有这六种法,是可忆念的(sāraṇīyā)”:前面是以争吵与争论为缘起而展开的教说,至此引出这六种可忆念法。此《憍赏弥经》便是这样随其内在关联而次第说法的。其中,“可忆念”是指那些值得常常忆持,纵使历经久远也不应忘失的法。若有人圆满这些法,能令同梵行者(sabrahmacārī)生起喜爱,故称“能生喜爱”;能令他们生起尊重,故称“能生尊重”。经文中的“为摄受”意为这是为了摄护、提携而说;“为无诤”是为了不起口角而说;“为和合”是为了达成和合的状态而说;“为同一性”是为了达到全体一致、无有分歧的境地而说。这些法确实能带来这样的利益。“慈身业(mettaṃ kāyakamma)”即是依于慈心所当行的身业。慈语业与慈意业,也应同样了知。这里虽然是依比丘众而说,但在家众也同样可以具足。对比丘而言,例如以慈心履行诸多律仪行法,便称为慈身业。对在家众而言,为了礼敬佛塔、礼敬菩提树,或是为了邀请显示巴利原文
492.Chayime, bhikkhave, dhammā sāraṇīyāti heṭṭhā kalahabhaṇḍanavasena desanā āraddhā. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne cha sāraṇīyā dhammā āgatāti evamidaṃ kosambiyasuttaṃ yathānusandhināva gataṃ hoti. Tattha sāraṇīyāti saritabbayuttā addhāne atikkantepi na pamussitabbā. Yo te dhamme pūreti, taṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyaṃ karontīti piyakaraṇā. Garuṃ karontīti garukaraṇā. Saṅgahāyāti saṅgahaṇatthāya. Avivādāyāti avivādanatthāya. Sāmaggiyāti samaggabhāvatthāya . Ekībhāvāyāti ekībhāvatthāya ninnānākaraṇāya. Saṃvattantīti bhavanti. Mettaṃ kāyakammanti mettacittena kattabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Vacīkammamanokammesupi eseva nayo. Imāni bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni, gihīsupi labbhantiyeva. Bhikkhūnañhi mettacittena ābhisamācārikadhammapūraṇaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya bodhivandanatthāya saṅghanimantanatthāya gamanaṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhe bhikkhū disvā paccuggamanaṃ pattapaṭiggahaṇaṃ āsanapaññāpanaṃ anugamananti evamādikaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma.
对比丘来说,以慈心为他人解说戒律的制立与学处(sikkhāpada)、开示禅修业处、宣说佛法,乃至讲说三藏佛语(buddhavacana),这些便称为慈语业。对在家众来说,当他们在说这样的话时:“我们去礼敬佛塔,去礼敬菩提树,去听法,去供灯、供花作供养,我们领受三善行而奉行,我们布施食筹等,布施雨安居的资具,今天我们要向僧团供养四种资具,我们邀请僧团。你们准备好嚼食等食物,铺设座位,备好饮用水,去迎接僧团到来,让他们坐在已铺设好的座位上,欢喜踊跃地作服务(veyyāvacca)吧。”——像这类言语,在说的当下,即称为慈语业。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūnaṃ mettacittena ācārapaññattisikkhāpadaṃ, kammaṭṭhānakathanaṃ dhammadesanā tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Gihīnañca, ‘‘cetiyavandanatthāya gacchāma, bodhivandanatthāya gacchāma, dhammassavanaṃ karissāma, padīpamālāpupphapūjaṃ karissāma, tīṇi sucaritāni samādāya vattissāma, salākabhattādīni dassāma, vassāvāsikaṃ dassāma, ajja saṅghassa cattāro paccaye dassāma, saṅghaṃ nimantetvā khādanīyādīni saṃvidahatha, āsanāni paññāpetha, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetha, saṅghaṃ paccuggantvā ānetha, paññattāsane nisīdāpetvā chandajātā ussāhajātā veyyāvaccaṃ karothā’’tiādikathanakāle mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma.
比丘们清晨起身,料理身体之事,并做好塔院等处所的义务后,在僻静处坐下,内心诚恳祝愿:“愿此寺院中的诸比丘快乐,无怨敌,无苦恼。”这便称为慈意业。在家众内心祝愿:“愿诸位圣者快乐,无怨敌,无苦恼。”这同样称为慈意业。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhūnaṃ pātova uṭṭhāya sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni ca katvā vivittāsane nisīditvā, ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū sukhī hontu, averā abyāpajjhā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ ‘‘ayyā sukhī hontu, averā abyāpajjhā’’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.
“当面与背后”:即于面前及于背后。其中,对新学比丘而言,在做衣等事务时上前相助、结成同伴,名为面前的慈身业;对上座比丘们来说,洗脚、礼敬、扇风等一切合宜的敬重行为,也是面前的慈身业。无论新学还是上座,见到他人随意放置的木器等物品时,不生轻视,如同自己放的一般将其收拾归位,则为背后的慈身业。以“天授长老”、“帝须长老”这样带着敬意的称呼交谈,是面前的慈语业。而在精舍中不见其人时,探问:“我们的天授长老在哪儿呢?”“我们的帝须长老什么时候才会回来呢?”——这种充满怀念与关切的话语,是背后的慈语业。用被慈爱润泽的双眼,以极其清净喜悦的面容注视对方,是面前的慈意业。内心作意:“愿天授长老、帝须长老健康无病”,是背后的慈意业。显示巴利原文
Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ca parammukhā ca. Tattha navakānaṃ cīvarakammādīsu sahāyabhāvūpagamanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Therānaṃ pana pādadhovanavandanabījanadānādibhedampi sabbaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Ubhayehipi dunnikkhittānaṃ dārubhaṇḍādīnaṃ tesu avamaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittānaṃ viya paṭisāmanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Devatthero tissattheroti evaṃ paggayha vacanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Vihāre asantaṃ pana paripucchantassa, kuhiṃ amhākaṃ devatthero, amhākaṃ tissatthero kadā nu kho āgamissatīti evaṃ mamāyanavacanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Mettāsinehasiniddhāni pana nayanāni ummīletvā suppasannena mukhena olokanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Devatthero, tissatthero arogo hotu appābādhoti samannāharaṇaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.
“利养”:指所得到的衣服等资具。“如法”:指避免了欺诈等邪命,通过如法、平等的乞食行仪而获得。“乃至仅入钵之量”:是说哪怕只得到一点点,最终落入钵中、在钵内的那两三汤匙的乞食。“不分与而受用者”:这里有两种分与,名为“物品分与”和“人别分与”。其中,以“我会给这么多,不给那么多”的想法来区分,名为“物品分与”;而以“我会给这个人,不给那个人”的想法来区分,则名为“人别分与”。不作这两种区分,只受用不加分别的食物的人,便称为“不分与而受用者”。显示巴利原文
Lābhāti cīvarādayo laddhapaccayā. Dhammikāti kuhanādibhedaṃ micchājīvaṃ vajjetvā dhammena samena bhikkhācariyavattena uppannā. Antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampīti pacchimakoṭiyā patte pariyāpannaṃ pattassa antogataṃ dvattikaṭacchubhikkhāmattampi. Appaṭivibhattabhogīti ettha dve paṭivibhattāni nāma āmisapaṭivibhattaṃ puggalapaṭivibhattañca. Tattha, ‘‘ettakaṃ dassāmi, ettakaṃ na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ āmisapaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. ‘‘Asukassa dassāmi, asukassa na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ pana puggalapaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. Tadubhayampi akatvā yo appaṭivibhattaṃ bhuñjati, ayaṃ appaṭivibhattabhogī nāma.
“与持戒的同梵行者共受用者”:此处,共受用者的特征是:无论得到怎样精致的食物,既不会抱着以利养换利养的企图去送给在家人,也不会自己受用;他在接受供养时,内心就这样想:“愿此物与僧团共享”,带回后便敲击犍椎,然后才受用,把食物看作是僧团的共有物。那么,这六随念法,谁能圆满、谁不能圆满呢?首先,破戒者不能圆满,因为持戒者不会受用其所有物;而戒行清净、不违越行仪的比丘,则能够圆满。显示巴利原文
Sīlavantehisabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogīti ettha sādhāraṇabhogino idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ labbhati, taṃ taṃ neva lābhena lābhaṃ jigīsanāmukhena gihīnaṃ deti, na attanā paribhuñjati; paṭiggaṇhantova saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti gahetvā gaṇḍiṃ paharitvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ saṅghasantakaṃ viya passati. Idaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammaṃ ko pūreti, ko na pūretīti? Dussīlo tāva na pūreti. Na hi tassa santakaṃ sīlavantā gaṇhanti. Parisuddhasīlo pana vattaṃ akhaṇḍento pūreti.
此处的仪轨如下:若比丘作指定布施,将食物给予母亲、父亲、老师、亲教师等,此仅是将施物给予了应施者,并不成就随念法,只称为“护持牵挂”。随念法唯于断除牵挂者方为相应。然而,作指定施时,应施与病人、看护者、客比丘、行脚比丘,以及尚不知取用僧伽梨与钵的新出家者。若施予他们后仍有剩余,应从长老座起不分平等地分布,而是随各人所取而给与。若食物犹有剩余,便再行乞食,从长老座起,将所得精食一一送出,余下者方才自用。经文既说“施与持戒者”,故不施破戒者亦为开许。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ vattaṃ – yo hi odissakaṃ katvā mātu vā pitu vā ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ vā deti, so dātabbaṃ deti, sāraṇīyadhammo panassa na hoti, palibodhajagganaṃ nāma hoti. Sāraṇīyadhammo hi muttapalibodhasseva vaṭṭati, tena pana odissakaṃ dentena gilānagilānupaṭṭhākaāgantukagamikānañceva navapabbajitassa ca saṅghāṭipattaggahaṇaṃ ajānantassa dātabbaṃ. Etesaṃ datvā avasesaṃ therāsanato paṭṭhāya thokaṃ thokaṃ adatvā yo yattakaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa tattakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Avasiṭṭhe asati puna piṇḍāya caritvā therāsanato paṭṭhāya yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ, taṃ taṃ datvā sesaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ, ‘‘sīlavantehī’’ti vacanato dussīlassa adātumpi vaṭṭati.
然而,此随念法在学修有素的僧团中易得圆满,在未经训练的僧团中则不然。因为,在学修有素的僧团中,若有比丘从别处得到食物,他便不再取用;纵使别处毫无所得,也仅取用合宜之量,而不多取。再者,纵使比丘如此反复外出乞食,并将每次所得不断分与,此随念法也须满十二年方得圆满,不可短于此。倘若到了第十二年,某位随念法圆满的比丘将满盛饭团的钵置于斋堂,自己前去沐浴,此时僧团长老问:“这是谁的钵?”有人答:“是那位随念圆满者的。”长老便说:“取来。”随后将钵中所有饭团集起,分与大众食尽,仅留空钵。那位比丘回来,见到空钵,心里便想:“他们竟一点都没留给我,全都吃了。”由此生起忧恼。如是,随念法便遭破坏,他又必须再修十二年方能重圆,犹如外道的别住法,一旦破损,即须重圆。然而,若当时他心生喜悦,想道:“这真是我大得利养,真是我大善利啊!同梵行者竟可不告而取,享我钵中之食。”那么,对他而言,随念法方为真实圆满。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammo susikkhitāya parisāya supūro hoti, no asikkhitāya parisāya. Susikkhitāya hi parisāya yo aññato labhati, so na gaṇhāti, aññato alabhantopi pamāṇayuttameva gaṇhāti, na atirekaṃ. Ayañca pana sāraṇīyadhammo evaṃ punappunaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā laddhaṃ laddhaṃ dentassāpi dvādasahi vassehi pūrati, na tato oraṃ. Sace hi dvādasamepi vasse sāraṇīyadhammapūrako piṇḍapātapūraṃ pattaṃ āsanasālāyaṃ ṭhapetvā nahāyituṃ gacchati, saṅghatthero ca kasseso pattoti? Sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassāti vutte – ‘‘āharatha na’’nti sabbaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ vicāretvā bhuñjitvā ca rittapattaṃ ṭhapeti. Atha so bhikkhu rittapattaṃ disvā, ‘‘mayhaṃ asesetvāva paribhuñjiṃsū’’ti domanassaṃ uppādeti, sāraṇīyadhammo bhijjati, puna dvādasa vassāni pūretabbo hoti, titthiyaparivāsasadiso hesa. Sakiṃ khaṇḍe jāte puna pūretabbova. Yo pana, ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me, yassa me pattagataṃ anāpucchāva sabrahmacārī paribhuñjantī’’ti somanassaṃ janeti, tassa puṇṇo nāma hoti.
如是成就随念法者,即无嫉妒与悭吝,为众人所爱念,资具易于获得;纵将钵中食物分施,亦不减少;于分配资具之时,常得最上之分;若值怖畏或饥馑,诸天亦殷勤为之守护。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pūritasāraṇīyadhammassa pana neva issā, na macchariyaṃ hoti, so manussānaṃ piyo hoti, sulabhapaccayo; pattagatamassa dīyamānampi na khīyati, bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ labhati, bhaye vā chātake vā sampatte devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjanti.
这里有一些事例:据说,住在勒那山的帝须长老,居于大吉里村附近。一次,五十位大长老欲往那竭岛礼敬塔庙,途中在大吉里村次第乞食,却一无所得,便离开村子。长老进村时见到了他们,问道:“尊者,可有得到食物?”他们答:“我等已乞食过了,贤友。”长老知晓他们空无所得,便说:“尊者,请在此稍候,等我回来。”他们说:“贤友,我们五十人连沾湿钵底的一点食物也未得到。”长老说:“尊者,久住当地的人自有其力,即使乞不到食,也懂得出行乞食的实际状况。”大长老们于是便在那里等候。长老走进村子,就在村口第一家,一位大近事女已备好乳饭,正朝长老的方向张望。长老刚到门口,她便盛满他的钵,虔心供养。长老持此食物来到长老们面前,对僧团长老说:“尊者,请用。”僧团长老心想:“我们这么多人一无所得,他却这么快就持食而归,这是怎么回事?”于是便察看其他比丘的神色。长老从他们的表情便明白了状况,说道:“这是如法平等得来的团食,请尽管取用,尊者,无需顾虑。”于是便从首座开始,让所有比丘都取够了足量,最显示巴利原文
Tatrimāni vatthūni – leṇagirivāsī tissatthero kira mahāgirigāmaṃ upanissāya vasati. Paññāsa mahātherā nāgadīpaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya gacchantā girigāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā nikkhamiṃsu. Thero pavisanto te disvā pucchi – ‘‘laddhaṃ, bhante’’ti? Vicarimhā, āvusoti. So aladdhabhāvaṃ ñatvā āha – ‘‘yāvāhaṃ, bhante, āgacchāmi, tāva idheva hothā’’ti. Mayaṃ, āvuso, paññāsa janā pattatemanamattampi na labhimhāti. Nevāsikā nāma, bhante, paṭibalā honti, alabhantāpi bhikkhācāramaggasabhāvaṃ jānantīti. Therā āgamiṃsu. Thero gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dhurageheyeva mahāupāsikā khīrabhattaṃ sajjetvā theraṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā therassa dvāraṃ sampattasseva pattaṃ pūretvā adāsi. So taṃ ādāya therānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante’’ti saṅghattheramāha. Thero, ‘‘amhehi ettakehi kiñci na laddhaṃ, ayaṃ sīghameva gahetvā āgato, kiṃ nu kho’’ti sesānaṃ mukhaṃ olokesi. Thero olokanākāreneva ñatvā – ‘‘dhammena samena laddhapiṇḍapāto, nikkukkuccā gaṇhatha bhante’’tiādito paṭṭhāya sabbesaṃ yāvadatthaṃ datvā attanāpi yāvadatthaṃ bhuñji.
饭食毕,长老们问他:“贤友,你是什么时候证得出世间法的?”“尊者,我并没有出世间法。”“那你是得到禅那了吗?”“这也没有,尊者。”“那么,贤友,莫非你用的是神通?”“尊者,我所圆满的是六随念法。自从我圆满此法以来,就算有十万位比丘,我钵中的食物也绝不会耗尽。”“善哉,善哉,真是一位贤者,这实在与您相应。”这是关于“钵中之食不耗尽”的事例。显示巴利原文
Atha naṃ bhattakiccāvasāne therā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kadā, āvuso, lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhī’’ti? Natthi me, bhante, lokuttaradhammoti. Jhānalābhīsi, āvusoti? Etampi me, bhante, natthīti. Nanu, āvuso, pāṭihāriyanti? Sāraṇīyadhammo me, bhante, pūrito, tassa me dhammassa pūritakālato paṭṭhāya sacepi bhikkhusatasahassaṃ hoti, pattagataṃ na khīyatīti. Sādhu sādhu, sappurisa, anucchavikamidaṃ tuyhanti. Idaṃ tāva pattagataṃ na khīyatīti ettha vatthu.
还是这位长老,有一次在支提山举行大山庄严大供养时,他前往施物的处所,问道:“此处最好的物品是什么?”有人答道:“有两件衣料,尊者。”长老便说:“这些将会是我的。”一位大臣听闻后,去禀告国王:“有一年轻比丘如此说。”国王道:“年轻比丘的心念便是如此,上座长老们才适宜用细软的衣料。”国王心想“应当供养上座们”,便把两件衣料放在了一边。等到比丘僧团依序站立,国王开始供养时,放在最上面的那两件衣料却不落在手上,其他的衣料反而落到了手里。待到那位年轻比丘上前受供时,衣料便自动落在了他的手中。国王将衣料放在比丘手中后,看了看大臣的脸,然后请年轻比丘入座,完成了供养。供养僧众结束,待大众散去后,国王亲自坐到年轻比丘身边,问道:“尊者,您是什么时候证得此法的?”那位比丘依然如前表示并没有,他答道:“大王,我并没有出世间法。”“尊者,您之前不是说过吗?”“是的,大王,我是六随念法的圆满者。自从我圆满此法以来,在施物分配之处,最好的那份自然就会归我所有。”“善哉,善哉,尊者,这实在与您相应。”显示巴利原文
Ayameva pana thero cetiyapabbate giribhaṇḍamahāpūjāya dānaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne kiṃ varabhaṇḍa’’nti pucchati. Dve sāṭakā, bhanteti. Ete mayhaṃ pāpuṇissantīti. Taṃ sutvā amacco rañño ārocesi – ‘‘eko daharo evaṃ vadatī’’ti. ‘‘Daharassevaṃ cittaṃ, mahātherānaṃ pana sukhumasāṭakā vaṭṭantī’’ti vatvā, ‘‘mahātherānaṃ dassāmī’’ti ṭhapesi. Tassa bhikkhusaṅghe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhite dentassa matthake ṭhapitāpi te sāṭakā hatthaṃ nārohanti, aññeva ārohanti. Daharassa dānakāle pana hatthaṃ āruḷhā. So tassa hatthe ṭhapetvā amaccassa mukhaṃ oloketvā daharaṃ nisīdāpetvā dānaṃ datvā saṅghaṃ vissajjetvā daharassa santike nisīditvā, ‘‘kadā, bhante, imaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhitthā’’ti āha. So pariyāyenapi asantaṃ avadanto, ‘‘natthi mayhaṃ, mahārāja, lokuttaradhammo’’ti āha. Nanu, bhante, pubbeva avacutthāti? Āma, mahārāja, sāraṇīyadhammapūrako ahaṃ, tassa me dhammassa pūritakālato paṭṭhāya bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātīti. Sādhu sādhu, bhante, anucchavikamidaṃ tumhākanti vanditvā pakkāmi. Idaṃ bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātīti ettha vatthu.
在婆罗门提萨的恐怖事件中,住在兄弟村的居民们未告知长老尼便逃走了。清晨时分,长老尼对年少的比丘尼们说:“村子里异常安静,你们去查探一下。”那些比丘尼前去查看,发现所有人皆已离去,便回来禀报长老尼。她听后说道:“你们不要为他们的离去而忧虑,应精进于自己的课业、提问与如理作意。”说罢,到了乞食的时候,她搭好袈裟,与另外十一位比丘尼同行,来到村口的榕树下安立。栖居在那棵树上的天神供养了这十二位比丘尼团食,而后说道:“尊者们,不必前往他处乞食,日后请常来此处。”然而,长老尼有一位年幼的弟弟,人称龙长老。他心想:“此处过于危险,无法再安住下去,我们当往对岸去。”于是带着另外十一人离开了自己原本的住处,来到兄弟村,打算见长老尼一面便离去。长老尼听闻“长老们来了”,便前往他们的所在,问道:“诸位尊者,有何事?”龙长老便将所发生的情况叙说了一遍。长老尼说:“今日且在寺院中安住一宿,明日再动身。”长老们便去了寺院。显示巴利原文
Brāhmaṇatissabhaye pana bhātaragāmavāsino nāgattheriyā anārocetvāva palāyiṃsu. Therī paccūsakāle, ‘‘ativiya appanigghoso gāmo, upadhāretha tāvā’’ti daharabhikkhuniyo āha. Tā gantvā sabbesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā āgamma theriyā ārocesuṃ. Sā sutvā, ‘‘mā tumhe tesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ cintayittha, attano uddesaparipucchāyonisomanasikāresuyeva yogaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā bhikkhācāravelāya pārupitvā attadvādasamā gāmadvāre nigrodharukkhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Rukkhe adhivatthā devatā dvādasannampi bhikkhunīnaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ datvā, ‘‘ayye, aññattha mā gacchatha, niccaṃ idheva ethā’’ti āha. Theriyā pana kaniṭṭhabhātā nāgatthero nāma atthi. So, ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ, na sakkā idha yāpetuṃ, paratīraṃ gamissāmāti attadvādasamova attano vasanaṭṭhānā nikkhanto theriṃ disvā gamissāmī’’ti bhātaragāmaṃ āgato. Therī, ‘‘therā āgatā’’ti sutvā tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā, kiṃ ayyāti pucchi. So taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhi. Sā, ‘‘ajja ekadivasaṃ vihāreyeva vasitvā sveva gamissathā’’ti āha. Therā vihāraṃ agamaṃsu.
次日,长老尼在树下乞食后,来到长老身边,说道:“请用这些团食。”长老说:“长老尼,会够的。”便默然站立一旁。长老尼说:“具法的善男子,请用这些团食,莫生疑虑。”长老依然说:“长老尼,会够的。”她便取过钵来抛向空中,钵便悬停在虚空中。长老心中思惟:“纵使它停在七棵棕榈树那样高的地方,也依然是比丘尼的食物。既然被称为‘长老尼’,恐怖也并非恒常存在;待到恐怖平息之后,在讲说圣种之时,若内心被人如此指责:‘那位常乞食支的比丘是靠吃比丘尼的食物过活的’,我将无法安忍。比丘尼们,你们当保持不放逸。”说完这番话,他便上路了。显示巴利原文
Therī punadivase rukkhamūle piṇḍāya caritvā theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘imaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti āha. Thero, ‘‘vaṭṭissati therī’’ti vatvā tuṇhī aṭṭhāsi. Dhammiko tātā piṇḍapāto kukkuccaṃ akatvā paribhuñjathāti. Vaṭṭissati therīti. Sā pattaṃ gahetvā ākāse khipi, patto ākāse aṭṭhāsi. Thero, ‘‘sattatālamatte ṭhitampi bhikkhunībhattameva, therīti vatvā bhayaṃ nāma sabbakālaṃ na hoti, bhaye vūpasante ariyavaṃsaṃ kathayamāno, ‘bho piṇḍapātika bhikkhunībhattaṃ bhuñjitvā vītināmayitthā’ti cittena anuvadiyamāno santhambhetuṃ na sakkhissāmi, appamattā hotha theriyo’’ti maggaṃ āruhi.
树神也在心中思量:“若是长老受用了长老尼手中的团食,我便不令他折返;但若他不受用,我便令他折返。”她怀着这样的心念站立一旁,见长老正要离去,便从树上下来,说道:“尊者,请将钵给我。”接着,她接过钵,将长老带回树下,铺好座位,供养团食,令其用完斋饭并作回向。她就这样照料十二位比丘尼与十二位比丘,长达七年之久。这便是所谓的“天神发起精勤”的实例。在此事之中,那位长老尼正是具足六和敬法的人。显示巴利原文
Rukkhadevatāpi, ‘‘sace thero theriyā hatthato piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjissati, na naṃ nivattessāmi, sace pana na paribhuñjissati, nivattessāmī’’ti cintayamānā ṭhatvā therassa gamanaṃ disvā rukkhā oruyha pattaṃ, bhante, dethāti pattaṃ gahetvā theraṃ rukkhamūlaṃyeva ānetvā āsanaṃ paññāpetvā piṇḍapātaṃ datvā katabhattakiccaṃ paṭiññaṃ kāretvā dvādasa bhikkhuniyo, dvādasa ca bhikkhū satta vassāni upaṭṭhahi. Idaṃ devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjantīti ettha vatthu, tatra hi therī sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā ahosi.
“不破”等:如果一位比丘在七种犯聚的开头或末尾违犯一条学处,他的戒就像布料边缘破损的衣服,称为“破”;如果是在中间违犯,就像布料中间有洞的衣服,称为“穿”;如果是接连违犯两三条,就像牛背上或腹部生出了一片异色——如黑红色之类的斑点,称为“斑”;如果是断断续续地违犯,就像牛身上东一块西一块夹杂着异色小点,称为“杂”。如果所有学处全都未受违犯,这些戒就称为“不破”、“不穿”、“不斑”、“不杂”。再者,这些戒能使人从渴爱的奴役中解脱出来,成就自由的身份,所以称为“自在”;因为被佛陀等智者所称赞,所以称为“智者所赞”;由于不被渴爱和邪见所执取,也不会被任何人指摘说“你曾犯某某戒”,因此称为“不被执取”。它们能够导向近行定或安止定,所以叫做“定之引生”。“以戒同分而住”的意思是:与各处居住的比丘达到同等的戒而共住。因为入流者等圣者的戒,即使他们住在大海的彼岸,或是住在天界,与其他入流者等圣者的戒也是完全一样的,在道相应的戒上并无差别。正是从这个意义上说的。显示巴利原文
Akhaṇḍānītiādīsu yassa sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā sikkhāpadaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti, tassa sīlaṃ pariyante chinnasāṭako viya khaṇḍaṃ nāma. Yassa pana vemajjhe bhinnaṃ, tassa majjhe chiddasāṭako viya chiddaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana paṭipāṭiyā dve tīṇi bhinnāni, tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ vā kucchiyaṃ vā uṭṭhitena visabhāgavaṇṇena kāḷarattādīnaṃ aññataravaṇṇā gāvī viya sabalaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana antarantarā bhinnāni, tassa antarantarā visabhāgabinducitrā gāvī viya kammāsaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana sabbena sabbaṃ abhinnāni, tassa tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni nāma honti. Tāni panetāni taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissabhāvakaraṇato bhujissāni. Buddhādīhi viññūhi pasatthattā viññuppasatthāni. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā, ‘‘idaṃ nāma tvaṃ āpannapubbo’’ti kenaci parāmaṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca aparāmaṭṭhāni. Upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā saṃvattayantīti samādhisaṃvattanikānīti vuccanti. Sīlasāmaññagatoviharatīti tesu tesu disābhāgesu viharantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samānabhāvūpagatasīlo viharati . Sotāpannādīnañhi sīlaṃ samuddantarepi devalokepi vasantānaṃ aññesaṃ sotāpannādīnaṃ sīlena samānameva hoti, natthi maggasīle nānattaṃ, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“此见”是指与道相应的正见。“圣”指无过失。“能出离”是说它能导向出离。“对彼行者”指的是如此修行的人。“为灭尽苦”是为了灭尽一切苦的意思。“以见同分而住”就是达到了见地的平等而共住。“顶”即最上部分。“能总持一切椽”是说能把一切椽子收摄在一起;“能聚合一切椽”是说能把所有椽子连结成一个整体,也就是“集合者”的意思。“那就是屋顶”指的正是被称为尖顶屋屋顶的那个顶。因为五层等殿堂都须靠屋顶才能立起,屋顶一旦塌下,从泥灰开始,其余一切都会随之倒塌,所以这样说。“正如此”的意思是:正如屋顶对于尖顶屋那样,在这些六和敬法中,此圣见亦是最上、能总持、能集合一切善法的那一个,应当这样来理解。显示巴利原文
Yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti maggasampayuttā sammādiṭṭhi. Ariyāti niddosā. Niyyātīti niyyānikā. Takkarassāti yo tathākārī hoti. Dukkhakkhayāyāti sabbadukkhakkhayatthaṃ. Diṭṭhisāmaññagatoti samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ upagato hutvā viharati. Agganti jeṭṭhakaṃ. Sabbagopānasiyo saṅgaṇhātīti saṅgāhikaṃ. Sabbagopānasīnaṃ saṅghāṭaṃ karotīti saṅghāṭanikaṃ. Saṅghāṭaniyanti attho. Yadidaṃ kūṭanti yametaṃ kūṭāgārakaṇṇikāsaṅkhātaṃ kūṭaṃ nāma. Pañcabhūmikādipāsādā hi kūṭabaddhāva tiṭṭhanti. Yasmiṃ patite mattikaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbe patanti. Tasmā evamāha. Evameva khoti yathā kūṭaṃ kūṭāgārassa, evaṃ imesampi sāraṇīyadhammānaṃ yā ayaṃ ariyā diṭṭhi, sā aggā ca saṅgāhikā ca saṅghāṭaniyā cāti daṭṭhabbā.
493 在“比丘们,又如何呢,此见……”这句中,“比丘们,所说这圣的、能出离的、修行它便能正确导向灭尽苦的入流道见”,是在问:它如何、因何原因而导向?“心被缠缚”的意思是:达到这种程度,便称为心仍被缠缚。这一道理在一切处都适用。“我得慢善安立”的意思是:我的慢已很好地安立。“为觉悟诸谛”就是为了觉悟四种圣谛。在“圣”等词语中,由于这种智唯圣者们所有,不是凡夫所得,故称为“圣”;又因为它属于出世间法,只有具备出世间法的人才有,他人没有,故称为“出世间”;因为凡夫完全没有,所以叫做“不与凡夫共”。这一点在所有段落中都是如此。显示巴利原文
493.Kathañca, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti ettha, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti vuttā, sā kathaṃ kena kāraṇena niyyātīti attho. Pariyuṭṭhitacittova hotīti ettāvatāpi pariyuṭṭhitacittoyeva nāma hotīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Suppaṇihitaṃ me mānasanti mayhaṃ cittaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ. Saccānaṃ bodhāyāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ bodhatthāya. Ariyantiādīsu taṃ ñāṇaṃ yasmā ariyānaṃ hoti, na puthujjanānaṃ, tasmā ariyanti vuttaṃ. Yesaṃ pana lokuttaradhammopi atthi, tesaṃyeva hoti, na aññesaṃ, tasmā lokuttaranti vuttaṃ. Puthujjanānaṃ pana abhāvato asādhāraṇaṃ puthujjanehīti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sabbavāresu.
494 “我自得止”,是说我在自心中得到了止。“得寂灭”同理。在此,“止”指心一境性,“寂灭”指烦恼的止息。显示巴利原文
494.Labhāmi paccattaṃ samathanti attano citte samathaṃ labhāmīti attho. Nibbutiyampi eseva nayo. Ettha ca samathoti ekaggatā. Nibbutīti kilesavūpasamo.
495 “于如是之见”,即指这样的入流道见。显示巴利原文
495.Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyāti evarūpāya sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhiyā.
496 “法尔”,指依于自性。“此是法尔”,即这是自性。“出罪显现”,指通过僧团羯磨或通过说法而显现出罪。因为圣弟子犯戒时,于重罪只犯如建造小屋之类,于轻罪只犯如同宿等类,而且只犯非故意的罪,并非故意,犯后亦不覆藏。因此才说“于是他迅速地……”等。“年幼”,指年少。“童子”,指不是年长者。“迟钝”,是由于眼根、耳根等迟钝。“仰卧婴儿”,是由于极为年幼而仰躺,意思是不能右侧卧或左侧卧。“触碰到火炭”,指手或脚触碰到伸向各处的火炭。然而,一般人碰到时手并不会马上烧伤,例如,确实有人用手拿起火炭,一边转动一边走很远。可是婴儿的手脚极其细嫩,仅仅触碰到就会被灼伤,发出“咝”声并迅速抽回,因此这里举婴儿为例。年长者即使被灼也能忍受,而这个人无法忍受,所以也举婴儿为例。“发露”,指如果有能接受发露的同分比丘在场,即使只过了一天一夜也不等待,在夜间只要具备四支,便前往同分比丘的住处如实发露。显示巴利原文
496.Dhammatāyāti sabhāvena. Dhammatā esāti sabhāvo esa. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyatīti saṅghakammavasena vā desanāya vā vuṭṭhānaṃ dissati. Ariyasāvako hi āpattiṃ āpajjanto garukāpattīsu kuṭikārasadisaṃ, lahukāpattīsu sahaseyyādisadisaṃ acittakāpattiṃyeva āpajjati, tampi asañcicca, no sañcicca, āpannaṃ na paṭicchādeti. Tasmā atha kho naṃ khippamevātiādimāha. Daharoti taruṇo. Kumāroti na mahallako. Mandoti cakkhusotādīnaṃ mandatāya mando. Uttānaseyyakoti atidaharatāya uttānaseyyako, dakkhiṇena vā vāmena vā passena sayituṃ na sakkotīti attho. Aṅgāraṃ akkamitvāti ito cito ca pasāritena hatthena vā pādena vā phusitvā. Evaṃ phusantānaṃ pana manussānaṃ na sīghaṃ hattho jhāyati, tathā hi ekacce hatthena aṅgāraṃ gahetvā parivattamānā dūrampi gacchanti. Daharassa pana hatthapādā sukhumālā honti, so phuṭṭhamatteneva dayhamāno cirīti saddaṃ karonto khippaṃ paṭisaṃharati, tasmā idha daharova dassito. Mahallako ca dayhantopi adhivāseti, ayaṃ pana adhivāsetuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmāpi daharova dassito. Desetīti āpattipaṭiggāhake sabhāgapuggale sati ekaṃ divasaṃ vā rattiṃ vā anadhivāsetvā rattiṃ caturaṅgepi tame sabhāgabhikkhuno vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā desetiyeva.
497 “高低之事”指高的事与低的事。“何所当作”是说,像这样说了“我做什么”之后,所应去行的事。这其中,高的事指的是做衣服、染色,在佛塔上涂灰泥,以及在布萨堂、塔庙、菩提树屋中所应做的种种工作等。低的事指的是洗脚、涂油等琐碎小事;或者说,在佛塔上涂灰泥等是高的事,而在同一处煮染料水、取水、清理肠胃、系蔓藤等则是低的事。“发起精勤”指已然进入精勤努力的状态,承担起应做之事。“有热切之期望”即怀有深切的愿望。“食嫩草”指一边拔草一边吃。“回顾小牛”指一再地回头看小牛。如同母牛在林中,小牛从别处来到某处卧下,母牛便不远离躺卧的小牛,只在附近来回走动吃草,然后抬起脖子,一心一意地只注视着小牛。同样地,入流者在办理种种事务时,不论高低,他的心也倾向于那件事,毫不松懈,以炽盛的意愿与深切的期望去行。显示巴利原文
497.Uccāvacānīti uccanīcāni. Kiṃ karaṇīyānīti kiṃ karomīti evaṃ vatvā kattabbakammāni. Tattha uccakammaṃ nāma cīvarassa karaṇaṃ rajanaṃ cetiye sudhākammaṃ uposathāgāracetiyagharabodhigharesu kattabbakammanti evamādi. Avacakammaṃ nāma pādadhovanamakkhanādikhuddakakammaṃ, atha vā cetiye sudhākammādi uccakammaṃ nāma. Tattheva kasāvapacanaudakānayanakucchakaraṇa niyyāsabandhanādi avacakammaṃ nāma. Ussukkaṃ āpanno hotīti ussukkabhāvaṃ kattabbataṃ paṭipanno hoti. Tibbāpekkho hotīti bahalapatthano hoti. Thambañcaālumpatīti tiṇañca ālumpamānā khādati. Vacchakañca apacinātīti vacchakañca apaloketi. Taruṇavacchā hi gāvī araññe ekato āgataṃ vacchakaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nipannaṃ pahāya dūraṃ na gacchati, vacchakassa āsannaṭṭhāne caramānā tiṇaṃ ālumpitvā gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā ekantaṃ vacchakameva ca viloketi, evameva sotāpanno uccāvacāni kiṃ karaṇīyāni karonto tanninno hoti, asithilapūrako tibbacchando bahalapatthano hutvāva karoti.
这是那则故事:据说,当大塔庙进行涂灰泥工程时,有一位圣弟子一手拿着灰浆罐,一手扶着腰,心里想着“我要来涂灰泥”,便登上了塔庙广场。一位身强力壮的比丘走过去,站在长老身旁。长老心想:“若顾念他人,便成障碍。”因此便从此处移到了另一处。那比丘也跟到了那里。长老又移到别处,这样换了好几个地方之后,便对那比丘说:“善士,这偌大的塔庙广场,难道就找不到别处可让你安住吗?”但那位比丘仍然没有离开。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ vatthu – mahācetiye kira sudhākamme kariyamāne eko ariyasāvako ekena hatthena sudhābhājanaṃ, ekena kucchaṃ gahetvā sudhākammaṃ karissāmīti cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruḷho. Eko kāyadaḷhibahulo bhikkhu gantvā therassa santike aṭṭhāsi. Thero aññasmiṃ sati papañco hotīti tasmā ṭhānā aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ gato. Sopi bhikkhu tattheva agamāsi. Thero puna aññaṃ ṭhānanti evaṃ katipayaṭṭhāne āgataṃ, – ‘‘sappurisa mahantaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ kiṃ aññasmiṃ ṭhāne okāsaṃ na labhathā’’ti āha. Na itaro pakkāmīti.
498 “具备力量”指具备体力。“用心”指生起需求之心,即成为一个有需求的人。“作意”指放在心里。“以全心专注”指不作任何微小的散乱,以整个心专注。“倾耳”指竖起耳朵。确实,圣弟子们喜爱听闻佛法,他们坐于听法的上首,不会坐着打瞌睡,不会与任何人交谈,也不会心散乱;他们如同在享用不死之法,对听法从不感到餍足,直至曙光升起。因此这样说。显示巴利原文
498.Balatāya samannāgatoti balena samannāgato. Aṭṭhiṃ katvāti atthikabhāvaṃ katvā, atthiko hutvāti attho. Manasikatvāti manasmiṃ karitvā. Sabbacetasā samannāharitvāti appamattakampi vikkhepaṃ akaronto sakalacittena samannāharitvā. Ohitasototi ṭhapitasoto. Ariyasāvakā hi piyadhammassavanā honti, dhammassavanaggaṃ gantvā niddāyamānā vā yena kenaci saddhiṃ sallapamānā vā vikkhittacittā vā na nisīdanti, atha kho amataṃ paribhuñjantā viya atittāva honti dhammassavane, atha aruṇaṃ uggacchati. Tasmā evamāha.
500 「法性善审察」是指自性已被妥善地审察。「为了证悟入流果」是工具格的表述,意思是「以证悟入流果的智慧」。如此「具足七支」,便是以此七种大省察智而具足。这是诸位导师共同的说法。因为出世间道并不存在许多心识刹那的情形。显示巴利原文
500.Dhammatāsusamanniṭṭhā hotīti sabhāvo suṭṭhu samannesito hoti. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyāti karaṇavacanaṃ , sotāpattiphalasacchikatañāṇenāti attho. Evaṃ sattaṅgasamannāgatoti evaṃ imehi sattahi mahāpaccavekkhaṇañāṇehi samannāgato. Ayaṃ tāva ācariyānaṃ samānakathā. Lokuttaramaggo hi bahucittakkhaṇiko nāma natthi.
然而,诡论者却说:不存在仅有单一心识刹那的道,因为经中有「如是修习七年」之说,表明道的修习可有七年之久。他说,烦恼是依七种智而被断除的。应要求他出示经文,他可以肯定找不到其他经典,只会举出这一段:「这是他证得的第一智,这是他证得的第二智……乃至这是他证得的第七智。」然后应问他:「此经是应引导其义,还是了义的呢?」他会说:「是了义的,正如经文所说的那般。」接着应问他:「『法性善审察,是为了证悟入流果』这句是什么意思?」他必定会说:「意思是,是为了证悟入流果。」然后又应问他:「是具道者证果,还是具果者证果?」他如果懂得,会说:「是具果者证果。」随后应这样呵斥他:「诸比丘!如此具足七支的圣弟子,即是入流果具足者。照你这么说,这就成了圣弟子不必修习道,如同青蛙跳跃一般,直接取证果位。不要因为自己拿到一部经,就随意乱说。解答问题的人,应当是在导师身边亲近而住,学习了佛语,通达义理之后,才能作答的。」应当使他信解:「这七种智仅仅是圣弟子的省察智,出世间道并不存在许多心识刹那。显示巴利原文
Vitaṇḍavādī pana ekacittakkhaṇiko nāma maggo natthi, ‘‘evaṃ bhāveyya satta vassānī’’ti hi vacanato sattapi vassāni maggabhāvanā honti. Kilesā pana lahu chijjantā sattahi ñāṇehi chijjantīti vadati. So suttaṃ āharāti vattabbo, addhā aññaṃ suttaṃ apassanto, ‘‘idamassa paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ adhigataṃ hoti, idamassa dutiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ…pe… idamassa sattamaṃ ñāṇaṃ adhigataṃ hotī’’ti imameva āharitvā dassessati. Tato vattabbo kiṃ panidaṃ suttaṃ neyyatthaṃ nītatthanti. Tato vakkhati – ‘‘nītatthatthaṃ, yathāsuttaṃ tatheva attho’’ti. So vattabbo – ‘‘dhammatā susamanniṭṭhā hoti sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyāti ettha ko attho’’ti? Addhā sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyatthoti vakkhati. Tato pucchitabbo, ‘‘maggasamaṅgī phalaṃ sacchikaroti, phalasamaṅgī’’ti. Jānanto, ‘‘phalasamaṅgī sacchikarotī’’ti vakkhati. Tato vattabbo, – ‘‘evaṃ sattaṅgasamannāgato kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako sotāpattiphalasamannāgato hotīti idha maggaṃ abhāvetvā maṇḍūko viya uppatitvā ariyasāvako phalameva gaṇhissati. Mā suttaṃ me laddhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā avaca. Pañhaṃ vissajjentena nāma ācariyasantike vasitvā buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā attharasaṃ viditvā vattabbaṃ hotī’’ti. ‘‘Imāni satta ñāṇāni ariyasāvakassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇāneva, lokuttaramaggo bahucittakkhaṇiko nāma natthi, ekacittakkhaṇikoyevā’’ti saññāpetabbo. Sace sañjānāti sañjānātu. No ce sañjānāti, ‘‘gaccha pātova vihāraṃ pavisitvā yāguṃ pivāhī’’ti uyyojetabbo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第九、《梵天劝请经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Brahmanimantanikasuttavaṇṇanā
501 「如是我闻」,这是《梵天劝请经》。其中所说的「邪恶的恶见」,是指低劣的常见。「这是常」——便是将本是无常的色身梵天住处,执为是常。「恒久」等词都是它的同义词。此中,「恒久」即坚牢,「常住」指永远存在,「唯」指完整无缺,「不死殁法」指有不灭的性质。在「此实在不生」等句中,他是想表达:在此处,没有任何有情会出生、衰老、死亡、殁没或再生。而「更无其他出离」,则是指除了这个色身梵天住处之外,便再无别的出离之道了。就这样,他心中根深柢固的常见便产生了。并且,持这种见解的人,将更高的三禅地、四道、四果以及涅槃,全都否定了。「随无明者」,是指为无明所伴随、具备无明,成为无知、盲昧的人。至于「岂有此理」,则是一个感叹词。显示巴利原文
501.Evaṃme sutanti brahmanimantanikasuttaṃ. Tattha pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti lāmakā sassatadiṭṭhi. Idaṃ niccanti idaṃ saha kāyena brahmaṭṭhānaṃ aniccaṃ ‘‘nicca’’nti vadati. Dhuvādīni tasseva vevacanāni. Tattha dhuvanti thiraṃ. Sassatanti sadā vijjamānaṃ. Kevalanti akhaṇḍaṃ sakalaṃ. Acavanadhammanti acavanasabhāvaṃ. Idañhi na jāyatītiādīsu imasmiṃ ṭhāne koci jāyanako vā jīyanako vā mīyanako vā cavanako vā upapajjanako vā natthīti sandhāya vadati. Ito ca panaññanti ito saha kāyakā brahmaṭṭhānā uttari aññaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma natthīti evamassa thāmagatā sassatadiṭṭhi uppannā hoti. Evaṃvādī pana so upari tisso jhānabhūmiyo cattāro maggā cattāri phalāni nibbānanti sabbaṃ paṭibāhati. Avijjāgatoti avijjāya gato samannāgato aññāṇī andhībhūto. Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.
502 那么,诸比丘,恶魔波旬是怎样见到世尊的呢?据说,他时常坐在自己的宫殿里,心中推察世尊的行踪,心想:“今天沙门乔达摩住在哪个村落或城镇呢?”就在那时,当他这样推察时,便知道:“世尊正依止郁伽镇,住于近住林中。”于是他想:“他到哪儿去了?”见到世尊正前往梵天界,便思量道:“沙门乔达摩正前往梵天界,若任由他在那里说法,令梵天众脱离我的领域,那便不妙了;我须趁早前去阻挠他说法。”于是,他紧随在导师身后,以隐身之形立于梵天众当中。当他知道“导师已经呵斥了婆迦梵天”,便站在梵天那一边去支持他。因此,经文才说:“尔时,诸比丘,恶魔波旬……”显示巴利原文
502.Atha kho, bhikkhave, māro pāpimāti māro kathaṃ bhagavantaṃ addasa? So kira attano bhavane nisīditvā kālena kālaṃ satthāraṃ āvajjeti – ‘‘ajja samaṇo gotamo katarasmiṃ gāme vā nigame vā vasatī’’ti. Imasmiṃ pana kāle āvajjanto, ‘‘ukkaṭṭhaṃ nissāya subhagavane viharatī’’ti ñatvā, ‘‘kattha nu kho gato’’ti olokento brahmalokaṃ gacchantaṃ disvā, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo brahmalokaṃ gacchati, yāva tattha dhammakathaṃ kathetvā brahmagaṇaṃ mama visayā nātikkameti, tāva gantvā dhammadesanāyaṃ vichandaṃ karissāmī’’ti satthu padānupadiko gantvā brahmagaṇassa antare adissamānena kāyena aṭṭhāsi. So, ‘‘satthārā bakabrahmā apasādito’’ti ñatvā brahmuno upatthambho hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā’’ti.
“潜入梵天眷属”,是指进入一位梵天眷属的身体。然而,他无法潜入大梵天或梵辅天的身体。“不要轻侮他”,意思是“不要轻侮这个人”。“阿毗浮”是指已经克服并安住者,也就是最胜者。“不被阿毗浮”,是指不会被其他所征服。“必定”,是表达确定语句的词。“以见力为眼”,表明他能够照见一切。“自在魔”,是指能令所有人随顺自己的意愿而转。“主宰者”,即世间的神主。“造作者、创造者”,即世界的造作者与创造者,意在表明大地、雪山、须弥山、轮围山、大海、日月天子等这一切,都是他所创造的。显示巴利原文
Brahmapārisajjaṃ anvāvisitvāti ekassa brahmapārisajjassa sarīraṃ pavisitvā. Mahābrahmānaṃ pana brahmapurohitānaṃ vā anvāvisituṃ na sakkoti. Metamāsadoti mā etaṃ apasādayittha. Abhibhūti abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhako. Anabhibhūtoti aññehi anabhibhūto. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dassanavasena daso, sabbaṃ passatīti dīpeti. Vasavattīti sabbajanaṃ vase vatteti. Issaroti loke issaro. Kattā nimmātāti lokassa kattā ca nimmātā ca, pathavīhimavantasinerucakkavāḷamahāsamuddacandimasūriyā ca iminā nimmitāti dīpeti.
“最胜者、创造者”:意思是此世间的最高者与创造者。他要表达的是:他如此分别地创造众生——“你成为刹帝利,你成为婆罗门,成为吠舍,成为首陀罗,成为在家人,成为出家人,乃至你成为骆驼,你成为牛。”“自在者、已生与当生者之父”:这是说,因已修得自在而成为自在者,他是已生者与当生者的父亲。在此,卵生与胎生的有情,当其尚在卵壳之内或母胎之中时,称为“当生者”;从出离卵壳或母胎的那一刻开始,便称为“已生者”。湿生的有情,在第一心识刹那为“当生者”,从第二心识刹那开始即称为“已生者”。化生的有情,在第一威仪路时为“当生者”,从第二威仪路开始即为“已生者”。应当如此了知。正是由于把这些有情都视同为自己的儿子,所以才说出“已生与当生者之父”这样的话。显示巴利原文
Seṭṭho sajitāti ayaṃ lokassa uttamo ca sajitā ca. ‘‘Tvaṃ khattiyo nāma hohi, tvaṃ brāhmaṇo nāma, vesso nāma, suddo nāma, gahaṭṭho nāma, pabbajito nāma, antamaso oṭṭho hohi, goṇo hohī’’ti evaṃ sattānaṃ visajjetā ayanti dasseti. Vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānanti ayaṃ ciṇṇavasitāya vasī, ayaṃ pitā bhūtānañca bhabyānañcāti vadati. Tattha aṇḍajajalābujā sattā antoaṇḍakose ceva antovatthimhi ca bhabyā nāma, bahi nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya bhūtā. Saṃsedajā paṭhamacittakkhaṇe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtā. Opapātikā paṭhamairiyāpathe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtāti veditabbā. Te sabbepi etassa puttāti saññāya, ‘‘pitā bhūtabhabyāna’’nti āha.
“呵责地者”:正如你现在呵责、厌离大地,称其为“无常、苦、无我”一般,过去诸佛也同样曾是呵责地者,并非只有你如此——此言即点明此义。对于“呵责水者”等,理亦同此。“住立于卑劣身中”,指生于四恶趣。“称赞地者”:并非如你这样加以呵责,而是不予呵责,反过来称赞地、宣说地是“常、恒、常住、不可断、不可破、不灭”的,过去便有如此称赞地者、为地称扬之人——此言即说明此义。“喜乐于地者”,是指因渴爱与邪见而喜乐于地。对其余诸句,道理亦同。“住立于殊胜身中”,指生于梵天界。“正是因彼之故,我如是说”。“来吧”:这是一个表催促的虚词。“超越过”:即超过、胜过;另有一读作“Upātivattito”,其义相同。“应以棍棒回击”:指用四肘长的锤棍击打后驱赶。“堕地狱之崖”:指深达百丈的巨大陷坑。“找不到”:指手可抓握之处或脚可站立之处,皆无法抓、无法立。“比丘!你难道未见吗?”:比丘!你莫非未曾看见这聚集的梵众正光明显耀、光明赫奕?显示巴利原文
Pathavīgarahakāti yathā tvaṃ etarahi, ‘‘aniccā dukkhā anattā’’ti pathaviṃ garahasi jigucchasi, evaṃ tepi pathavīgarahakā ahesuṃ, na kevalaṃ tvaṃyevāti dīpeti. Āpagarahakātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Hīne kāye patiṭṭhitāti catūsu apāyesu nibbattā. Pathavīpasaṃsakāti yathā tvaṃ garahasi, evaṃ agarahitvā, ‘‘niccā dhuvā sassatā acchejjā abhejjā akkhayā’’ti evaṃ pathavīpasaṃsakā pathaviyā vaṇṇavādino ahesunti vadati. Pathavābhinandinoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pathaviyā abhinandino. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Paṇīte kāye patiṭṭhitāti brahmaloke nibbattā. Taṃ tāhanti tena kāraṇena taṃ ahaṃ. Iṅghāti codanatthe nipāto. Upātivattitthoti atikkamittha. ‘‘Upātivattito’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Daṇḍena paṭippaṇāmeyyāti catuhatthena muggaradaṇḍena pothetvā palāpeyya. Narakapapāteti sataporise mahāsobbhe. Virādheyyāti hatthena gahaṇayutte vā pādena patiṭṭhānayutte vā ṭhāne gahaṇapatiṭṭhānāni kātuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Nanu tvaṃ bhikkhu passasīti bhikkhu nanu tvaṃ imaṃ brahmaparisaṃ sannipatitaṃ obhāsamānaṃ virocamānaṃ jotayamānaṃ passasīti brahmuno ovāde ṭhitānaṃ iddhānubhāvaṃ dasseti. Iti kho maṃ, bhikkhave, māro pāpimā brahmaparisaṃ upanesīti, bhikkhave , māro pāpimā nanu tvaṃ bhikkhu passasi brahmaparisaṃ yasena ca siriyā ca obhāsamānaṃ virocamānaṃ jotayamānaṃ, yadi tvampi mahābrahmuno vacanaṃ anatikkamitvā yadeva te brahmā vadati, taṃ kareyyāsi, tvampi evamevaṃ yasena ca siriyā ca viroceyyāsīti evaṃ vadanto maṃ brahmaparisaṃ upanesi upasaṃhari. Mā tvaṃ maññitthoti mā tvaṃ maññi. Māro tvamasi pāpimāti pāpima tvaṃ mahājanassa māraṇato māro nāma, pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ mahājanassa ayasaṃ karaṇato pāpimā nāmāti jānāmi.
503 “整全的寿命”:即全部的寿命。“他们应当这样了知”:他们拥有如此广大的苦行功德,而你呢,日前才刚出生,能知道些什么呢?你至今口中还飘散着乳味呢!——他以此语加以打击。“你将吞噬大地”:指你将贪着大地,吞没它并全然受用之后,复以渴爱、我慢及邪见而执取它。“你将是我的随侍者”:意为你将住于我的近旁,我行走时你便跟着走,我站立时你便随侍而立,我坐下时你便就近坐下,我躺卧时你便就近躺卧。此即句义。“住于我居处者”:即住于我居处中躺卧之人。所谓“可被随意驱使、被排除在外”:即凭我心意,凡欲令你所做,你便须做;而且,你会被排除在外,变得比果木巴草还要低贱、还要卑微。此即句义。显示巴利原文
503.Kasiṇaṃ āyunti sakalaṃ āyuṃ. Te kho evaṃ jāneyyunti te evaṃ mahantena tapokammena samannāgatā, tvaṃ pana purimadivase jāto, kiṃ jānissasi, yassa te ajjāpi mukhe khīragandho vāyatīti ghaṭṭento vadati. Pathaviṃ ajjhosissasīti pathaviṃ ajjhosāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi gaṇhissasi. Opasāyiko me bhavissasīti mayhaṃ samīpasayo bhavissasi, maṃ gacchantaṃ anugacchissasi, ṭhitaṃ upatiṭṭhissasi, nisinnaṃ upanisīdissasi, nipannaṃ upanipajjissasīti attho. Vatthusāyikoti mama vatthusmiṃ sayanako. Yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyoti mayā attano ruciyā yaṃ icchāmi, taṃ kattabbo, bāhitvā ca pana jajjharikāgumbatopi nīcataro lakuṇḍaṭakataro kātabbo bhavissasīti attho.
藉由这番话,此梵天或是在讨好世尊,或是在贬抑世尊。所谓“讨好”,即如此言:“比丘!倘若你以渴爱等执取而吞噬大地,你便将成为我的随侍者,我行走时你即行走,我站立时你即站立,我坐下时你即坐下,我躺卧时你即躺卧;我将排开其余众人,令你成为可信任的内臣。”此即称为讨好。而通过其余话语,则称为“贬抑”。其中,他的真实用意是:“若你吞噬大地,你便住于我的居处,你得等候我行走等之后,方可行走、站立、坐下、躺卧;你将在我的居处为我作守护;而我却可随意处置于你,将你排除在外,使你变得比果木巴草还要卑微。”此即称为贬抑。然而,此梵天是依止于慢的,是故在此处,贬抑方合乎其真实意图。对于水等,道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
Iminā esa bhagavantaṃ upalāpeti vā apasādeti vā. Upalāpeti nāma sace kho tvaṃ, bhikkhu, taṇhādīhi pathaviṃ ajjhosissasi, opasāyiko me bhavissasi, mayi gacchante gamissasi, tiṭṭhante ṭhassasi, nisinne nisīdissasi, nipanne nipajjissasi, ahaṃ taṃ sesajanaṃ paṭibāhitvā vissāsikaṃ abbhantarikaṃ karissāmīti evaṃ tāva upalāpeti nāma. Sesapadehi pana apasādeti nāma. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sace tvaṃ pathaviṃ ajjhosissasi, vatthusāyiko me bhavissasi, mama gamanādīni āgametvā gamissasi vā ṭhassasi vā nisīdissasi vā nipajjissasi vā, mama vatthusmiṃ mayhaṃ ārakkhaṃ gaṇhissasi, ahaṃ pana taṃ yathākāmaṃ karissāmi bāhitvā ca jajjharikāgumbatopi lakuṇḍakataranti evaṃ apasādeti nāma. Ayaṃ pana brahmā mānanissito, tasmā idha apasādanāva adhippetā. Āpādīsupi eseva nayo.
另外,在“我是梵天”这一段:此时,世尊心想:“这位梵天依止我慢,自以为是地认为‘我知道’,被自己的声望冲昏了头脑,完全看不见有谁能触及他。稍加呵责才合适。”于是便开始了以下教导。其中,“我知趣向”是指知道他的成就。“我知光耀”是指知道他的威光。“如此有大威力”是指像这样有大名声、大眷属。显示巴利原文
Apicate ahaṃ brahmeti idāni bhagavā, ‘‘ayaṃ brahmā mānanissito ‘ahaṃ jānāmī’ti maññati, attano yasena sammatto sarīraṃ phusitumpi samatthaṃ kiñci na passati, thokaṃ niggahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha gatiñca pajānāmīti nipphattiñca pajānāmi. Jutiñcāti ānubhāvañca pajānāmi. Evaṃ mahesakkhoti evaṃ mahāyaso mahāparivāro.
“日月所运行的范围”:指日月运行所及之处。“光芒照耀诸方”:在诸方闪耀而照亮,或者说诸方被它们照耀而发光。“如是一千世间”:以那样的范围,世间放大一千倍,意思是包括这个世界在内,共一千个世界。“你的权威在此处行使”:在这一千个世界中,你的威权得以行使。“你知道高下”:在这一千个世界里,你知道那些高下、优劣的众生。“以及有染、离染者”:不仅如此,你还知道“这是有成就的人,这是普通人”这样的高下,以及“这个人还有染着,这个人已经离染”这样的有染与离染之人。“此性与异性”:“此性”指这个世界,“异性”指除此世界外的其余九百九十九个世界。“众生的来与去”:在这一千个世界中,你知道众生以结生为“来”,以死没为“去”。可是你却觉得自己“实在太伟大了”——你名为“千梵天”,但对超过你的其他梵天,如二千梵天、三千梵天、四千梵天、五千梵天、一万梵天、十万梵天,你都完全不知道他们的范围。你这就如同想用一块四肘长的碎布去丈量东西一样,还自以为很了不起。这是世尊在呵责他。显示巴利原文
Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā vicaranti. Disā bhanti virocanāti disāsu virocamānā obhāsanti, disā vā tehi virocamānā obhāsanti. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakena pamāṇena sahassadhā loko, iminā cakkavāḷena saddhiṃ cakkavāḷasahassanti attho. Ettha te vattate vasoti ettha cakkavāḷasahasse tuyhaṃ vaso vattati. Paroparañca jānāsīti ettha cakkavāḷasahasse paropare uccanīce hīnappaṇīte satte jānāsi. Atho rāgavirāginanti na kevalaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ iddho ayaṃ pakatimanusso’’ti paroparaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ pana sarāgo ayaṃ vītarāgo’’ti evaṃ rāgavirāginampi janaṃ jānāsi. Itthaṃbhāvaññathābhāvanti itthaṃbhāvoti idaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ. Aññathābhāvoti ito sesaṃ ekūnasahassaṃ. Sattānaṃ āgatiṃ gatinti ettha cakkavāḷasahasse paṭisandhivasena sattānaṃ āgatiṃ, cutivasena gatiṃ ca jānāsi. Tuyhaṃ pana atimahantohamasmīti saññā hoti, sahassibrahmā nāma tvaṃ, aññesaṃ pana tayā uttari dvisahassānaṃ tisahassānaṃ catusahassānaṃ pañcasahassānaṃ dasasahassānaṃ satasahassānañca brahmānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi, catuhatthāya pilotikāya paṭappamāṇaṃ kātuṃ vāyamanto viya mahantosmīti saññaṃ karosīti niggaṇhāti.
504 “生于此者”:指生于这初禅地的众生。“因此,你不知道彼”:由于那个原因,你不知道那个身。“你与我既不相同,也不相等”:即使达到了应知的境地,我也并不与你等同。“证智”:是指以智了知。“何来下劣”:我又岂会比你低劣呢?显示巴利原文
504.Idhūpapannoti idha paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ upapanno. Tena taṃ tvaṃ na jānāsīti tena kāraṇena taṃ kāyaṃ tvaṃ na jānāsi. Neva te samasamoti jānitabbaṭṭhānaṃ patvāpi tayā samasamo na homi. Abhiññāyāti aññāya. Kuto nīceyyanti tayā nīcatarabhāvo pana mayhaṃ kuto.
据传,这位梵天过去在佛陀未出世时,出家为仙人修习梵行,修习遍布禅修业处,证得禅定。他未曾退失禅那,命终之后转生于第四禅天的广果天,获得五百劫的寿命。他在那里度过全部天寿后,又向下界投生,并修习第三禅那,生于遍净天,获得六十四劫的寿命。在那里修习第二禅那,生于光音天,获得八劫的寿命。又在那里修习初禅那,生于初禅天界,成为寿命一劫的有情。最初,他尚能忆念自己过去所造的业与投生之处;但久而久之,这两者便都忘了,由此生起常见。因此,世尊对他说:‘因此,你不知道那个……乃至……怎会不变得下劣?’显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhūpapattiko kiresa brahmā anuppanne buddhuppāde isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā catutthajjhānabhūmiyaṃ vehapphalabrahmaloke pañcakappasatikaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā heṭṭūpapattikaṃ katvā tatiyajjhānaṃ paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā subhakiṇhabrahmaloke catusaṭṭhikappaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha dutiyajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā ābhassaresu aṭṭhakappaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyuko hutvā nibbatti, so paṭhamakāle attanā katakammañca nibbattaṭṭhānañca aññāsi, kāle pana gacchante ubhayaṃ pamussitvā sassatadiṭṭhiṃ uppādesi. Tena naṃ bhagavā, ‘‘tena taṃ tvaṃ na jānāsi…pe… kuto nīceyya’’nti āha.
这时,梵天心想:‘沙门乔达摩知晓我的寿命、投生之处与过去所造的业。既然如此,我来问他关于我过去所造的业吧。’于是,他向导师请问自己前生所造的业,导师便为他开示。显示巴利原文
Atha brahmā cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo mayhaṃ āyuñca nibbattaṭṭhānañca pubbekatakammañca jānāti, handa naṃ pubbe katakammaṃ pucchāmī’’ti satthāraṃ attano pubbekatakammaṃ pucchi. Satthā kathesi.
据传,此人过去投生于良善之家,看见欲乐的过患后心想:‘我要终结生、老、病、死。’于是他离家修习仙人梵行,证得禅定,成就了作为神通基础的禅那。他在恒河岸边搭建草屋,以禅悦之乐度日。那时,常有商队首领率领五百辆车穿越旷野沙漠。但在旷野沙漠中,白天无法行走,只能夜间赶路。有一天,领头车的驾牛走着走着,突然掉转过头,朝来路的方向走去,后面的车也全都跟着掉头。直到天亮,他们才发现走了回头路,而那天本应是走出旷野的日子。这时,他们的木柴与水都用尽了,心想:‘这下我们必死无疑。’于是他们把牛拴在车轮上,人躲在车的阴影里躺下等待死亡。那位苦行者清早从草屋走出,坐在门口望向恒河,只见恒河之水势汹涌,犹如一条翻滚的宝石流。他见到后心想:‘世间会不会有众生因为喝不到这样甘甜的水而在受苦呢?’当他这样观察时,便看见了旷野沙漠中的那支商队。他心想:‘愿这些众生不要灭亡!’于是他以神通心意决:‘愿这大水流从恒河分出,流向旷野中的商队那里去!’随着心念的生起,水流便如入水渠般,流到了那里。商人们听到水声惊醒,看见水后欢喜踊跃,赶紧沐浴显示巴利原文
Pubbe kiresa kulaghare nibbattitvā kāmesu ādīnavaṃ disvā, ‘‘jātijarābyādhimaraṇassa antaṃ karissāmī’’ti nikkhamma isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā abhiññāpādakajjhānalābhī hutvā gaṅgātīre paṇṇasālaṃ kāretvā jhānaratiyā vītināmeti. Tadā ca kālena kālaṃ satthavāhā pañcahi sakaṭasatehi marukantāraṃ paṭipajjanti. Marukantāre pana divā na sakkā gantuṃ, rattiṃ gamanaṃ hoti. Atha purimasakaṭassa aggayuge yuttabalibaddā gacchantā nivattitvā āgatamaggābhimukhāva ahesuṃ. Itarasakaṭāni tatheva nivattitvā aruṇe uggate nivattitabhāvaṃ jāniṃsu. Tesañca tadā kantāraṃ atikkamanadivaso ahosi. Sabbaṃ dārudakaṃ parikkhīṇaṃ, tasmā, ‘‘natthi dāni amhākaṃ jīvita’’nti cintetvā goṇe cakkesu bandhitvā manussā sakaṭapacchāyāyaṃ pavisitvā nipajjiṃsu . Tāpasopi kālasseva paṇṇasālato nikkhamitvā paṇṇasāladvāre nisinno gaṅgaṃ olokayamāno addasa gaṅgaṃ mahatā udakoghena vuyhamānaṃ pavattitamaṇikkhandhaṃ viya āgacchantiṃ. Disvā cintesi – ‘‘atthi nu kho imasmiṃ loke evarūpassa madhurodakassa alābhena kilissamānā sattā’’ti. So evaṃ āvajjanto marukantāre taṃ satthaṃ disvā, ‘‘ime sattā mā nassantū’’ti, ‘‘ito mahā udakakkhandho chijjitvā marukantāre satthābhimukho gacchatū’’ti abhiññācittena adhiṭṭhāsi. Sahacittuppādena mātikāruḷhaṃ viya udakaṃ tattha agamāsi. Manussā udakasaddena vuṭṭhāya udakaṃ disvā hatthatuṭṭhā nhāyitvā pivitvā goṇepi pāyetvā sotthinā icchitaṭṭhānaṃ agamaṃsu. Satthā taṃ brahmuno pubbakammaṃ dassento –
你曾度脱众多人,
他们饥渴、炎苦逼灼,命若悬丝;
此即你昔日的戒行与律仪,
我犹如从睡眠中醒觉的人,回忆起了它。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ tvaṃ apāyesi bahū manusse, Pipāsite ghammani samparete; Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ, Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.71) –
说了这首偈颂。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ gāthamāha.
在另一时,那位苦行者在恒河岸边搭建了叶屋,依附一座林野村庄而住。那时,盗贼们袭击了那个村庄,抢走贵重物品,并掳走母牛与山羊后离去。牛群、犬只与人们发出极大的哀号声。苦行者听到那声音,思虑“这是怎么回事?”,明白是“人们遭遇了危难”,心想“愿这些众生不要在我眼前丧命”,于是进入作为神通基础的禅那,从定中出后以神通心,在盗贼归途上变现出一支四兵之军,正严阵以待迎面而来。盗贼们看见后,以为“国王来了”,便丢下所掠之物逃走了。苦行者决意“谁的东西各归其主”,一切便如是成就。众人皆得平安。世尊为了开示他过去的业,而说道:显示巴利原文
Aparasmiṃ samaye tāpaso gaṅgātīre paṇṇasālaṃ māpetvā āraññakaṃ gāmaṃ nissāya vasati. Tena ca samayena corā taṃ gāmaṃ paharitvā hatthasāraṃ gahetvā gāviyo ca karamare ca gahetvā gacchanti. Gāvopi sunakhāpi manussāpi mahāviravaṃ viravanti. Tāpaso taṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti āvajjanto, ‘‘manussānaṃ bhayaṃ uppanna’’nti ñatvā, ‘‘mayi passante ime sattā mā nassantū’’ti abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya abhiññācittena corānaṃ paṭipathe caturaṅginisenaṃ māpesi kammasajjaṃ āgacchantiṃ. Corā disvā, ‘‘rājā’’ti te maññamānā vilopaṃ chaḍḍetvā pakkamiṃsu. Tāpaso ‘‘yaṃ yassa santakaṃ, taṃ tasseva hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi, taṃ tatheva ahosi. Mahājano sotthibhāvaṃ pāpuṇi. Satthā idampi tassa pubbakammaṃ dassento –
在那羚羊岸边,人们被捉住之时,
你解救了那些被捉住、正被带走的人;
此即你往昔的行仪与戒行,
我如从沉睡中醒来一般,回忆起了往昔。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ eṇikūlasmiṃ janaṃ gahītaṃ, Amocayī gayhaka nīyamānaṃ; Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ, Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.72) –
他诵出这首偈颂。其中,“eṇikūlasmiṃ”意为恒河岸边。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ gāthamāha. Ettha eṇikūlasminti gaṅgātīre.
又有一次,恒河上游的一户人家与恒河下游的一户人家结为好友,他们将船只连结在一起,装载了丰盛的嚼食、噉食以及香、花鬘等物品,顺着恒河水流前行。众人边咀嚼品尝,边享用食物,载歌载舞,如同乘着天宫行进一般,心中充满了极大的喜悦。名为恒伽耶的龙王见此情景,心生愤怒,思惟道:‘这些人竟完全不把我放在眼里,我现在就把他们冲入大海。’于是他显现出巨大的身躯,将河水分开,耸立而起,撑开头冠,发出嘶嘶的嘶鸣。大众一见此状,惊恐尖叫。坐在叶屋中的苦行者听闻呼声,心想:‘这些人刚才还载歌载舞、兴高采烈而来,现在却发出如此恐怖的叫喊,究竟发生了什么事?’他作意观察,看见了龙王,便想:‘有我在,这些众生不该毁灭。’于是他进入作为神通基础的禅那,舍弃自身形貌,化现金翅鸟的形态,展示在龙王面前。龙王一见,心生畏惧,收起头冠,立即潜入水中。大众因此得以平安。导师借此展示了过去所行的业迹。显示巴利原文
Puna ekasmiṃ samaye uparigaṅgāvāsikaṃ kulaṃ heṭṭhāgaṅgāvāsikena kulena saddhiṃ mittasanthavaṃ katvā nāvāsaṅghāṭaṃ bandhitvā bahuṃ khādanīyabhojanīyañceva gandhamālādīni ca āropetvā gaṅgāsotena āgacchati. Manussā khādamānā bhuñjamānā naccantā gāyantā devavimānena gacchantā viya balavasomanassā ahesuṃ. Gaṅgeyyako nāgo disvā kupito, ‘‘ime mayi saññampi na karonti, idāni ne samuddameva pāpessāmī’’ti mahantaṃ attabhāvaṃ māpetvā udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā uṭṭhāya phaṇaṃ katvā sussūkāraṃ karonto aṭṭhāsi. Mahājano disvā bhīto vissaramakāsi. Tāpaso paṇṇasālāya nisinno sutvā, ‘‘ime gāyantā naccantā somanassajātā āgacchanti, idāni pana bhayaravaṃ raviṃsu, kiṃ nu kho’’ti āvajjanto nāgarājaṃ disvā, ‘‘mayi passante ime sattā mā nassantū’’ti abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā attabhāvaṃ vijahitvā supaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ māpetvā nāgarājassa dassesi. Nāgarājā bhīto phaṇaṃ saṃharitvā udakaṃ paviṭṭho. Mahājano sotthibhāvaṃ pāpuṇi. Satthā idampi tassa pubbakammaṃ dassento –
在恒河的水流中,那艘被擒住的船,
被凶暴的龙王以人形抓住,
他凭力量强行解救,将其释放。
那便是你往昔的誓愿与戒行;
我如从沉睡中醒来般记起。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gaṅgāya sotasmiṃ gahītanāvaṃ, Luddena nāgena manussakappā; Amocayittha balasā pasayha, Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ; Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.73) –
他即说此偈:显示巴利原文
Imaṃ gāthamāha.
后来,这位仙人出家后成为一位名为给瑟瓦的苦行者。那时,我们的菩萨是名叫劫波的学童,他成为给瑟瓦身边亲近随侍的弟子,恭敬承事,令师欢喜,具足智慧,成办利益。给瑟瓦没有他便无法过活,唯依仗他而维生。导师又展示了他过去的业——显示巴利原文
Aparasmiṃ samaye esa isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kesavo nāma tāpaso ahosi. Tena samayena amhākaṃ bodhisatto kappo nāma māṇavo kesavassa baddhacaro antevāsiko hutvā ācariyassa kiṃkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī buddhisampanno atthacaro ahosi. Kesavo taṃ vinā vattituṃ nāsakkhi, taṃ nissāyeva jīvikaṃ kappesi. Satthā idampi tassa pubbakammaṃ dassento –
“劫波曾是您的侍从,”
他却以为那位修行者具足等正觉的功德;
你那往昔的戒行与誓愿修行,
犹如从睡梦中醒来,我回忆起来。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kappo ca te baddhacaro ahosi, Sambuddhimantaṃ vatinaṃ amaññi; Taṃ te purāṇaṃ vatasīlavattaṃ, Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī’’ti. (jā. 1.7.74) –
他诵出了这首偈颂。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ gāthamāha.
就这样,导师开示了梵天在种种生中所造的业。就在导师开示之时,梵天便觉察到:如同点燃千盏灯时种种色相清晰显现一般,他的一切业在在心中了了分明。他心生净信,诵出了这首偈颂——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ brahmuno nānattabhāvesu katakammaṃ satthā pakāsesi. Satthari kathenteyeva brahmā sallakkhesi, dīpasahasse ujjalite rūpāni viya sabbakammānissa pākaṭāni ahesuṃ. So pasannacitto imaṃ gāthamāha –
‘你确实了知我的寿命,’
‘你也了知其余诸事,因为你确实是佛陀;’
正因如此,您的威光炽盛,
照耀着梵天世界。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Addhā pajānāsi mametamāyuṃ, Aññampi jānāsi tathā hi buddho; Tathā hi tāyaṃ jalitānubhāvo, Obhāsayaṃ tiṭṭhati brahmaloka’’nti. (jā. 1.7.75);
接着,世尊为了进一步阐明他的无等等性,说道:“梵天,我说地……”等等。在此,“于地,以地性未曾经验”是指,并未以地的体性去经验、未曾触及。那是什么呢?那是涅槃。因为涅槃超越一切有为法,故不以地性而触及,因此称为未曾经验。“证知彼”是指了知彼涅槃、现证。“我不以地而取”是指我不以渴爱、邪见、慢的执取来执取地。对于水等诸界,道理相同。详细解释应如《根本法门经》所述来理解。显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā uttari asamasamataṃ pakāsento pathaviṃ kho ahaṃ brahmetiādimāha. Tattha pathaviyā pathavattena ananubhūtanti pathaviyā pathavisabhāvena ananubhūtaṃ appattaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Nibbānaṃ. Tañhi sabbasmā saṅkhatā nissaṭattā pathavisabhāvena appattaṃ nāma. Tadabhiññāyāti taṃ nibbānaṃ jānitvā sacchikatvā. Pathaviṃ nāpahosinti pathaviṃ taṇhādiṭṭhimānagāhehi na gaṇhiṃ. Āpādīsupi eseva nayo. Vitthāro pana mūlapariyāye vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“贤者,若你确实能以那‘一切’的‘一切性’……”这正是梵天依自己的主张,指出“一切”一词后,又在字面上挑取过失所说的话。然而,导师(世尊)是就“自身”而说“一切”,梵天则是就“一切的一切”而言。你既说“一切”,又说“以一切的一切性未曾体验”,如果“一切”中确无任何未曾体验之物,那其中又怎会有未曾体验的呢?“愿你的话不沦于空虚,不落于空无”——他如此以妄语指责世尊:你的话不要变成空虚,不要变成空无。显示巴利原文
Sace kho te, mārisa, sabbassa sabbattenāti idameva brahmā attano vāditāya sabbanti akkharaṃ niddisitvā akkhare dosaṃ gaṇhanto āha. Satthā pana sakkāyaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sabba’’nti vadati, brahmā sabbasabbaṃ sandhāya. Tvaṃ ‘‘sabba’’nti vadasi, ‘‘sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūta’’nti vadasi, yadi sabbaṃ ananubhūtaṃ natthi, athassa ananubhūtaṃ atthi. Mā heva te rittakamevaahositucchakameva ahosīti tuyhaṃ vacanaṃ rittakaṃ mā hotu, tucchakaṃ mā hotūti satthāraṃ musāvādena niggaṇhāti.
然而,导师(世尊)的辩才胜过此梵天百倍、千倍、十万倍。因此,为了摧破其言论,世尊引出理据,说了“识”等语句。(世尊说:)“我将宣说一切,也将宣说未曾体验的,你听着!”其中,“识”指所应了知的。“无相”,因不进入眼识的范围,故称“无相”。此二词皆仅用来指称涅槃。“无边”,因其没有生灭的间断,故称“无边”。对此也有偈颂说过:显示巴利原文
Satthā pana etasmā brahmunā sataguṇena sahassaguṇena satasahassaguṇena vādītaro, tasmā ahaṃ sabbañca vakkhāmi, ananubhūtañca vakkhāmi, suṇāhi meti tassa vādamaddanatthaṃ kāraṇaṃ āharanto viññāṇantiādimāha. Tattha viññāṇanti vijānitabbaṃ. Anidassananti cakkhuviññāṇassa āpāthaṃ anupagamanato anidassanaṃ nāma, padadvayenapi nibbānameva vuttaṃ. Anantanti tayidaṃ uppādavayaantarahitattā anantaṃ nāma. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
诸存在者皆有边,非所生者是为无边;
在有之中,种种边可得见;在有之中,种种边得以显现。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Antavantāni bhūtāni, asambhūtaṃ anantakaṃ; Bhūte antāni dissanti, bhūte antā pakāsitā’’ti.
“一切处有光”(sabbatopabhaṃ):即于一切处皆具足光明。因为除涅槃以外,再没有其他法比之更光明、更辉耀、更清净、更皎洁了。或谓,涅槃于一切处如此显现,并非于某处不存在,故称为“一切处有光”。确实,不应说“在东方等各个方位中,涅槃在某方位不存在”。或者,“光”(pabha)为渡口(tittha)的异名,而涅槃于一切处皆有渡口,故称为“一切处有渡口”。据说,涅槃犹如大海,无论希望从何处入海,彼处即是渡口,没有哪里不是渡口的。同样地,在三十八种业处中,无论希望由哪一门趣入涅槃,彼门即为渡口;对涅槃而言,没有所谓非渡口的业处。因此说为“一切处有渡口”。“彼(涅槃)未曾以地之‘地性’而被体验”:意指那涅槃,未曾以地的地性、以余水等的水性等而被体验。就这样,世尊确立了他的所论:“对于你们所触及的境界——即一切系属三地之法,以其‘一切性’而言,那识乃无相、无边、一切处有光,是你们未曾体验的。”显示巴利原文
Sabbatopabhanti sabbaso pabhāsampannaṃ. Nibbānato hi añño dhammo sapabhataro vā jotivantataro vā parisuddhataro vā paṇḍarataro vā natthi. Sabbato vā tathā pabhūtameva, na katthaci natthīti sabbatopabhaṃ. Puratthimadisādīsu hi asukadisāya nāma nibbānaṃ natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Atha vā pabhanti titthassa nāmaṃ, sabbato pabhamassāti sabbatopabhaṃ. Nibbānassa kira yathā mahāsamuddassa yato yato otaritukāmā honti, taṃ tadeva titthaṃ, atitthaṃ nāma natthi. Evamevaṃ aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu yena yena mukhena nibbānaṃ otaritukāmā honti, taṃ tadeva titthaṃ. Nibbānassa atitthaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānaṃ natthi. Tena vuttaṃ sabbatopabhanti. Taṃ pathaviyā pathavattenāti taṃ nibbānaṃ pathaviyā pathavīsabhāvena tato paresaṃ āpādīnaṃ āpādisabhāvena ca ananubhūtaṃ. Iti yaṃ tumhādisānaṃ visayabhūtaṃ sabbatebhūmakadhammajātaṃ tassa sabbattena taṃ viññāṇaṃ anidassanaṃ anantaṃ sabbatopataṃ ananubhūtanti vādaṃ patiṭṭhapesi.
于是,梵天被世尊逐句追问、逐句破除,找不出任何可以执取之处,便想戏弄一番,说道:“贤者,那么我现今便在你面前隐没吧!”在此,“隐没”(antaradhāyāmi)意即“我作隐没自身的神变”。“若你能够”(sace visahasīti):意思是你若有能力于我面前隐没,便隐没吧;作神变吧(即你试试看)。“他却丝毫不能于我前隐没”(nevassu me sakkoti antaradhāyituṃ):(世尊说:)他面对我,丝毫无法隐没。那么,他(梵天)想做什么呢?他想进入根本结生(之细微身)。因为梵天的根本结生身极其微细,非其他(众生)所能缘取,他们(梵天)唯依凭这造作之身而得安立。世尊不允其进入根本结生身。即便不进入根本结生身,假如他意欲借由这种或那种(的暗冥)来遮蔽自身、令人不见,世尊亦能驱除其暗冥,所以他无法隐没。他(梵天)因做不到,便躲入宫殿,藏在劫波树下,蜷缩蹲伏。梵天众讥笑他,心里这样想:“来看这婆迦梵天,躲进宫殿里,藏在劫波树下,蜷缩蹲着,自以为‘我已隐没,梵天现已隐没。’”显示巴利原文
Tato brahmā gahitagahitaṃ satthārā vissajjāpito kiñci gahetabbaṃ adisvā laḷitakaṃ kātukāmo handa carahi te, mārisa, antaradhāyāmīti āha. Tattha antaradhāyāmīti adissamānakapāṭihāriyaṃ karomīti āha. Sace visahasīti yadi sakkosi mayhaṃ antaradhāyituṃ, antaradhāyasi , pāṭihāriyaṃ karohīti. Nevassu me sakkoti antaradhāyitunti mayhaṃ antaradhāyituṃ neva sakkoti. Kiṃ panesa kātukāmo ahosīti? Mūlapaṭisandhiṃ gantukāmo ahosi. Brahmānañhi mūlapaṭisandhikaattabhāvo sukhumo, aññesaṃ anāpātho, abhisaṅkhatakāyeneva tiṭṭhanti. Satthā tassa mūlapaṭisandhiṃ gantuṃ na adāsi. Mūlapaṭisandhiṃ vā agantvāpi yena tamena attānaṃ antaradhāpetvā adissamānako bhaveyya, satthā taṃ tamaṃ vinodesi, tasmā antaradhāyituṃ nāsakkhi. So asakkonto vimāne nilīyati, kapparukkhe nilīyati, ukkuṭiko nisīdati. Brahmagaṇo keḷimakāsi – ‘‘esa kho bako brahmā vimāne nilīyati, kapparukkhe nilīyati, ukkuṭiko nisīdati, brahme tvaṃ antarahitomhī’’ti saññaṃ uppādesi nāmāti. So brahmagaṇena uppaṇḍito maṅku ahosi.
“诸比丘,当这样说时,我……”:诸比丘,当那位梵天说“贤者,我现在就在你面前隐没吧”时,世尊见他不能隐没,便说了这番话。“说此偈”:世尊为何说此偈?为了不让梵天众有这样的机会说:“沙门乔达摩到底在还是不在,又怎能知道呢?”为避免梵天众生起如此议论,世尊便在隐没中宣说了此偈。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte ahaṃ, bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, etena brahmunā, ‘‘handa carahi te, mārisa, antaradhāyāmī’’ti evaṃ vutte taṃ antaradhāyituṃ asakkontaṃ disvā ahaṃ etadavocaṃ. Imaṃ gāthamabhāsinti kasmā bhagavā gāthamabhāsīti? Samaṇassa gotamassa imasmiṃ ṭhāne atthibhāvo vā natthibhāvo vā kathaṃ sakkā jānitunti evaṃ brahmagaṇassa vacanokāso mā hotūti antarahitova gāthamabhāsi.
此处,“我见‘有’中之怖畏”:我因见到‘有’中的怖畏。“又见到‘有’与‘求灭者’”:见到了此欲有等三种有,也看到那些求灭者——寻求断灭之人,仍一再落入‘有’中。“我不称叹任何‘有’”:我并未因渴爱或邪见之力而称叹任何‘有’,即未曾去寻求。“也不执取喜贪”:我不亲近、不执取对‘有’的渴爱。就这样,世尊开示四圣谛。说法结束时,令与会大众随说法次第,握持内观的胚种,约一万梵天众得饮道果甘露。显示巴利原文
Tattha bhavevāhaṃ bhayaṃ disvāti ahaṃ bhave bhayaṃ disvāyeva. Bhavañca vibhavesinanti imañca kāmabhavāditividhampi sattabhavaṃ vibhavesinaṃ vibhavaṃ gavesamānaṃ pariyesamānampi punappunaṃ bhaveyeva disvā. Bhavaṃ nābhivadinti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kiñci bhavaṃ na abhivadiṃ, na gavesinti attho. Nandiñca na upādiyinti bhavataṇhaṃ na upagañchiṃ, na aggahesinti attho. Iti cattāri saccāni pakāsento satthā dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāpariyosāne desanānusārena vipassanāgabbhaṃ gāhāpetvā dasamattāni brahmasahassāni maggaphalāmatapānaṃ piviṃsu.
“心生稀有、未曾有且喜悦”:即产生了稀有、未曾有与喜悦之心。“他拔除了深根本的‘有’”:在菩提道场,他为自己拔除;又依种种说法,为其他众多人天拔除、拔起、掘出了深根本的‘有’。显示巴利原文
Acchariyabbhutacittajātāti acchariyajātā abbhutajātā tuṭṭhijātā ca ahesuṃ. Samūlaṃ bhavaṃ udabbahīti bodhimaṇḍe attano tāya tāya desanāya aññesampi bahūnaṃ devamanussānaṃ samūlakaṃ bhavaṃ udabbahi, uddhari uppāṭesīti attho.
505 然而,那时魔罗波旬被忿怒所压制,心想:“这沙门乔达摩,就在我游走之际宣说法教,令差不多一万梵天都越出了我的掌控。”他因怒火中烧,便附上了一位梵天随众的身体。为了显示此事,世尊才说:“诸比丘,那时……”等语。这里的“你若这般自觉”(sace tvaṃ evaṃ anubuddho):如果你正是这样只凭自己便觉悟了四圣谛。“勿引导声闻众”(mā sāvake upanesīti):不要把法引导给在家声闻众或出家声闻众。“住于卑劣身”(hīne kāye patiṭṭhitā):即住于四恶趣。“住于殊胜身”(paṇīte kāye patiṭṭhitā):即住于梵天界。这番话特别针对谁呢?是针对那些外道出家、修苦行的游方者。因为在诸佛未出世时,善男子们出家修苦行,不问于任何人,独自修行,成就诸定,投生梵天界。正因为如此,魔罗才特别针对他们说出这番话。“贤者,不去宣说即是善。”(anakkhātaṃ kusalañhi mārisā)显示巴利原文
505. Tasmiṃ pana samaye māro pāpimā kodhābhibhūto hutvā, ‘‘mayi vicaranteyeva samaṇena gotamena dhammakathaṃ kathetvā dasamattāni brahmasahassāni mama vasaṃ ativattitānī’’ti kodhābhibhūtatāya aññatarassa brahmapārisajjassa sarīre adhimucci, taṃ dassetuṃ atha kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha sace tvaṃ evaṃ anubuddhoti sace tvaṃ evaṃ attanāva cattāri saccāni anubuddho. Mā sāvake upanesīti gihisāvake vā pabbajitasāvake vā taṃ dhammaṃ mā upanayasi. Hīne kāye patiṭṭhitāti catūsu apāyesu patiṭṭhitā. Paṇīte kāye patiṭṭhitāti brahmaloke patiṭṭhitā. Idaṃ ke sandhāya vadati? Bāhirapabbajjaṃ pabbajite tāpasaparibbājake. Anuppanne hi buddhuppāde kulaputtā tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kassaci kiñci avicāretvā ekacarā hutvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā brahmaloke uppajjiṃsu, te sandhāya evamāha. Anakkhātaṃ kusalañhi mārisāti paresaṃ anakkhātaṃ anovadanaṃ dhammakathāya akathanaṃ kusalaṃ etaṃ seyyo. Mā paraṃ ovadāhīti kālena manussalokaṃ, kālena devalokaṃ, kālena brahmalokaṃ, kālena nāgalokaṃ āhiṇḍanto mā vicari, ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nisinno jhānamaggaphalasukhena vītināmehīti. Anālapanatāyāti anullapanatāya. Brahmuno ca abhinimantanatāyāti bakabrahmuno ca idañhi, mārisa, niccantiādinā nayena saha kāyakena brahmaṭṭhānena nimantanavacanena. Tasmāti tena kāraṇena. Imassa veyyākaraṇassa brahmanimantanikaṃtveva adhivacanaṃ saṅkhā samaññā paññatti jātā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
10. 《魔诃责经》释义显示巴利原文
10. Māratajjanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
506 “如是我闻”等语,是《魔诃责经》的解说。其中,“潜入腹中”是说,进入腹腔之后,又进到肠子之间,即安坐在胃囊所在之处。“变得沉甸甸的”,指非常沉重、僵硬,如同一堆石块。“像盛满豆饭似的”,意思是腹中好像吃了豆饭那样,如同一个装满豆子的袋子,也像浸胀了的豆子。从经行道下来后,他走进叶屋,坐在平时铺好的座位上,独自如理作意,思量:“这究竟是怎么回事?”然而,如果那位长老当时能这样反省戒行:“但愿前日、昨日乃至大前日所吃的东西,或是任何未消化的、不对劲的食物,全都消化,恢复舒适。”并用手按摩腹部,那么魔罗波旬便会萎缩而退离。但长老并未那样做,而是如理作了意。“不要恼害如来”:就好比说,让儿子们苦恼,便是令父母苦恼;让同住的比丘和内住弟子们苦恼,便是令亲教师和依止师苦恼;让地方上苦恼,便是令国王苦恼。同样道理,让如来的弟子苦恼,便是令如来苦恼。显示巴利原文
506.Evaṃme sutanti māratajjanīyasuttaṃ. Tattha koṭṭhamanupaviṭṭhoti kucchiṃ pavisitvā antānaṃ anto anupaviṭṭho, pakkāsayaṭṭhāne nisinno. Garugaro viyāti garukagaruko viya thaddho pāsāṇapuñjasadiso. Māsācitaṃmaññeti māsabhattaṃ bhuttassa kucchi viya māsapūritapasibbako viya tintamāso viya cāti attho. Vihāraṃ pavisitvāti sace āhāradosena esa garubhāvo, abbhokāse caṅkamituṃ na sappāyanti caṅkamā orohitvā paṇṇasālaṃ pavisitvā pakatipaññatte āsane nisīdi. Paccattaṃ yoniso manasākāsīti, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti āvajjamāno attanoyeva upāyena manasi akāsi. Sace pana thero attano sīlaṃ āvajjetvā, ‘‘yaṃ hiyyo vā pare vā parasuve vā paribhuttaṃ avipakkamatthi, añño vā koci visabhāgadoso, sabbaṃ jīratu phāsukaṃ hotū’’ti hatthena kucchiṃ parāmasissa, māro pāpimā vilīyitvā agamissa. Thero pana tathā akatvā yoniso manasi akāsi. Mā tathāgataṃ vihesesīti yathā hi puttesu vihesitesu mātāpitaro vihesitāva honti, saddhivihārikaantevāsikesu vihesitesu ācariyupajjhāyā vihesitāva, janapade vihesite rājā vihesitova hoti, evaṃ tathāgatasāvake vihesite tathāgato vihesitova hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘mā tathāgataṃ vihesesī’’ti.
“站在门闩处”:就是正站在门闩的旁边。“门闩”是指门扇。意思是,他从叶屋门口出来,走到了叶屋外面,倚靠着门扇站立。显示巴利原文
Paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsīti patiaggaḷeva aṭṭhāsi. Aggaḷaṃ vuccati kavāṭaṃ, mukhena uggantvā paṇṇasālato nikkhamitvā bahipaṇṇasālāya kavāṭaṃ nissāya aṭṭhāsīti attho.
507 「我过去曾是你,波旬」:长老为何开始这段教导呢?据说,他当时这样思惟:「且说住于虚空的天神,人气能使百由旬内的诸天不适。确实有过这样的说法:『刹帝利啊,人气能令百由旬内的诸天不适。』而这位波旬,是城市居民,极其爱洁净,有大威德、具足神通力的大天王,居然钻入我的腹中,安坐在肠间胃囊之处,必定是极度受到了染污。如此卑劣、令人厌恶的地方,他都能钻入并坐下,那还有什么事他做不出来?还有什么能令他羞惭?然而,若告诉他『你曾是我的亲戚』,无人不会生起柔软心。好,我就直击他这亲戚观念的要害,以柔软的方式把他遣走。」如此思惟后,便开始了这段教导。显示巴利原文
507.Bhūtapubbāhaṃ pāpimāti kasmā idaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi? Thero kira cintesi – ‘‘ākāsaṭṭhakadevatānaṃ tāva manussagandho yojanasate ṭhitānaṃ ābādhaṃ karoti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘yojanasataṃ kho rājañña manussagandho deve ubbādhatī’ti (dī. ni. 2.415). Ayaṃ pana māro nāgariko paricokkho mahesakkho ānubhāvasampanno devarājā samāno mama kucchiyaṃ pavisitvā antānaṃ anto pakkāsayokāse nisinno ativiya paduṭṭho bhavissati. Evarūpaṃ nāma jegucchaṃ paṭikūlaṃ okāsaṃ pavisitvā nisīdituṃ sakkontassa kimaññaṃ akaraṇīyaṃ bhavissati, kiṃ aññaṃ lajjissati, tvaṃ mama ñātikoti pana vutte mudubhāvaṃ anāpajjamāno nāma natthi, handassa ñātikoṭiṃ paṭivijjhitvā mudukeneva naṃ upāyena vissajjessāmī’’ti cintetvā imaṃ desanamārabhi.
「那时,你曾是我的外甥」:意思是,你在那一时期,曾经是我的外甥。这是依传统而言。然而在天界,波旬并非通过继承父亲或祖父的世系来执掌王权,而是凭过去所造善业的功德力,于天界生为天王,尽其寿量安住,然后死去。另有另一人,由自己所造之业,在那个位置上生为统治者。由此可知,这位波旬也是如此:他从彼处死后,又行善业,在这个时期方得生于那主宰之位。显示巴利原文
So me tvaṃ bhāgineyyo hosīti so tvaṃ tasmiṃ kāle mayhaṃ bhāgineyyo hosi. Idaṃ paveṇivasena vuttaṃ. Devalokasmiṃ pana mārassa pitu vaṃso pitāmahassa vaṃso rajjaṃ karonto nāma natthi, puññavasena devaloke devarājā hutvā nibbatto, yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā cavati. Añño eko attanā katena kammena tasmiṃ ṭhāne adhipati hutvā nibbattati. Iti ayaṃ māropi tadā tato cavitvā puna kusalaṃ katvā imasmiṃ kāle tasmiṃ adhipatiṭṭhāne nibbattoti veditabbo.
「Vidhuro」(无重担者):指脱离了重担,意即与其他人不同。「以极少辛苦」:即以极少的痛苦。「牧牛者们」:指放牧山羊、绵羊的人。「踏上路途者」:即已走上道路的行人。「把干柴堆集在身上后」:从四面将干柴堆积成火葬堆。「给了火便离去」:他们估量火葬堆的大小,心想『这些柴便足以将身体烧尽』,便从四方点着火后离去。那柴堆如灯焰般燃烧,此时对长老而言,仿佛坐在水洞中一般。「抖擞衣服」:他从禅定出定后,于烟雾消散时,踩着颜色如紫矿花的火炭,抖了抖衣服。然而,他身上连一丝热气也没有,衣服也丝毫未被烧焦。这便是禅定带来的果报。显示巴利原文
Vidhuroti vigatadhuro, aññehi saddhiṃ asadisoti attho. Appakasirenāti appadukkhena. Pasupālakāti ajeḷakapālakā. Pathāvinoti maggapaṭipannā. Kāye upacinitvāti samantato citakaṃ bandhitvā. Aggiṃ datvā pakkamiṃsūti ettakena sarīraṃ pariyādānaṃ gamissatīti citakassa pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā catūsu disāsu aggiṃ datvā pakkamiṃsu. Citako padīpasikhā viya pajjali, therassa udakaleṇaṃ pavisitvā nisinnakālo viya ahosi. Cīvarāni papphoṭetvāti samāpattito vuṭṭhāya vigatadhūme kiṃsukavaṇṇe aṅgāre maddamāno cīvarāni vidhunitvā. Sarīre panassa usumamattampi nāhosi, cīvaresu aṃsumattampi najjhāyi, samāpattiphalaṃ nāmetaṃ.
508 「辱骂」:以十种辱骂事辱骂。「恶言」:以言语恶言相向。「激怒」:触恼。「恼害」:使对方痛苦。这一切,都是对以言语触恼的不同说法。「如同那邪恶的魔罗所为」:就像这些人的邪恶魔罗那样。「觅得机会」:意思是找到破绽,也就是获得令烦恼生起的所缘与条件。「秃头家伙」等词:本来应说「秃头、秃头者」,「沙门、沙门者」,但他们以轻蔑的口吻说成「秃头家伙、小沙门」。「下贱的」:指那些居士。「黑色的」:指黑色的,即肤色黑的人。「亲足子」:此处「亲族」指梵天。因为婆罗门称梵天为「祖父」。「足之子孙」即是「亲足子」,意为从梵天脊背之足出生的人。据说他们持有这样的见解:「婆罗门从梵天口生,刹帝利从胸生,吠舍从脐生,首陀罗从膝生,沙门则从脊背之足生。」显示巴利原文
508.Akkosathāti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosatha. Paribhāsathāti vācāya paribhāsatha. Rosethāti ghaṭṭetha. Vihesethāti dukkhāpetha. Sabbametaṃ vācāya ghaṭṭanasseva adhivacanaṃ. Yathā taṃ dūsī māroti yathā etesaṃ dūsī māro. Labhetha otāranti labhetha chiddaṃ, kilesuppattiyā ārammaṇaṃ paccayaṃ labheyyāti attho. Muṇḍakātiādīsu muṇḍe muṇḍāti samaṇe ca samaṇāti vattuṃ vaṭṭeyya, ime pana hīḷentā muṇḍakā samaṇakāti āhaṃsu. Ibbhāti gahapatikā. Kiṇhāti kaṇhā, kāḷakāti attho. Bandhupādāpaccāti ettha bandhūti brahmā adhippeto . Tañhi brāhmaṇā pitāmahoti voharanti. Pādānaṃ apaccā pādāpaccā, brahmuno piṭṭhipādato jātāti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ kira ayaṃ laddhi – ‘‘brāhmaṇā brahmuno mukhato nikkhantā, khattiyā urato, vessā nābhito, suddā jāṇuto, samaṇā piṭṭhipādato’’ti.
「我们是禅修者,我们是禅修者」:意为我们是禅修者,我们就是禅修者。「生于甘甜类者」:指生性懒惰的人。「他们思虑」:他们思考。「深度思虑、极度思虑」等词,是通过前缀来强化语义的。「寻找老鼠者」:指傍晚觅食时,从有洞的树出来,在树枝上搜寻老鼠的东西。据说它表现得极其安静、温和,几乎一动不动,一旦时机到来,便迅速捉住老鼠。「豺狼」:即野干,也叫做豺。「在门缝、污秽处、垃圾堆」:指在门缝里、污秽处、垃圾堆等地方。此处「门缝」指房屋的缝隙;「污秽处」指排除粪便的沟道;「垃圾堆」即堆放垃圾的地方。「脱离了承载者」:指走出荒漠旷野后,卸下了所背负的东西。「在门缝、污秽处、垃圾堆」:就是在门缝处、污秽处或垃圾堆。因为它也像是被捆住四肢一般,一动不动地傻待在那里。显示巴利原文
Jhāyinosmā jhāyinosmāti jhāyino mayaṃ jhāyino mayanti. Madhurakajātāti ālasiyajātā. Jhāyantīti cintayanti. Pajjhāyantītiādīni upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitāni. Mūsikaṃ maggayamānoti sāyaṃ gocaratthāya susirarukkhato nikkhantaṃ rukkhasākhāya mūsikaṃ pariyesanto. So kira upasantūpasanto viya niccalova tiṭṭhati, sampattakāle mūsikaṃ sahasā gaṇhāti. Kotthūti siṅgālo, soṇotipi vadanti. Sandhisamalasaṅkaṭireti sandhimhi ca samale ca saṅkaṭire ca. Tattha sandhi nāma gharasandhi. Samalo nāma gūthaniddhamanapanāḷi. Saṅkaṭiraṃ nāma saṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ. Vahacchinnoti kantārato nikkhanto chinnavaho. Sandhisamalasaṅkaṭireti sandhimhi vā samale vā saṅkaṭire vā. Sopi hi baddhagatto viya niccalo jhāyati.
「投生地狱」:如果魔罗附着于人的身体而做这种事,那么不善业应归于人,而不属于魔罗。然而,他并不附着于身体,而是显现丑恶之事的追悔所缘。据说那时,他使比丘们看起来像在快速地捕鱼,如同张网捕鱼,设粘竿捉鸟,带狗于林野中打猎,抓住女人坐在酒铺中,或在跳舞,在唱歌;又像在比丘尼的夜宿处或日住处,有异性坐着或站着。人们无论去到山林、树林还是寺院,见到这追悔所缘后,回来告诉他人:『沙门竟做这种非沙门的、不正当的行为,供养他们哪里会有善?以后不要给他们任何东西。』这样,那些人在所见之处辱骂持戒者,造下非福,成了充满恶趣的人。因此说『投生地狱』。显示巴利原文
Nirayaṃ upapajjantīti sace māro manussānaṃ sarīre adhimuccitvā evaṃ kareyya, manussānaṃ akusalaṃ na bhaveyya, mārasseva bhaveyya. Sarīre pana anadhimuccitvā visabhāgavatthuṃ vippaṭisārārammaṇaṃ dasseti, tadā kira so bhikkhū khippaṃ gahetvā macche ajjhottharante viya, jālaṃ gahetvā macche gaṇhante viya, lepayaṭṭhiṃ oḍḍetvā sakuṇe bandhante viya, sunakhehi saddhiṃ araññe migavaṃ carante viya, mātugāme gahetvā āpānabhūmiyaṃ nisinne viya, naccante viya, gāyante viya, bhikkhunīnaṃ rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu visabhāgamanusse nisinne viya, ṭhite viya ca katvā dassesi. Manussā araññagatāpi vanagatāpi vihāragatāpi vippaṭisārārammaṇaṃ passitvā āgantvā aññesaṃ kathenti – ‘‘samaṇā evarūpaṃ assamaṇakaṃ ananucchavikaṃ karonti, etesaṃ dinne kuto kusalaṃ, mā etesaṃ kiñci adatthā’’ti. Evaṃ te manussā diṭṭhadiṭṭhaṭṭhāne sīlavante akkosantā apuññaṃ pasavitvā apāyapūrakā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nirayaṃ upapajjantī’’ti.
509 Anvāviṭṭhā是回转、遍满的意思。Pharitvā vihariṃsū并非仅仅遍满而住。他们依止拘留孙佛世尊的教诫,安住于教诫,修习四种梵住,进而增长以禅那为近因的观,最终安立于阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
509.Anvāviṭṭhāti āvaṭṭitā. Pharitvā vihariṃsūti na kevalaṃ pharitvā vihariṃsu. Kakusandhassa pana bhagavato ovāde ṭhatvā ime cattāro brahmavihāre nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu.
510 Āgatiṃ vā gatiṃ vā,即结生之来处,或死没之去处,我皆不知。“心可能变异”是指依喜悦而产生变异。“投生天界”在此也应按前一方式理解。正如先前魔罗显示令人追悔的所缘,此处同样显示令人净信的所缘。据说那时,他在众人可见之处,将比丘们变现为:有的在空中经行,有的站立空中,有的结跏趺坐于空中,有的在空中缝补,有的背诵经典,有的在空中展开袈裟调适身体冷暖,有如新出家的比丘在空中游步,沙弥则停于半空中摘花。人们无论在山林、树林还是寺院,见到出家众这样的威仪后,回来告诉他人:“比丘乃至沙弥,皆有大神力、大威力,供养他们必得大果报,你们应当供养、尊敬他们。”于是,人们便以四种资具恭敬比丘僧团,广积福德,遍满天界。因此说“投生天界”。显示巴利原文
510.Āgatiṃvā gatiṃ vāti paṭisandhivasena āgamanaṭṭhānaṃ vā, cutivasena gamanaṭṭhānaṃ vā na jānāmi. Siyā cittassa aññathattanti somanassavasena aññathattaṃ bhaveyya. Saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantīti idhāpi purimanayeneva attho veditabbo. Yathā hi pubbe vippaṭisārakaraṃ ārammaṇaṃ dasseti, evamidhāpi pasādakaraṃ. So kira tadā manussānaṃ dassanaṭṭhāne bhikkhū ākāse gacchante viya, ṭhite viya pallaṅkena nisinne viya, ākāse sūcikammaṃ karonte viya, potthakaṃ vācente viya, ākāse cīvaraṃ pasāretvā kāyaṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpente viya, navapabbajite ākāsena carante viya, taruṇasāmaṇere ākāse ṭhatvā pupphāni ocinante viya katvā dassesi. Manussā araññagatāpi vanagatāpi vihāragatāpi pabbajitānaṃ taṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā āgantvā aññesaṃ kathenti – ‘‘bhikkhūsu antamaso sāmaṇerāpi evaṃmahiddhiko mahānubhāvā, etesaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ nāma hoti, etesaṃ detha sakkarothā’’ti. Tato manussā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ catūhi paccayehi sakkarontā bahuṃ puññaṃ katvā saggapathapūrakā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantī’’ti.
511 “来,诸比丘,你们应当安住于观身不净。”世尊巡行整个赡部洲,乃至前往只有两三位比丘的住处后——显示巴利原文
511.Etha tumhe, bhikkhave, asubhānupassino kāye viharathāti bhagavā sakalajambudīpaṃ āhiṇḍanto antamaso dvinnampi tiṇṇampi bhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā –
比丘们,若一位比丘的心常以修习不净想而多安住,则其心于行淫欲法便会退缩、回避、退转,无所舒展,或安住于舍,或安住于厌逆。显示巴利原文
‘‘Asubhasaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato methunadhammasamāpattiyā cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti.
比丘们,若一位比丘的心常以修习食厌逆想而多安住,则其心于味爱便会退缩、回避、退转,无所舒展,或安住于舍,或安住于厌逆。显示巴利原文
Āhāre paṭikūlasaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato rasataṇhāya cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti.
比丘们,若一位比丘的心常以修习一切世间不乐想而多安住,则其心于世间种种美妙事物便会退缩、回避、退转,无所舒展,或安住于舍,或安住于厌逆。显示巴利原文
Sabbaloke anabhiratisaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato lokacitresu cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti.
"比丘们,比丘以修习无常想之心,常多安住,其心便对利养、恭敬、名声退缩、回避、退转,不舒展,或住于舍,或住于厌逆。"——如此显示了功德后——显示巴利原文
Aniccasaññāparicitena , bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato lābhasakkārasiloke cittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhātī’’ti (a. ni. 7.49) evaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā –
"来,诸比丘!你们应安住于观身不净,于食作厌逆想,于一切世间作不乐想,于一切行随观无常。"他教导了这四种业处。那些比丘也在这四种业处上用功,增长观智,灭尽一切烦恼,证得阿拉汉果。这四种业处能平息贪,平息嗔与痴,能对治贪,对治嗔与痴。显示巴利原文
Etha tumhe, bhikkhave, asubhānupassī kāye viharatha, āhāre paṭikūlasaññino sabbaloke anabhiratisaññino sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccānupassinoti. Imāni cattāri kammaṭṭhānāni kathesi. Tepi bhikkhū imesu catūsu kammaṭṭhānesu kammaṃ karontā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sabbāsave khepetvā arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu, imānipi cattāri kammaṭṭhānāni rāgasantāni dosamohasantāni rāgapaṭighātāni dosamohapaṭighātāni cāti.
512 "拿起石块":指拿起一块可握于掌中的石头。因为此魔罗先是怂恿婆罗门居士辱骂比丘们,又试图借婆罗门居士之力为比丘僧团带来利养恭敬,都找不到可乘之机,现在想亲手加害,便附在某位青年身上,拿起这样一块石头。因此说"拿起石块"。显示巴利原文
512.Sakkharaṃ gahetvāti antomuṭṭhiyaṃ tiṭṭhanapamāṇaṃ pāsāṇaṃ gahetvā. Ayañhi brāhmaṇagahapatikehi bhikkhū akkosāpetvāpi, brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ vasena bhikkhusaṅghassa lābhasakkāraṃ uppādāpetvāpi, otāraṃ alabhanto idāni sahatthā upakkamitukāmo aññatarassa kumārassa sarīre adhimuccitvā evarūpaṃ pāsāṇaṃ aggahesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkharaṃ gahetvā’’ti.
“击碎你们的头”意为头被打碎,厚皮裂开,肉分成两半。但碎石并未击破头盖骨,撞到骨头后便弹回了。关于“如象之回视而回顾”:世尊听到击打声后,便如大象回顾——大象欲回顾时,不转动脖颈,而是以全身回转;世尊也是如此,以全身转过来回顾。这是因为凡夫的骨节节相连,独觉佛的骨如钩尖相接,而佛陀的骨则如锁链般紧密相连,所以佛陀无法转动脖颈;如同大象必须全身回转才能往后看,世尊便像由机关转动的金像般,以全身转过来回顾。回顾后,世尊站立而说:“这个愚痴的魔罗真是太不知分寸了。”意思是:这邪恶的魔罗作恶时全然不知限度,做得太过分了。显示巴利原文
Sīsaṃ vo bhindīti sīsaṃ bhindi, mahācammaṃ chijjitvā maṃsaṃ dvedhā ahosi. Sakkharā panassa sīsakaṭāhaṃ abhinditvā aṭṭhiṃ āhacceva nivattā. Nāgāpalokitaṃ apalokesīti pahārasaddaṃ sutvā yathā nāma hatthināgo ito vā etto vā apaloketukāmo gīvaṃ aparivattetvā sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apaloketi. Evaṃ sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apalokesi. Yathā hi mahājanassa aṭṭhīni koṭiyā koṭiṃ āhacca ṭhitāni, paccekabuddhānaṃ aṅkusalaggāni, na evaṃ buddhānaṃ. Buddhānaṃ pana saṅkhalikāni viya ekābaddhāni hutvā ṭhitāni, tasmā pacchato apalokanakāle na sakkā hoti gīvaṃ parivattetuṃ. Yathā pana hatthināgo pacchābhāgaṃ apaloketukāmo sakalasarīreneva parivattati, evaṃ parivattitabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā bhagavā yantena parivattitā suvaṇṇapaṭimā viya sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apalokesi , apaloketvā ṭhito pana, ‘‘na vāyaṃ dūsī māro mattamaññāsī’’ti āha. Tassattho, ayaṃ dūsī māro pāpaṃ karonto neva pamāṇaṃ aññāsi, pamāṇātikkantamakāsīti.
“与回顾同时”意为就在拘留孙佛世尊回顾的当下同一刹那。“从那处没”意为从那处天界命终,往生大地狱。实际上,他并非随处命终,而是先来到他化自在天界,才在那里命终。“与回顾同时”的表述,并非指由于世尊的回顾他才命终,而只是指出命终的时刻。然而,由于他冒犯了那位大弟子(阿罗汉),其寿命便如被斧头拦腰斩断般当场终止,应当这样理解。“获得三个名称”指具有三个名字。“六触处”指能作为对应于六触处的各别感受的缘。显示巴利原文
Sahāpalokanāyāti kakusandhassa bhagavato apalokaneneva saha taṅkhaṇaññeva. Tamhā ca ṭhānā cavīti tamhā ca devaṭṭhānā cuto, mahānirayaṃ upapannoti attho. Cavamāno hi na yattha katthaci ṭhito cavati, tasmā vasavattidevalokaṃ āgantvā cuto, ‘‘sahāpalokanāyā’’ti ca vacanato na bhagavato apalokitattā cutoti veditabbo, cutikāladassanamattameva hetaṃ. Uḷāre pana mahāsāvake viraddhattā kudāriyā pahaṭaṃ viyassa āyu tattheva chijjitvā gatanti veditabbaṃ. Tayo nāmadheyyā hontīti tīṇi nāmāni honti. Chaphassāyatanikoti chasu phassāyatanesu pāṭiyekkāya vedanāya paccayo.
“以铁桩集合”意为被铁桩所聚拢。“各自感受者”指自己招致的感受。“铁桩与铁桩在心脏相遇”指铁桩与另一铁桩在心脏中央相撞。据说,生于该地狱的有情身体高三由旬,长老(大目犍连)的身体也是如此。那时,地狱狱卒拿起如棕榈树干般粗大的铁桩,那些铁桩燃烧、炽热、火焰冲天,他们一边来回捣击心脏中央,一边说道:“你就是用这种方法策划并造下恶业的”——就像在糕饼槽里捣糕一样。其中有五十人从脚的方向,五十人从头的方向,这样捣击前进,去时经五百年到达另一端,回转时又经五百年回到心脏中央。正是以此而言。显示巴利原文
Saṅkusamāhatoti ayasūlehi samāhato. Paccattavedaniyoti sayameva vedanājanako. Saṅkunā saṅku hadaye samāgaccheyyāti ayasūlena saddhiṃ ayasūlaṃ hadayamajjhe samāgaccheyya. Tasmiṃ kira niraye upapannānaṃ tigāvuto attabhāvo hoti, therassāpi tādiso ahosi. Athassa hi nirayapālā tālakkhandhapamāṇāni ayasūlāni ādittāni sampajjalitāni sajotibhūtāni sayameva gahetvā punappunaṃ nivattamānā, – ‘‘iminā te ṭhānena cintetvā pāpaṃ kata’’nti pūvadoṇiyaṃ pūvaṃ koṭṭento viya hadayamajjhaṃ koṭṭetvā, paṇṇāsa janā pādābhimukhā paṇṇāsa janā sīsābhimukhā koṭṭetvā gacchanti, evaṃ gacchantā pañcahi vassasatehi ubho ante patvā puna nivattamānā pañcahi vassasatehi hadayamajjhaṃ āgacchanti. Taṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ.
“出离受”指异熟所生的出离受。据说,此受在大地狱中,比地狱本身的苦受更为剧烈。正如涂抹药油后的七天护理,比之前七日饮用油脂的调养更为难忍;同样,在大地狱的苦受中,于附属地狱所感的异熟出离受,其苦倍增,他们是这么说的。“譬如鱼”:人的头颅是圆的,以矛刺击时,矛刺难以找到着力点而滑开;鱼的头则长而扁阔,矛刺有落脚之处,不会滑脱,容易击中,因此受报时便有这样的头形。显示巴利原文
Vuṭṭhānimanti vipākavuṭṭhānavedanaṃ. Sā kira mahāniraye vedanāto dukkhatarā hoti, yathā hi sinehapānasattāhato parihārasattāhaṃ dukkhataraṃ, evaṃ mahānirayadukkhato ussade vipākavuṭṭhānavedanā dukkhatarāti vadanti. Seyyathāpi macchassāti purisasīsañhi vaṭṭaṃ hoti, sūlena paharantassa pahāro ṭhānaṃ na labhati parigalati, macchasīsaṃ āyataṃ puthulaṃ, pahāro ṭhānaṃ labhati , avirajjhitvā kammakāraṇā sukarā hoti, tasmā evarūpaṃ sīsaṃ hoti.
513 “冒犯了无与伦比的声闻弟子”:即冲撞、冒犯了无与伦比的声闻弟子。“各自感受”:指自己生起的各别感受。“有这样的地狱”:此处的地狱应依据《天使经》来说明。“你将遭遇黑暗之苦”:黑色的魔罗,你将遭受痛苦。“在湖的中央”:在大海的中央,以水为依处而建立的宫殿,能住劫而立,其色如琉璃,所放光明如同燃烧在山顶的芦束般闪耀、灿烂。那些宫殿中,天女们以青莲色等种种色彩而舞。“谁能了知此”:谁能了知这宫殿的事迹?因此,这里应当依据天宫事与饿鬼事来理解其含义。“以脚趾震动”应依《殿堂震动经》来说明。“那韦迦亚塔宫殿”应依《小渴爱灭尽解脱经》来说明。“他询问帝释天”同样应依该经说明。“在善法堂附近”:即在善法堂的附近;不过,此处的善法堂是梵天界的善法堂,而非三十三天。因为没有善法堂的天界是不存在的。显示巴利原文
513.Vidhuraṃ sāvakamāsajjāti vidhuraṃ sāvakaṃ ghaṭṭayitvā. Paccattavedanāti sayameva pāṭiyekkavedanājanakā. Īdiso nirayo āsīti imasmiṃ ṭhāne nirayo devadūtasuttena dīpetabbo. Kaṇha-dukkhaṃ nigacchasīti kāḷaka-māra, dukkhaṃ vindissasi. Majjhe sarassāti mahāsamuddassa majjhe udakaṃ vatthuṃ katvā nibbattavimānāni kappaṭṭhitikāni honti, tesaṃ veḷuriyassa viya vaṇṇo hoti, pabbatamatthake jalitanaḷaggikkhandho viya ca nesaṃ acciyo jotanti, pabhassarā pabhāsampannā honti, tesu vimānesu nīlabhedādivasena nānattavaṇṇā accharā naccanti. Yo etamabhijānātīti yo etaṃ vimānavatthuṃ jānātīti attho. Evamettha vimānapetavatthukeneva attho veditabbo. Pādaṅguṭṭhena kampayīti idaṃ pāsādakampanasuttena dīpetabbaṃ. Yo vejayantaṃ pāsādanti idaṃ cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttisuttena dīpetabbaṃ. Sakkaṃ so paripucchatīti idampi teneva dīpetabbaṃ. Sudhammāyābhito sabhanti sudhammasabhāya samīpe, ayaṃ pana brahmaloke sudhammasabhāva, na tāvatiṃsabhavane. Sudhammasabhāvirahito hi devaloko nāma natthi.
“在梵天界光明”:指在梵天界,世尊与大目犍连、大迦叶等声闻弟子一起,入火界定安坐后,所散发出的光明。一时,世尊在梵天界的善法堂天众集会处,了知梵天大众心中生起这样的念头:“有没有哪位沙门或婆罗门具足如此大神力,能来到这里?”于是世尊便前往那里,端坐于梵天大众的顶上,入火界定,并思惟让大目犍连等人前来。大目犍连等人也去到那里,礼拜导师后,入火界定,各自安坐一方。整个梵天界顿时化为一片光明。导师宣讲了阐明四圣谛的法,开示结束时,无数千梵天都安立于道果之中。正是针对此事而说了这些偈颂,其中的义理应依据《某梵天经》来阐明。显示巴利原文
Brahmaloke pabhassaranti brahmaloke mahāmoggallānamahākassapādīhi sāvakehi saddhiṃ tassa tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā nisinnassa bhagavato obhāsaṃ. Ekasmiñhi samaye bhagavā brahmaloke sudhammāya devasabhāya sannipatitvā, – ‘‘atthi nu kho koci samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṃmahiddhiko. Yo idha āgantuṃ sakkuṇeyyā’’ti cintentasseva brahmagaṇassa cittamaññāya tattha gantvā brahmagaṇassa matthake nisinno tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā mahāmoggallānādīnaṃ āgamanaṃ cintesi. Tepi gantvā satthāraṃ vanditvā tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā paccekaṃ disāsu nisīdiṃsu, sakalabrahmaloko ekobhāso ahosi. Satthā catusaccappakāsanaṃ dhammaṃ desesi, desanāpariyosāne anekāni brahmasahassāni maggaphalesu patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyimā gāthā vuttā, so panāyamattho aññatarabrahmasuttena dīpetabbo.
“以解脱触”:即以禅那解脱去触证。“林”:指赡部洲洲。“东毗提诃洲”:指东毗提诃洲。“以及住于地的人们”:指生活在地上的人,即住在西牛货洲和北俱卢洲的人。意谓他们也都全部触证了。此义应通过调伏难陀乌巴难达的故事来说明,此事在《清净道论·神通品》中已有详细阐述。“他招致非福”:他获得了非福。“对比丘们,你不要生起这种期待”:即“我要去困扰比丘们”——你切勿生起这样的期待。其余各处都显而易见。显示巴利原文
Vimokkhenaaphassayīti jhānavimokkhena phusi. Vananti jambudīpaṃ. Pubbavidehānanti pubbavidehānañca dīpaṃ. Ye ca bhūmisayā narāti bhūmisayā narā nāma aparagoyānakā ca uttarakurukā ca. Tepi sabbe phusīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ pana attho nandopanandadamanena dīpetabbo. Vatthu visuddhimagge iddhikathāya vitthāritaṃ. Apuññaṃ pasavīti apuññaṃ paṭilabhi. Āsaṃ mā akāsi bhikkhūsūti bhikkhū vihesemīti etaṃ āsaṃ mā akāsi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.